Home

Multilin - ElectricalManuals.net

1. gt For Transformer Voltage enter the Phase to Neutral value of Test Voltage previously calculated gt For Transformer Current enter the Full Load Current previously calculated gt For Multipliers enter the PT and CT multipliers previously calculated TrfIT Secondary is the Base Value of Voltage and Current at the Instrument Transformer Secondary of the Power Transformer These numbers are obtained by dividing the Transformer Voltage and Current by their respective Multipliers The Meter Trf values for Voltage and Current are obtained by dividing the Meter Base values by the TrflT Secondary values GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS Load Loss at Transformer No Load Loss Watts kW 1 Phase kW No Load Loss No Load Loss VA kVA Exciting Current 1 Phase kVA Self Cooled Rating 100 ye 100 kVA No Load Loss VAR KVAR SORT No Load Loss kVA No Load Loss kW SQRTI Je j SQRT SQRT Full Load Loss Watts kW 1 Phase Kw Load Loss Full Load Loss VA kVA lmpedance 1 Phase kVA Self Cooled Rating 100 ye 100 kVA Full Load Loss VAR KVAR SQRTI Full Load Loss kVA Full Load Loss kW SQRTI Je SQRT SQRT Value Quantity value gi m eae Exp a ot Trf Base Factor
2. DEV_IP IP address for XXX XXX XXX XXX Modbus TCP devices DEV_MAX_PACKET_LEN Max modbus EPM 127 registers for a device s response buffer EPM amp DMMS 50 DEV_POLL_ALARM Enable or disable device alarm poll function Yes Enable No Disable GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Table 6 10 System Elements Device Element Description Settings DEV_ALARM_OPTIONS Alarm poll options 1 Limits changed 2 Inputs changed 3 Waveform captured 4 PQ CBEMA event captured 5 Control output changed 9 Communication failure DEV_ALARM_DELAY Delay time for Min 0 reporting alarm Max 300000 condition in Default 0 milliseconds for limit and input type alarms DEV_COMM_TIMEOUT Device Min 500 communication Max 32000 timeout in Default 500 milliseconds DEV_DATA_FORMAT Data format O to 0 000000 DEV_PARENT Parent device ID see NOTE Value from 1 to 16 DEV_MODBUS_REG_BASE Device s modbus register base is either O based integer value or 1 based integer value default DEV_TCP_PORT Remote Modbus TCP device s port number Default setting 502 Table 6 11 Data Element Attributes Attribute Description Settings D_UID User assigned device polling Max 16 characters data unique ID D_LABEL User assigned data label Max
3. Data entry is straightforward Each type of data is described below Note that not all selections will appear on the screen at the same time You have to scroll the screen from right to left to reach some of the functions Certain entries such as Format Data Size etc have different allowable selections depending on the data point used The pull down menu will automatically adjust to provide the appropriate selections for that data point y Most Frequently Used Custom Modbus Map Readings are shown on table 3 2 below E Data Point Selection There are two different ways to select a Data Point gt Refer to the Modbus Map and find the associated Line and Point for the value you want When you enter those values into the table the software will complete the associated Group and Channel OR gt Double click the Group field gt From the pull down menus select a Group and Associated Channel value The software will complete the Map and Line values GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 23 GENERAL SETTINGS 3 24 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER Number of Registers The number of registers polled for this Data Point is automatically computed The number is dependent on the Data Size selected in the Data Size column Start Register Start Register numbers are automatically assigned The registers are assigned and adjusted automatically to take into account previous entries and data sizes This i
4. Violation Limit Attempts If Password was enabled and the user failed to enter a correct password a Violation Call Failure Flag will be set and the Violation Counter will Increment by 1 Once the total number of violations goes over the limit of three the modem will enter Lockout mode The modem will not answer calls until the Violation Lockout Time is reached Violation Lockout Time Hours Modem will stay in Lockout mode until this Lockout Time is reached Call Failure Reset Limit Hours If the Password was enabled and the Total Violations Call Failures did not reach the Violation Limit modem not in Lockout Mode the modem resets the Violation Call Failure Counter when it reaches this reset limit Share the Phone Line Option to Enable or Disable modem s Share the Phone Line feature Example call failure reset limit 1 hour violation lockout time 24 hours incoming connection failure count 3 The first connection with a bad password occurred at 10 00am Another occurred at 10 05 a third at 10 30 a fourth at 10 45 all with a bad password That s more than 3 in 1 hour so the modem will not answer the phone again until 10 45am the next day If the fourth connection attempt had been received at 11 31 instead of 10 45 the modem would have answered the call because the first 3 had expired at 11 30 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CON
5. Calendar 1 2002 Calendar 2 0000 Calendar 3 0000 Calendar 4 0000 Calendar 5 0000 Calendar 6 0000 Calendar 7 2006 Calendar 8 0000 Calendar 9 0000 Calendar 10 0000 Calendar 11 2001 Calendar 12 0000 Calendar 13 0000 Calendar 14 0000 Calendar 15 0000 Calendar 16 0000 Calendar 17 0000 Calendar 18 0000 g Calendar 19 0000 Calendar 20 0000 gt Select the calendar year you would like to edit and click Retrieve After the calendar year has been retrieved see section 10 2 for details on editing VIEWING TOU ACCUMULATED DATA CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE 9 4 Viewing TOU Accumulated Data gt From the Real Time Poll menu select Revenue Energy and Demand Readings gt Time of Use Registers ommunicator Ext File Connection Real Time Poll Tools I O Devices TOU Calendar Logs View Help was Ah Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval Internal KYZ Output Accumulators Total Average Power Factor Time of Use rs The following screen appears If Passwords are Enabled you must enter a Password to view this screen Time of Use Readings Start Time End Time Register Register Accumulations Register Cumulative Demand Continuou Polling 0 or PK cory econ rin Hen gt From the Group pull down menu select the month or season accumulations you would like to view gt From the Register pull down menu select the individual register accumulation
6. Server Side Include Function Name Parameter Description ssi_show_pt Show PT ratio GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Table 6 7 Special Functions for MODBUS DEVICE 1 Server Side Include Function ree Name Parameter Description ssi_show_ct Show CT ratio ssi_show_system Show hookup info ssi_show_dev_type Show device type model ssi_show_dev_name Show device name ssi_show_boot Show boot firmware version ssi_show_run_time Show runtime firmware version ssi_show_dsp_boot Show DSP firmware boot version ssi_show_dsp_runtime Show DSP runtime firmware version ssi_show_sn Show device serial number ssi_show_com_state Show COM firmware runtime state ssi_show_dsp_state Show DSP firmware runtime state ssi_show_pw_state Show password protection state ssi_show_mac Show ethernet MAC address ssi_show_ip Show IP address ssi_show_mask Show subnet mask ssi_show_gateway Show default gateway IP address ssi_show_dnp_lan_wan Show DNP LAN WAN status 6 6 2 Configuring WebXML The term XML stands for Extensible Markup Language XML is a markup language similar to HTML which is used to describe data HTML displays the data XML does not replace HTML it compliments HTML An XML document is information wrapped in XML tags A piece of software has to be written to send receive or displa
7. gt Before programming Limits set the CT and PT ratios first then set the Limit and Waveform Full Scales The software automatically updates the Full Scale However you can set it separately from the CT and PT Ratios gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Limits or double click on the Limits line The following submenu appears LimitID 01 Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage A N LimitID 02 Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage B N LimitID 03 Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage O N LimitID 04 Fifty Millisecond Updated CurrentA This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings for Limits Not all limits are shown above Limit ID extends to 32 3 40 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS gt Double click on any of the settings Limit ID 01 etc Device Profile Limits The Limits screen appears Assigned Item 872 55 OR 3822 60 OR 0 986 LEAD AND 4105 14 OR 664 80 OR 4105 14 OR 3 00 OR Percentage of Full Scale settings The limits are set in of full scale of FS so that when a user creates a profile that limit setting will be constant This is true even though the CT and PT Ratios change when the meter or a new meter is placed in a different location Changing the CT and PT Ratios will not effect the of full scale limits previously set This is u
8. 4 1 byte unsigned high byte of the Modbus Register 5 1 byte unsigned low byte of the Modbus Register 6 2 bytes signed integer 7 2 bytes unsigned integer 8 4 bytes signed long integer 9 4 bytes unsigned long integer 10 8 bytes signed long long integer 11 8 bytes unsigned long long integer 12 4 bytes IEEE float 13 1 digit 8 bits representation 14 1 digit 4 bits representation aka Packed BCD 15 1 byte signed 16 1 byte unsigned 17 8 bytes IEEE float 6 34 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS v NOTE v NOTE Parameters for D_USE_SPECIAL 0 do not multiply any number 1 multiply by CT ratio mainly used for current values 2 multiply by CT Aux ratio 3 multiply by PT ratio mainly used for voltage values 5 multiply by CT and PT ratio mainly used for power energy values ip ip 4 multiply by PT Aux ratio ip ip 6 multiply by the value in D_SPECIAL generic modbus device only If D_VALUEMODE is set to Interpreted when used with Meter Input Values the result will be a user defined name in the Meter s Device Profile instead of a value of 0 or 1 Poll_data xml Root tag lt GE_Multilin_DATA gt and lt GE_Multilin DATA gt One 1 system element lt GE_Multilin_SYSTEM gt and lt GE_Multilin_SYSTEM gt Eight 8 device elements lt DEVICE_X gt and lt DEVICE_X gt
9. Average Current Average Input Pulse Accumulations GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL These values are the RMS values of the indicated quantity as calculated after approximately 50 milliseconds 3 cycles of sampling These values are the RMS values of the indicated quantity as calculated after one second 60 cycles of sampling An event or condition in a meter that can cause a trigger or call back to occur A short label that identifies particular quantities or values displayed for example kWh When applied to current values amps the average is a calculated value that corresponds to the thermal average over a specified time interval The interval is specified by the user in the meter profile The interval is typically 15 minutes So Average Amps is the thermal average of amps over the previous 15 minute interval The thermal average rises to 90 of the actual value in each time interval For example if a constant 100amp load is applied the thermal average will indicate 90 amps after one time interval 99 amps after two time intervals and 99 9 amps after three time intervals When applied to Input Pulse Accumulations the Average refers to the block fixed window average value of the input pulses GLOSSARY 1 GLOSSARY Average Power Bit Binary Block Window Avg Power Byte CBEMA Curve Channel Cold Load Pickup GLOSSARY 2 GLOSSARY When applied to power values
10. Samples Samples Cycles per Time per ehannels per Capture Approx Cycle Channel Analog HSI 16 7 8 1024 64 1 second 32 7 8 1024 32 1 2 second 64 7 8 1024 16 1 4 second 128 7 8 1024 8 1 8 second 256 3 8 2048 8 1 8 second 512 1 8 4096 8 1 8 second Ki y Note on Waveform Event Captures NOTE A screen of data is one capture If you set Total Captures to 3 and you are recording at 16 samples per cycle you will record 16 Samples 3 x 64 192 cycles of recorded waveforms 128 Samples 3 x 8 24 cycles of recorded waveforms GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 49 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER With the 2 MB module you have a total of 64 total captures With the 4 MB module you have a total of 96 captures You can partition the memory in any fashion required for the specific application There is no limitation on the amount of cycles that can be recorded per event gt EN 50160 Flicker With the Flicker Settings screen the user can set the test times for the Flicker function gt To choose the total amount of captures click on the Total Captures pull down menu Select from 0 to 96 captures The higher the number the more information you will be stringing together When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the
11. e Start Register Start Register numbers are automatically assigned The registers are assigned and adjusted automatically to take into account previous entries and data sizes This is the Start Number for the first register to use in polling e Format From the pull down menu select a type of Format for a value such as Floating Integer etc GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Data Size From the pull down menu select the Number of Bytes you want to represent the Data Point Unit f the polled value is viewed as an integer the Unit field tells you where to place the decimal point Example If you select 01 a polling value 1234 would be interpreted as 12 34 Example If you select 100 a polling value 1234 would be interpreted as 123400 Pri Sec The meter normally computes values in secondary units Where applicable you may select primary or secondary If Primary is selected the value is multiplied by the appropriate CT and or PT values Sign Abs Where appropriate you may have the option of having the data point computed as a signed or absolute value Byte Order For most of the Data Points the user can select the polling order of the number of bytes selected by the Data Size field Example For a four byte Data Point the bytes can be arranged in any order for polling purposes Display Modulo Offset Depending on the Data Point selected you ma
12. gt On this screen program the Device Properties for each device at a Location If the Device has a Serial Port Device Connection the top example screen appears If it has a Network Device Connection the lower example screen appears Connection Manager Location Device Editor Device Properties Address Name Description Protocol Device Type IP Address Network Port Device 1 Device 1 Modbus TCP EPM 9000 Series 3 90 240 300 502 FIGURE 5 1 Network Device Connection Settings Connection Manager Location Device Editor Device Properties Address Name Description Protocol Device Type Comm Port FIGURE 5 2 Serial Port Device Connection Settings Device Properties Device 1 Device 1 Modbus TCP EPM 9000 Series Address 1 247 Unique Address GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION Name Easily Recognizable Name Description Type and Number for example Protocol Modbus RTU or ASCII Modbus TCP El Protocol for other devices Device Type EPM 6000 Others EPM 4000 5000 7000 9000 Series Meters and I O Modules Comm Port 1 or 2 Serial Port Only IP Address 100 10 10 10 Example Network Port Number 502 Default Network gt Click Close to save settings and return to the previous screen Edit another Device gt Repeat steps above or gt Click Close to return to the Connection Manager scree
13. gt _ Br Ys m ym Ow b regieve open log mor connect _dis polling energy THO phasors fliker status status alarms Access to all GE Communicator EXT features Profile Retrieves the Device Profile from the currently connected meter Same as selecting Tools gt Edit Current Device Profile Use to configure the meter See Chapters 3 4 5 Retrieve Logs Downloads logs from the currently connected meter to the computer Same as selecting Logs gt Retrieve Log s from Device See Chapter 8 Open Log Opens a previously retrieved EPM Log File Same as selecting File gt Open gt EPM Log File See Chapter 8 Connection Manager Establishes communication between the computer and multiple meters at local or remote sites Same as selecting Connection gt Connection Manager See Chapter 2 Connect Establishes communication between the computer and one directly connected meter Same as selecting Connection gt Quick Connect See Chapter 2 Disconnect Terminates the connection between the computer and the currently connected meter s Same as selecting Connection gt Disconnect See Chapter 2 Polling Displays instantaneous polling data from the currently connected meter Same as selecting Real Time Poll gt Instantaneous Polling See Chapter 7 Energy Displays Power and Energy readings from the currently connected meter THD Displays magnitude and angle readings for Volts and Current values Spectrum pre
14. 3 42 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS gt To set the Power Factor Limits double click on any of the Power Factor settings in the Limit 1 or Limit 2 Column The Power Factor Programming Screen will appear Device Profile Power Factor Power Factor is broken into four quadrants The screen lets you set a limit in two of the four quardrants To set a limit gt From the pull down menus select a Quadrant and Less Than or Greater Than Full Scales gt Type in the Power Factor number The graph will illustrate your selections by shading the Out of Limit bands The area of the graph not covered by shading is within Normal Operational Range Method 1 Quadrants Q1 Lag Q2 Lag Q3 Lead Q4 Lead gt To display a graph of Method 2 Quadrants Q1 Lag Q2 Lead Q3 Lag Q4 Lead go to the Programming Labels screen section 3 18 of the Device Profile gt Inthe lower drop down menu click on Method 2 then return to the Limits screen gt Click on any PF setting fi This meter is a real four quadrant meter Therefore limits can be set for capacitive and 4 inductive PF when generating or consuming power NOTE gt When all settings are complete click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the mete
15. 32 characters D_ADDR Modbus register address 0 or 1 based integer value D_LENGTH Number of Modbus registers D_TYPE Data type For EPM9450 9650 9800 devices use Fx Communication Data Formats For Generic Modbus Device Type see NOTE below for values D_USE_SPECIAL Special functions See NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS Table 6 11 Data Element Attributes Attribute Description Settings D_VALUEMODE Value mode Raw Primary Secondary Value for Generic Modbus Device Type Interpreted See NOTE D_CHANNEL Channel ID for I O type values EPM only D_SHOW_KM Format value with k or M Auto auto show k or M k fixed to k M fixed to M D_NA_VAL If a numerical value is set Numerical Value for EPM here and a real polled value matched with this number a x string will be stored in the xml data file only D_FUNCTION_CODE Modbus protocol function code 1 2 3 default 4 D_BYTE_ORDER Data byte order for Generic Modbus device Settings if source is 0x12345678 O MSR MSB 0x1234 0x5678 MS reg first MS byte first default 1 MSR LSB 0x3412 0x7856 MS reg first LS byte first 2 LSR MSB 0x5678 0x1234 LS reg first MS byte first 3 LSR LSB 0x7856 0x3412 LS reg first LS byte first D_SPECIAL Generic multiplier value for Generic Modbus device applied when D_USE_SP
16. Advanced Settings If use DHCP check the Enable DHCP Tab Screen DHCP box COMPUTER NAME DNS 1 DNS IP 1 Tab Screen 2 DNS IP 2 optional SERVICES Tab S os FTP Client Initial setting 1 FTP Server IP or Name DNS setup required 2 FTP Server Port Number FTP Client Tab Screen 3 Startup Directory on the server files in subdirectory are not supported 4 User name and password 6 50 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS WEBALARM FLOW CHART 6 12 WebAlarm Flow Chart CONFIGURATION SZ Edit Device Profile Communication Ports 1 IP address if not in DHCP mode 2 subnet mask 3 default gateway Advanced Settings DHCP Tab Screen SERVICES Tab Screen ALARMI EMAIL Tab Screen COMPUTER NAME DNS Tab Screen Modify poll_profile xml file if customizing WebAlarm for 1 additional email addresses and formats 2 Alarm polling intervals 3 Alarm format type GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL INP 100 10 100 BaseT Ethernet Card ALARM WebAlarm WebAlarm Real Time Email Alerts Up to 9 Simultaneous Recipients Short Format Text Messaging Long Format Full Email Support If use DHCP check the Enable DHCP box Check SMTP Client to Enable Disable Email Initial setting OFF Cell Phones 1 Computers 2 PDAs 3 Cell Phones 1 SMTP Server IP or Name DNS Setup Required 2 Email Server Port Number 3 Administrator Em
17. B In English versions the following characters will not work lt gt For meters used internationally by multilingual users it is recommended that you use ONLY alphanumeric characters allowed by your Operating System 3 16 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS 3 3 6 Communications gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside General Settings and double click on the Communications line This submenu appears 1 57600 N 1 Modbus RTU 1 57600 N 1 Modbus RTU 1 9600N1 Modbus RTU 1 57600 N 1 Modbus RTU This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings for the meter s four Communications Ports Address Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Transmit Delay Communication Protocol Network Option and Internal Modem Option You may use a connected External Display to learn the current baud rate address and communication protocol of each meter port See EPM 9450 9650 Installation and Operation Manual for details e Port 2 settings are ignored when the Internal Network and Internal Modem options are installed and the address is 1 e Port 3 is factory set to the External Display s baud rate of 9600 e The External Display only communicates to Address 1 e You must use Port 3 or Port 4 to connect any external devices such as a External O module e Port 3 and Port 4 are Master Slave selectable
18. Case 10043 GetWSAErrorString Case 10044 GetWSAErrorString Case 10045 GetWSAErrorString GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Permission Denied Bad Address Invalid Argument Too many open files Operation would block Operation now in progress Operation already in progress Socket operation on nonsocket Destination address required Message too long Protocol wrong type for socket Protocol not available Protocol not supported Socket type not supported Operation not supported on socket NETWORK ERROR CODES Case 10046 Case 10047 Case 10048 Case 10049 Case 10050 Case 10051 Case 10052 Case 10053 Case 10054 Case 10055 Case 10056 Case 10057 Case 10058 Case 10059 Case 10060 Case 10061 Case 10062 Case 10063 Case 10064 Case 10065 Case 10066 Case 10067 Case 10068 Case 10069 Case 10070 Case 10071 Case 10091 Case 10092 Case 10093 Case 10101 Case 11001 Case 11002 Case 11003 Case 11004 GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAEr
19. Dial up r Device Information Data Switch Strings ny You must set up an address protocol device type and a unique name for each device Optional settings for each device are passwords for an EPM 9450 9650 or 9800 When GE Communicator EXT retrieves a log from a device and it does not have a predefined name it will use the device name assigned here as the file name for the retrieved log Add Multiple Devices gt Type in a unique Device Name gt Under Device Information type in a unique Address gt To select a protocol use the pull down menu Select Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII gt To select a Type of device use the pull down menu V Click your selection gt Add Level 1 Password and or Level 2 Password if desired Not required gt Click OK or Cancel to return to the Devices for Scripts screen 14 14 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM EDITING A SCRIPT DEVICE 14 8 Editing a Script Device vi 1 gt Select a device that you would like to edit by clicking on it The Edit Script Device screen will appear If you click Edit before you select a device a window will appear that reminds you to Please select a device Add Ed Script Device Script Connection type Remote Dial up Connechon typu for this devio Device informaton gt Using the windows available select or deselect the item s you would like to change gt Ed
20. Energy Secondary Plus and Minus Watt VAR and VA Readings Energy 18V SquaredT Cumulative Demend oyPrime __UncompensetedEnergy Hours Primary Wh Wh VARh VARh VAh __J Poling 00121689 gt Click Print to send the data to a printer gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 7 3 4 Energy Pulse and Accumulations in the Interval To view the Energy Pulse amp Accumulations in the Interval of the currently connected device gt Select Energy Pulse amp Accumulations in the Interval from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The following set of screens appears Energy Pulses and Accurnedations in the Interval VARNA faunas Rec Wh pv Ah VAh uJ VAR Wh VARh GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS These screens are Read Only They display the readings from the Interval set on several screens Demand Integration Intervals Chapters 3 4 Primary Current amp Voltage Thresholds Interval in minutes 15 Initial setting Energy Pulses and Accurmudations in the Interval BV SquwedT Uncomperaatad Enemy Socondary 0000000 Internal KYZ Internal EYZ Internal Internal internal KEYZ IA LED GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Eig REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING amp V Squared T Energy Pulses and
21. Through Device Locator Start Address hz End Address 247 Searching for a device at Address 168 De pe BAI 0 to ImA BAI 0 to 20mA 8AI 0 to 10V Digital Input Module gt Device Locator will continue to search for devices until it reaches the end of the specified criteria or until you click Stop gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 10 26 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES LOCATOR UTILITY STAND ALONE METHOD 10 17 Locator Utility Stand Alone Method The Stand Alone Locator utility searches for any I O device connected directly to your computer it is not for use with remote connections The search criteria is a programmable range of baud rates and addresses When a device is found Locator displays its name baud rate and address To make a Stand Alone connection you will need the following e RS 232 Cable e Unicom 2500 or similar RS 232 RS 485 converter e AnRS 485 cable with power wires separated from communication wires see diagram below e A15 20V DC at 50 200 mA power source for the I O module such as model PSIO you may also use any port on a EPM 9450 9650 Meter as a power source gt Wire the Unicom I O module and computer as shown Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 High Speed Inputs IRIG B SEVE SLEVS SISEVW SIEVW oaooocooeoooo oo l I To run the I O take power from the esesce Meter or any other source supplying Use RS 232 to connect 15
22. i RS232 485 Converter gt Use an RS 232 cable to connect the Unicom 2500 and your computer gt Set the Converter to operate at 57600 gt Set the Converter to DCE and HD GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 31 STAND ALONE PROGRAMMER CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES gt Click on the GE Communicator EXT Connect icon on the tool bar or select Connect gt Quick Connect The following screen appears Serial Port g Network Device Address ib Host Network Port i Protocol This screen displays your computer s communications settings gt Inthe Device Address field enter the current address of one of the 1 0 modules in the group If you do not know the address use the Stand Alone Locator utility section 11 16 gt Inthe Baud Rate field enter a baud rate that matches the baud rate of the O s 57600 recommended If you do not know the baud rate use the Stand Alone Locator utility section 11 16 gt Inthe Serial Port field enter the computer s communication port into which the RS 232 cable is inserted gt Leave the Protocol field set to Modbus RTU gt Click Connect GE Communicator EXT searches for a module at the specified baud rate and address When it has located the O s the following screen appears see NOTE below List of Currently Connected Devices I Device Device Type Boot Run time DSP Boot DSP Run time Comm State DSP State On Time Serial NVRAM Prote
23. 249 Baud Rate 9600 17 600 34 600 52 700 Port COM 1 COM 99 OS dependent Protocol Modbus ASCII or RTU 5 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION Flow Control None or Hardware y Settings for EPM 6000 IrDA Port Connection NOTE Device Address 1 Baud Rate 57600 Protocol Modbus ASCII Flow Control Hardware gt Click the Connect button to connect software to your meter If a connection is established the Device Status screen appears showing the Currently Connected Devices List of Currently Connected Devices fi If there is more than one device a list will appear on this screen Click OK The GE v Communicator EXT 3 0 Main Screen Appears NOTE 5 2 2 Connection Manager Connection Manager is used if you want to Add or Remove Connecton Locations and or Devices at Locations gt From the GE Communicator EXT Menu click Connection Manager The Connection Manager screen appears Connection Manager List of Locations Connected to Location a oo GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 3 EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER List of Locations On the left side of the Connection Manager screen is a List of Locations These are locations of one or more meters to which you might want to connect Add a Location gt Click on the Add button The Connection Manager Locatio
24. 5 6 Reset Teme Ol Use Current Season and Current Munih Reset intemal inpet Accumulasions and Aggregations Reset Uan to Boot Mode Detast Communication To control a Relay by DNP check its box If unchecked the relay will not be controlled by DNP The Master in DNP protocol can control 16 relays In order to do that each relay box should be checked and the meter should be updated with this profile gt Check the box for the Reset Enable you want to control through DNP Example 1 The Master can control Relay 1 by sending this message Meter Address 1 Master Address 10 05 64 18 C4 01 00 OA 00 6C 1A CO CO 05 06 011701 00 03 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 3B EF 00 00 00 FF FF Example 2 The Master can control Relay 2 by sending this message 05 64 16 10 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BINARY OUTPUT OBJECT 10 NOTE 18 C4 01 00 OA 00 6C 1A CO C105 OC 011701 0103 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 E2 5F 00 00 00 FF FF The Master not only controls relays but also can do various resets Each box should be checked in order for the Master to do the reset Example 3 The Master can do a Log Reset by sending this message Example 4 05 04 18 C4 01 00 0A 00 6C 1A CO C2 05 OC 011701 10 03 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 C5 1B 00 00 00 FF FF The Master can do an Energy Reset by sending this message 05 04 18 C4 01 00 OA 00 6C 1A CO C3 05
25. 9650 or 9800 Meter Log 2 logging interval greater than 0 seconds less than and equal to 900 seconds and will have an integer number of records during a 15 minute period Example If Log 2 interval is set at x and 900 modulo with interval x is at 0 then setting is OK 5 EPM Meter Log 2 Log Block Window Avg Watt Modbus Register 0A35 0A36 6 EPM Meter Block Window Avg interval set at 15 minutes 7 GE s EBM Excel worksheet 13 4 2 Setup Requirements for EPM Series 7000 Meters 1 GE Communicator Software 2 GE Log Converter Software 3 GE_Multilin_EBM EBM DB template database file 4 Meter Historical Logging Interval greater than or equal to 60 seconds less than and equal to 900 seconds and with an integer number of records during a 15 minute period Example If Log Interval is set at x if 900 modulo with interval x is at 0 then the setting is OK 5 Meter Historical Log Log Avg Watt GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE Meter Avg Window Interval set at 900 seconds 15 minutes GE s EBM Excel worksheet Must set Time Sync for Historical Logging io oo N DY Firmware must support Time stamped Record 13 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE OPERATION OVERVIEW 13 5 Operation Overview 13 5 1 Creating a Demand Database gt Click View gt Options gt Energy Billing Module and the screen below appears
26. Assign a protocol DEV_PROTOCOL Assign user defined device name DEV_NAME should be unique in a system Assign Modbus device address DEV_ADDRESS If protocol is Modbus TCP assign the remote device s IP address and the TCP port number DEV_IP and DEV_TCP_PORT Set max Modbus packet length in number of registers DEV_MAX_PACKET_LEN GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS gt Set device s communication timeout in milliseconds DEV_COMM_TIMEOUT The timeout value should be longer for devices that speak Modbus TCP than for devices that speak Modbus RTU depending on network traffic gt Set device s data display format DEV_DATA_FORMAT from 0 to 0 000000 gt You can expand the polling item limitation of 64 items per device by setting a device as a child device of a parent device For example in lt DEVICE_X gt section if you set it to be the parent device DEV_PARENT must be X or 0 Then for lt DEVICE_Y gt section if you set the device to be a child device of X set DEV_PARENT to X Other parameters can be omitted Example lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt lt DEVICE 1 gt lt item DEV_TYPE EPM 1250 DEV_PROTOCOL ModbusRTU DEV_NAME EPM Demo 1 DEV_ADDRESS 1 DEV_IP DEV_TCP_PORT DEV_MAX PACKET LEN 127 DEV_COMM_ TIMEOUT 750 DEV_DATA_ FORMAT 0 00 DEV_PARENT 1 gt lt item gt lt DEVICE_1 gt lt GE Multili
27. Click the Back button To create an Advanced Waveform Graph gt Click the Graph button This screen appears Pasian Elibce meromte otik iff adba rameter Dol TY Comme Marna 1 aste rhotesboo Dommo Da ieo vere fist waveforems 012163 ESR imm GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 23 VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS 8 24 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS To edit the Advanced Waveform Graph gt Cick on Edit Graph The first of a series of screens appears These screens help the user customize Advanced Waveform Graphs Advanced Waveform Analysis Customization x femmes Sten Arnciatons r Numeric Precision Sub Title Os sees res a pen Viewing Style eae rte C Boh C Y CX None Monochrome I Grid in bront of data ic This screen s special features include 1 Main Title user can edit the Main Title of the graph 2 User Annotation user can add a line of text inside the graph in the form of a Sub Title This feature applies to graph with single Y axis non overlaid Viewing Style Color Monochrome or Monochrome and Symbols Font Size Large Medium or Small tn eS Numeric Precision digits behind the decimal from 0 3 6 Grid Lines All Both Y X None Grid in Front of Data To Apply changes gt Click Apply To return to the Original screen gt Click Original This will erase any changes To Export gt Click Export see details below To Maxi
28. Flicker System of Events Log Reset Log Disabled Example To retrieve Historical Log 1 and Limit Log 101b 5d 5 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Appendix D TFTP Server Program 11110001001101 010101110010 at Setup 1 D 1 TFTP Server Program Setup A free shareware TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol server program known as tftpd32 is provided to customers to be used to update firmware for the INP 100 Ethernet card The program files are located on the software installation CD y tftpd32 must be running to update the firmware NOTE Setup requirements 1 Windows Operating System 2 A working Ethernet card with a valid IP Address 3 Winzip software only if Windows OS does not open the zip file automatically Setup procedures 1 In your PC s hard disk create a folder with a name Example C Program Files TFTPD32 2 Locate the Zipped tftpd32 program files on the CD Then use the Winzip program to extract all compressed files into the folder you have created in Step 1 3 In your PC s hard drive create a folder with a name to be used as the root directory for TFTP Server Example C Program Files TFTPD32 TFTP_files 4 To start running the program double click on tftpd32 exe Configuring tftpd32 gt Start the
29. GE Communicator EXT will send the new scale settings to the module and then reset it gt Be sure to send the updated Device Profile to the EPM Meter after you have finished configuring all I Os gt Click on the Update Device button iy How to Set Scale Values Enter values for volts current and power in secondary All other values should be set in primary NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 13 CONFIGURING THE ANALOG INPUT MODULE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 9 Configuring the Analog Input Module The Analog Input Module can measure any type of reading once it is converted to an electrical signal within limits of the I O Module Below is an example of a reading and its conversion to a value CONVERSION TO VALUE READING SIGNAL VALUE 100 1 0 mA 100 50 0 5 mA 50 0 0 0 mA 0 50 0 5 mA 50 110 1 0 mA 100 Following are the steps to configure the Analog Input Module gt Be sure each module has a unique address and is connected to the meter s Port 3 or 4 at the same baud rate as the port 57600 recommended see section 11 6 gt Retrieve the External I O Modules section of the Device Profile from the meter section 11 7 gt After you have entered the type of Analog Input Module in the Type column and its address in the Assigned Address column click on the meter s Settings Edit button The following screen appears Device Profile A
30. GLOSSARY Flicker is the sensation that is experienced by the human visual system when it is subjected to changes occurring in the illumination intensity of light sources IEC 61000 4 15 and former IEC 868 describe the methods used to determine flicker severity Wiring and Hookup configuration for the EPM 9800 Measuring values of the fundamental current and voltage and percent of the fundamental Energy indicator on the face of the EPM9450 9650 pulses are generated per the programmed Ke value Data will not accumulate until current reaches programmed level Energy indicator located on the upper left side of the face of the EPM 9800 meter pulses are generated per the programmed Ke value Any of the natural numbers the negatives of those numbers or zero An optional modem within the meter s enclosure that connects to the RJ 11 telephone connector In the meter s Modbus Map there are gaps between Registers For example the next Register after 08320 is 34817 Any unmapped Register stores no information and is said to be invalid An updated version of the CBEMA Curve that reflects further study into the performance of microprocessor devices The curve consists of a series of steps but still defines combinations of voltage magnitude and duration that will cause malfunction or damage kWh per pulse i e the energy kilowatt hours KW x demand interval in hours Output where the rate of changes between 1 and 0 ref
31. Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 5 bd ane a Chapter 9 Time of Use 010101110010 011 1 9 1 General Procedure See the meter s Installation and Operation Manuals for a detailed discussion of the GE Communicator EXT Time of Use TOU function The following is a general outline for programming TOU Each step is described in detail in subsequent sections gt From the Tool Bar select Time of Use gt Calendar Settings gt Create a TOU calendar profile using the following elements e Usage registers eg Peak Off Peak Shoulder Peak for each fifteen minute block of the day e Demand Integration Averaging for Block Fixed or Rolling Sliding Window e Programmable start dates for four seasons per year e Programmable bill dates for each month of the year e TOU schedules eg Weekday Weekend Holiday for each day of the year gt Send the TOU calendar profile to the connected meter TOU accumulations will begin gt View print or export the TOU accumulations gt Reset the TOU accumulations at any time by selecting Reset Meter Information from the Tools Menu see Chapter 3 for EPM 9450 9650 Chapter 4 for EPM 9800 for details Resetting clears all accumulations of the current month or season causes the accumulations to use the present date as the start date and accumulates to the next new end date which is taken fr
32. OC 011701 13 03 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 E7 5B 00 00 00 FF FF All above examples are done with Function 5 Direct Operate Relay using Qualifier 0x17 Relay Status and Reset Status can be polled using Object 10 For Controlling Relays and performing Resets Object 12 is used The Point Numbers for Relays and Resets are as follows GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 11 BINARY OUTPUT OBJECT 10 16 12 CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT Points Assignment 0 Relay 1 1 Relay 2 2 Relay 3 3 Relay 4 4 Relay 5 5 Relay 6 6 Relay 7 7 Relay 8 8 Relay 9 9 Relay 10 10 Relay 11 11 Relay 12 12 Relay 13 13 Relay 14 14 Relay 15 15 Relay 16 16 Log Reset 17 Maximum Reset 18 Minimum Reset 19 Energy Reset 20 Reset Time of Use Current Season and Current Month 21 Manual Waveform Capture 22 Reset Internal Input Accumulations and Aggregations 23 Reset Unit to Boot Mode Default Communication Settings The Clear All button clears all assigned items on all the tabs The Clear button clears only the items on the current tab view GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT GLOBAL VALUES 16 6 Global Values Each Object can be polled by Variation 0 In this window you can assign a default variation to be
33. Rolling Sub Intervals etc The Demand Integration Programming screens appear Thermal Averac ging Time Interval Window o Hours Minutes Qa seconds Make changes to the screens according to the requirements of your application e Block Averaging Time Interval Window Sets the length of the Block Interval used for Demand Calculation and other Interval based functions 3 28 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS agine o Hours hs Minutes o Seconds Block Window Sync High Speed Input Sync Disabled Block Window Sync Synchronizes the meter with pulses from a High Speed Input connected to another meter Click the Use Sync Pulse box and select the Input number Block Window Demand Only Rolling Subinterval Window Sets the length of the Demand Subinterval when Rolling Demand is used Subinterval Length X Number of Subintervals Length of Demand Interval Window Rolling Averaging Sub Interval Window o Hours Minutes Qa seconds Rolling Sub intervals Rolling Average 2 J tes Boo Interval Window 15 00 Matoete r Predictive Roll dow Average Rolling Subintervals Set the number of Rolling Demand Subintervals in the Rolling Demand Window Subinterval Length X Number of Subintervals Length of Demand Interval Window Predictive Rolling Window Average Increasing the len
34. Sequence Number When the Flash upgrade is complete the Cancel button changes to OK gt Click OK To upgrade additional GE Meters click Previous and return to the Communications a L Parameters screen Repeat the steps as needed entering a unique address for each unit NOTE 12 6 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE GE COMM AND GE DSP FIRMWARE 12 3 Flash Upgrading the GE Comm and GE DSP Firmware gt Contact GE to receive the most recent GE firmware upgrade Be sure your version of GE Communicator EXT software is compatible with the firmware upgrade you want to perform You can download the latest software version through the internet site at www GEmultilin com Click on the Free Downloads button gt Copy the new firmware upgrade files to a directory on your computer The GE Comm upgrade is divided into two files The DSP upgrade is a single file The GE Unit upgrade will upgrade all three files GE Comm files and GE DSP file at the same time Generally when you perform an update update all firmware at the same time gt Be sure to read text file accompanying the firmware files for important information such as the checksum code Write down the Checksum Code If you are flashing GE Comm Only or GE DSP Only you will need it later in the Flash upgrade process Flash upgrading will fail if an incorrect checksum code is entered The checksum code consi
35. XML editor or text editor MS Notepad etc Root tag 1 lt EIG_POLL_DATA gt and lt EIG_POLL_DATA gt System element 1 lt EIG_SYSTEM gt and lt EIG_SYSTEM gt System attributes 1 DATA_POLL_DELAY 2 SYSTEM_COMM_TIMEOUT 3 ALARM_POLL_DELAY 4 ALARM_CONTACT_PHONE 5 ALARM_CONTACT_PERSON Email attributes 1 EMAIL_x x 1 to 8 2 FORMAT y y 1 to 8 Device elements 1 lt DEVICE_x gt and lt DEVICE_x gt x 1 to 8 Device s general attributes 1 DEV_TYPE 2 DEV_PROTOCOL 3 DEV_ADDRESS Device s data element 1 lt DEV_DATA gt and lt DEV_DATA gt Device s data attributes 1 D_LADDR 2 D_LLENGTH 3 D_TYPE Save file and send it to FTP server modify web page files if necessary GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 49 WEBEXPLORER FLOW CHART CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 11 Web Explorer Flow Chart INP 100 CONFIGURATION 10 100 BaseT Ethernet Card ACCESSING DATA i WebExplorer Setup your FTP server create an All polled data are stored in XML File poll_data xml FTP client programs user account with read only access Web browsers IE etc User software MS Excel etc Configure the poll_profile xml file see configure WebXML for details and transfer it to FTP server Design web pages and pictures and transfer them to FTP server Edit Device Profile Communication Ports 1 IP address if not in DHCP mode 2 subnet mask 3 default gateway
36. fi For meter designations you can use any character allowed by Windows Operating System 4 for a File Name since that meter designation will be used as the File Name In English versions the following characters will not work lt gt For meters used internationally by multilingual users it is recommended that you use ONLY alphanumeric characters allowed by your Operating System NOTE 4 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS 4 3 6 Communications gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button next to General Settings then click on Communications Ports The following submenu appears T Commnmicetions GB serieiPont 1 57600N1 Modbus RTU GB seriaiPon2 1 115200 N1 Modbus RTU GB serieiPot3 1 9600N1 Modbus RTU ENE BD serieiPot4 1 57600 N1 Modbus RTU gt Double click on the port you would like to change The Communications Settings screen appears Device Profile Communications Settings Port cc r Port 4 Ext Devices t Network Settings If Network O mm ad ess This screen displays the Device Profile s settings for the meter s two programmable Communications Ports Address Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Transmit Delay Communication Protocol Network Option and Internal Modem Option GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 15 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING
37. gt Click Enable Energy Billing Module If the Enable Box is not checked no data will be processed by EBM If the option is set Log Converter will store the Avg Watt values from the log into the new Demand Database The new database will carry the same file name as the regular meter database except the file extension is EBM DB If the file does not exist Log Converter will make a duplicate copy of the template database and rename it Device_Name EBM DB There should be no more than 96 records per day in the database GE s EBM Excel worksheet can be used to load and view the Demand Database System Requirements MS Excel 97 2000 with SP3 or 2002 installed iy The EBM Excel Spreadsheet File Location is C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext Add Ins GE_Multilin_EBM xls shown below View gt Options click sce on Energy Billing Module gt Click Select for a different location Pulte Dala Scan Mode Tech Mode Settings Los Retires Device must be programmed properly for this option to work corectly See user manual for details Enable Energy Billing Module Filename F Pogam Fini GE Appkcetons Communes Ext addin GE EBM Select 13 5 2 Using the Excel Spreadsheet 1 On startup the user must select a valid EBM database file or click the Load Database button to select a file 2 Under File gt Properties gt Summary the EBM Excel Spreadsheet information will be displayed including version numbe
38. gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on General Settings gt Double click on the CT PT Ratios and System Hookup line The following submenu appears 4 6 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS 5 General Settings 1AB C 1 00 1 00 INm 1 00 1 00 VAB C 1 00 1 00 VAUX 1 00 1 00 Hookup Wye Operational Frequency Range 20 65 Hz This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings for CT PT ratios and the meter form used for hookup The values shown are for example only gt Double click on any of the settings The CT and PT Ratios screen appears Device Profile CT and PT Ratios CT Ratio ooo PT Ratio Line to Neutral Primary ndary P y Secondary AA 3200 00 Cu r Voltage V je Hookup Voltage 300 Volt Option Only 2 5 Element WYE M4 300 Volt Secondary Operational Frequency Range 20Hz to 65Hz bd Cs Es es Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application e When you change a PT or CT ratio GE Communicator EXT updates the corresponding Full Scale value entered in the Limits and Waveforms Full Scale setting e Using the pull down menu choose the hook up service that matches the connection you have to the EPM 9800 Selections may include 9S 4 Wire Wye or Delta 36S 4 Wire Wye 39S 4 Wire Wye and 45S 3 Wire Delta or 4 Wi
39. 0 1 Second measurements for all data gt Click Print to send a copy of the screen to a printer gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 7 2 2 Poll Max and Min Readings To view the Maximum and Minimum readings for the currently connected device gt Select Poll Max and Min Readings from the Real Time Polling menu The Max and Min Readings with Time Stamps screen appears y The Max Min is the Max Min of the Thermal Average in the profile NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL roe REAL TIME READINGS NOTE 7 4 CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING Positive Minsmum Negative Minimum Time 2 clue Time Q1 Pwr Factor B Q1 Pwr Factor C 01 Pet Factor Total start Eiro mrosot ouioh acotat Detter diorma 1 commutator bt Mita mecasroo Bitcomet s gt Scroll left right and up down to access all data To adjust the column widths position the cursor on a line between columns at the top of the screen When the cursor changes to a left right arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the column border left or right Release the button when the column is at the desired width gt Click Pause to temporarily stop the screen update and enable the Copy button gt Click Resume to continue the real time update V Click Print to send the data to a printer gt To Copy the data into another program click Pause to enable the Copy button then click Copy gt Paste int
40. 010101110010 011 Configuration Using GE Communicator An advanced EPM meter EPM 9650 and 9800 can measure more than 3000 DNP Static Points But not all points can be polled at a time In order for the meter to have the appropriate data the user should customize the DNP Point Map This can be done easily using GE Communicator EXT software Up to 250 points of Event Data can be created in the meter Refer to DNP V3 00 Level 2 Protocol Assignments for EPM 9650 and 9800 Rev 1 8 for more details 16 1 Connecting to GE Communicator EXT gt Open GE Communicator EXT software by double clicking on the icon gt Connect to the meter gt Click on Quick Connect checking the settings and clicking Connect OR gt Click on Connection Manager select a location and click Connect See Chapter 2 of this manual for complete connection instructions When a connection is made a Status Bar will appear showing a Healthy status gt Click OK gt Click the Edit Profile icon A pop up window will tell you that data is being retrieved The Device Profile screen appears If the meter EPM 9650 and 9800 supports DNP V3 00 Level 2 DNP Level 2 will appear in the profile gt Click on General Settings to open the menu gt Click on DNP Custom Classes Map to open the menu GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL le 1 CONNECTING TO GE COMMUNICATOR EXT CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT
41. 10 0 0 1 using Modbus TCP Start on device status screen Commext c cm 1 ad 2 pr 3 ip 10 0 0 1 np 502 Example 2 Meter with address 2 at remote location with Phone Number 555 545 5110 using Modbus ASCII Start on device status screen Commext c cm 0 ad 2 pr 1 cp 3 BR 3 um 1 pn 555 545 5110 cm Connect Mode 0 Serial Port 1 Network If left out of command line Serial Port assumed ad Address 1 247 If left out of command line Address 1 assumed nm Network Mode 0 One IP Address for n Devices If left out of command line 0 assumed pr Protocol 0 Modbus RTU 1 Modbus ASCII 2 DNP 3 0 Not Supported 3 Modbus TCP 4 El Protocol If left out of command line Modbus RTU assumed ip IP Address or Host Name XXX XXX XXX XXX OF 1 16 Alphanumeric characters with no spaces If left out error assumed C 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS V 1 11 np Network Port 502 Open Modbus Modbus TCP If left out Port 502 assumed cp Com Port 1 98 If left out Com Port 1 assumed br Baud Rate O 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 38400 6 57600 7 115200 If left out Baud Rate is 9600 um Use Modem 0 No 1 Yes If left out No modem selected pn Phone Number Use No spaces To be defined ms Modem Setup String To be defined dc Data Switch Connect String To be defined dd Data Switch Disconnect String To be defined
42. 2006 09 36 39 63 06 29 2006 08 49 05 08 07 24 2006 10 52 55 97 07 19 5757 31 19 59 43 07 24 2006 09 36 39 63 06 29 2006 08 49 05 08 07 24 2006 09 36 39 63 06 29 2006 08 49 05 08 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS RETRIEVING LOGS 8 3 Retrieving Logs To retrieve logs from the meter and convert them for viewing and analysis gt Click on the Retrieve Logs button or select Logs gt Retrieve Log s from Device The following screen appears Select Log s to be Retrieved Meter Designation Thao Log Type Status Retrieve Historical Log1 _ Available Yes Historical Log2 _ Available No Limits Available Digital Inputs Available Digital Outputs _ Available Flicker Available Waveform PQ Available gt Double click on the logs you would like to retrieve from the meter The No in the Retrieve column will become a Yes gt Double click again to change the Yes back to a No GE Communicator EXT will only retrieve those logs with a Yes in the Retrieve column Note on the Meter Designation field pi y e Ifyou have entered a label for the meter in the Labels section of the Device Profile Chapters 3 4 5 the label will appear here GE Communicator EXT will apply this name to the file containing the logs you choose to retrieve placing the file in the Retrieved Logs folder e Ifthe EPM Meter does not have a meter designation or label this field will appe
43. Accumulations This section of the Device Profile displays a series of eight running totals Each total can be added to or subtracted from other totals This allows you to set the High Speed Inputs located directly on the meter to pulse accumulate y If you use these inputs for pulse accumulations do not set them to record waveforms If you do you will record endless waveforms NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 37 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS Vv NOTE CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the Revenue and Energy Settings button and double click on the Pulse Accumulations line The following screen will appear Device Profile Internal input Poolse Accurmulators Setup Source UnitsfCount Aggregator User Assigned Label Mode Form Transitan Form C 4 3 F i 3 5 signed WAV FO ssigned WAV PO Assigned WAV PO signed WAV FO ssigned WAV PO Assigned WAV PO ssigned WAV PO Transiton Form O Transibon Form C Sy ie JE HE ais HE 21 Trensition Form Transition Fomm Source Hour Reading Aggregator eee Quadrant 4 Wort Hour Aggregator User Assigned Label l Curmufetor 2 Purpose of Pulse Accumulations Pulse Accumulators are used to accumulate Pulse information from External Devices such as gas water or electricity meters energy management systems SCADA dev
44. Accurnedations in the Interval I Squmed Phare A 1 Savered Phare 8 Squared I Phare L V Squared T Phase A V Squared T Phase B V Squared T Phase C Internal Input 1 Internal Input 2 Internal Input 3 Internal Input 4 Internal Input 5 Internal Input 6 Internal input 7 Internal input R Aggegson I Agmegaion 2 Aggregetion J Aggegetron 4 7 18 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS Uncompensated Energy Readings that are NOT adjusted by Transformer Loss Compensation Energy Pulses and Accurnedatiogs in the Interval Q Hours Q is the quantity obtained by lagging the applied voltage to a wattmeter by 60 degrees Energy Pulses and Accurmedations in the Interval GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 19 REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING gt To change any of the settings that effect the readings click OK You will return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click Edit Profile gt Double click on the appropriate screen to access settings and make adjustments gt Click Update Profile to send the new settings to the meter 7 3 5 Internal KYZ Output Accumulations To view the Internal KYZ Output Accumulations of the currently connected device gt Select Internal KYZ Output Accumulations from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The following scre
45. Aux IA B C Nm Nc Volts AB BC CA VAA B C Total P VAR A B C Total N VAR A B C Total PWatt A B C Total N Watt A B C Total Update Time Hour Readings Quad 1 4 Watthour Quad 1 VAhour Quad 1 VARhour Quad 4 VAhour Quad 4 VARhour Quad 2 3 Watthour Quad 2 VAhour Quad 2 VARhour Quad 3 VAhour Quad 3 VARhour Device Time and Accumulations Date and Time Internal Temperature GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REAL TIME READINGS e Accumulations SquaredTA TB TC V Squared TA TB TC gt Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen to access all the values gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 7 2 5 Poll External Analog Inputs To view the polling screens for the External Analog Inputs gt Select Poll External Analog Inputs from the Real Time Polling menu The following screen appears External Analog Inputs mi Polling 00121689 Information on the screen includes e Input number e Name assigned to the input e Raw Value Actual Value the input is measuring e Primary Value Scaled Value from the Device Profile See Chapter 11 for setup instructions The Copy button at the right of the screen will allow you to copy the information from up to 32 Inputs and paste that data into a document gt Click OK to return to the main screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL e REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READING
46. Card or Purchase Order Number Contact your GE representative with the above information GE will issue you the Upgrade Code 5 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE 5 3 2 Configure Communications The Communication Settings on this screen are the settings for the EPM 6000 s two ports the IrDA Port COM 1 and RS485 Port COM 2 EPM 6000 Profile Communication Settings COM IDA Response Delay msec COM RS485 Address Protocol Baud Hale Response Delay msec The settings that appear are the Inital Settings for communication Any changes may effect communications between the EPM 6000 and your PC Response Delay 0 to 750 50msec increments Address 1 to 247 Protocol Modbus RTU or ASCII Baud Rate 9600 to 57600 Response Delay 0 to 750 50msec increments GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 3 3 Configure Energy and Display This screen displays the Power and Energy Format Demand Averaging Auto Scrolling and Display Configuration EPM 6000 Profile Power and Energy Format Power Scale Energy Digits Energy Decimal Places Energy Scale Example Power Direction Demand Averaging Averging Method Interval Mmutes Sub Interval Auto Scroll Display Display Configuration Power and Energy Format Po
47. Communicator EXT screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS 7 3 7 Time of Use Registers CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING To view Time of Use Readings from the device connected to your computer gt Select Time of Use from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The following screen appears Start Time Register Accumulations This is a read only screen Readings are based on Time of Use settings from the Device Profile of the connected device 7 3 8 Poll Pulse Accumulations gt VV VV VV VV Use windows at the top of the screen to view a choice of Groups and Registers Type in start and end times To make changes on this screen click OK and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen In the Device Profile make changes to time of use settings To Copy the data into another program click Copy Paste into your new document Click Export to send the data to another device Click Print to send a copy of the screen to a printer Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen To view the Pulse Accumulations readings for the currently connected device GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS gt Select Poll Pulse Accumulations from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The Pulse Accumulations screen appears _ P
48. Compensation or double click on the Transformer Loss Compensation line The following submenu appears Enabled Disabled LWFE 0 000 LVFE 0 000 LWCU 0 000 LVCU 0 000 Apply Both Watts amp Watts Add to Watts and Subtract trom VAR This screen displays the current values for the meter s Transformer Loss Compensation LWFE Percent Loss of Watts due to Iron LVFE Percent Loss of Vars due to Iron e LWCU Percent Loss of Watts due to Copper LVCU Percent Loss of Vars due to Copper Consult Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide for an overview of Transformer Loss Compensation GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 51 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS A WARNING kA NOTE CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt Ifyou have a Standard Unit double click on any loss value LWFE etc This screen appears Device Profile Transformer and Line Loss Compensation rPercent Loss of Watts Percent Loss of VARS Due to Iron Add to Watts and Subtract from VAR Click on TLC Calculator to find the values to enter into the Percent Loss windows The Calculator button will launch an Excel Spreadsheet which will do the calculations for you once the required data is entered A copy of the Excel Spreadsheet is in Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide GE Communicator EXT will automatically launch the Excel Spreadsheet as part of its software pack
49. Connection Manager icon or select Connection gt Connection Manager The following screen appears To copy the Connection Manager Settings to other PCs see Note on page 2 1 Connection Manager List of Locations Connected to Location 2 2 16 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 5 2 Adding a Location GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION gt Click on the Add button The Location Editor screen appears displaying the computer s communications settings and the location name New Location gt Enter your Location Name in the Location Name field at the top of the screen replacing New Location Connection Manager Location Editor Location Name 9 Serial Port Network gi Use Data Switch String s Com Port Connect Rate 9600 Devices At Location nase gt Click on the Network button The screen will change to the following INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER Connection Manager Location Editor Metor t lela E me Substation 1 Serial Port g Network Host 10 0 0 1 Network Port fof Devices At Location Bemove Em Device 1 gt Inthe Host field enter the meter s IP Address gt Inthe Network Port field enter 502 assigned port for Modbus TCP 2 5 3 Handling Multiple Locations gt Click once on the location to which you would like to connect your
50. Control loads and shift the timing of demands e Calculate savings and results The Energy Billing Module detailed in this chapter gives you a tool to use with the EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 meters to collect data and analyze it With a few clicks you can collect historical and real time power usage data so that you can make changes necessary to reduce costs GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL T t OVERVIEW CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE Energy Billing Module GE Multilin nergy data available from 5 14 2002 to 6 12 2002 Load Database Demand Graph bes nantes RIERA ananos siate MUNIGERON mainea momon mrilaeee Ae FA CE E a eo CE amp amp F PRA EEES a LLEEELELELLEE Date Orte Tine Peak Demand 2 86 kw 6n02002 1430 oss w LoadFector 21 oooO CTT tions LogViewerlWeb11 EBM DB FIGURE 13 1 Example Screen for the Energy Billing Module The Energy Billing Module Graph Screen as shown in the example screen above displays a Demand Graph a Graph Profile by Day and a Graph of kWh Usage by Day for the Date Range selected 13 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE 13 2 Basic Energy Management BASIC ENERGY MANAGEMENT To understand how to manage your power usage you must understand billing determinants and the terminology of energy management Below are Basic Energy Terms followed by an Energy Management Example 13 2 1 Basic Energy Terms Kil
51. Data Valve Set Pow gt Click the Show Snapshots box on the left side of the screen to display the limits snapshot information gt To copy the data to the computer s clipboard right click with the cursor positioned anywhere in the table gt To sort the data by record type in either ascending or descending order click on the Sort button and use the pull down menus to make your selection 8 18 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 9 Viewing the Waveform Log VIEWING THE WAVEFORM LOG gt From Log Viewer s main screen section 8 4 click on the Waveform button or View Data gt Waveform Log Viewer will display waveform information for the selected log file s based on the time range specified in the Select Time Range section of its main screen EPM Series 7000 Waveform Time Precision is 1 second Durston ms Toyz OoteyT me nen viam Teper _ 133 I0 10 04 JAAM m2160 Sog Ven Sag 133 7 28 2008 966512639 AM 133 7 24 2008 IIE HSH AM 193 7 14 2005 2 10 40 977 PM 139 P1000 151 55 962 PM 133 7 ayenes 123324644 PM 133 7 14 2008 10 5836617 AM 133 24 2005 34216 87 AM 00121689 Van Gag Vem ag 00121689 Van Sag VerSag 0121689 Ven Seg Ven Seg 0012168 Van Soq Ven Saq 001216893 VensSag Verm Sag 00121689 Ven Sey VerSeqg 00121683 Verse verseg GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL To save the data to your clipboard right click anywhere in the table To
52. EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 17 NOTES CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE On the VB Editor Screen gt Click Tools gt References gt VBA Project The following screen appears References BAProject E xj Available References Mi Visual Basic For Applications V Microsoft Excel 9 0 Object Library VIOLE Automation mM Microsoft Office 9 0 Object Library v v _ IAS Helper COM Component 1 0 Type Library C IAS RADIUS Protocol 1 0 Type Library Priority BER x Microsoft Forms 2 0 meg Tie a t g VideoSoft VSFlex 6 0 Controls DAO t VideoSoft VSFlex 6 0 Controls OLEDB robat Access 3 0 Type Library obat Distiller gt gt Select the Microsoft DAO 3 6 Object Library as highlighted If 3 6 is not available select the next highest below 3 6 Make sure only one DAO Library is selected Click File gt Save before closing the Macros Save the Excel spreadsheet before closing If the user tries to open the EBM file saved in Excel 2002 using Excel 97 a conflict could Ww occur DO NOT ATTEMPT THIS NOTE 13 18 The File Format is not Backwards Compatible GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Chapter 14 Script amp Scheduler 11110001001101 ween Prog ram 1 Automated Data Retrieving and Processing 14 1 Ov
53. Enter the Full Scale for each parameter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS e The Limit and Waveform settings section 4 5 1 and 4 5 3 respectively will be based on a percentage of the Full Scales entered here e GE Communicator EXT automatically recalculates the Full Scales Voltages Currents and Power every time the CT and PT Ratios change Frequency is not changed even if the Range e Selection is changed Frequency must be changed on the Limits screen i Power Phase is the amount of power per each phase e Power Total is the power of all phases combined gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter gt To Reset Logs see section 4 26 4 3 4 Time Settings To edit a Device Profile s time settings gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Time Settings line The following submenu appears EX5 Time Settings Time Zone ZD 5 0 DST Enabled True Using Auto DST DST Start Auto DST End Auto Line Synchronization Disabled This screen displays the current Device Profile s time settings DST Daylight Savings Time GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 11 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 980
54. GE Communicator EXT has located the GE meter s at the selected location the Device Status screen appears confirming the connection see section 2 8 for details The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters 2 4 5 Setting Up the Originate Computer Modem gt gt In the Com Port field enter the computer s communication port that is connected to the modem the originate modem In the Baud Rate field enter 57600 recommended baud rate for internal modem connections For modems prior to V 90 use a lower baud rate Example 38400 for a 33 6k modem 4 19200 for a 14 4k modem NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL V In the Flow Control field select the originate modem s configuration hardware flow control Leave the Data Bits field at 8 for Modbus ASCII Other protocols may require a different setting Leave the Parity field at None for Modbus ASCII Other protocols may require a different setting Click the Use Modem box Enter the Phone Number of the Internal Modem of the meter Enter a Setup String in the Setup String field if required For U S Robotics modems the data switch Setup string is amp F1 RS 485 INTERNAL MODEM OPTION CONNECTION CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER gt Check with the manual for the device you are using in order to create the Data Switch String appropriate for the device 2 4 6 Adding New Devices Mete
55. If you use Port 3 as a Master Port you can use one of the other ports for the display change the baud rate to 9600 and set address to 1 e For all External I O Devices set the Communication Protocol to Modbus RTU GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 17 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt Double click on any of the settings Serial Port 1 The Communications Settings screen appears Port 1 _ _ _ r Port 4 Ext Devices BaudRete 9600 Baud Rate s7600 z Data Bits Data Bits Addres Baud Rate Baud Rate Data Bits Data Bits Stop Bits Stop Bits Stop Bits Stop Bits o SS rotocol Protocol Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU Modbus RTU v If the Modem or N si s I Mode mi Mode Tx Delay Tx Delay Tx Delay Network Settings If Network Opona was purchased IP Address p Advanced Settings Subnet Mask fess 255 255 o Baud Rote S Default Gateway jo jo jo jo Delay fio x15 ms Internal Modem Settings If Internal Modem Option was purchased Answer Phone on 3 Rings Modem Gateway Baud Rate js7e00 Dial Out Profile Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application by clicking on the box or pull down menu of any of the following settings gt Address Assign an address to each port to communicate with other devices Multiple meters on an RS 485 bus must each have a unique address set for the po
56. Long Term Flicker data click on the tabs at the top of the screen The Short Term or Long Term screen will appear th 50160 ficker j Time BBE Ee Short Term Long Tern or Slop Current Nma PST Next PLT status Frequency Vase Current Base Voltage Flicker Monitorning gt Use the Flicker Monitoring buttons to Start or Stop Flicker Monitoring or to Reset the meter s Flicker Monitoring gt Click Print to send the data to a printer gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL T 2r POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 4 4 Alarm Status To view Alarm Status data for the currently connected device gt Select Alarm Status from the Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms menu The Limit Status screen appears Limit Status k Status Limti _ limt2 _ 1D Limit 1 Limit 2 Setting Setpoint Setting Setpoint 1_0 1 Second Voks AN Wi ETE Above 1584k Below 2 0 1 Second Voks BN EE 1584k Below 310 1 Second Voks CN 15 84k Below 4 0 1 Second IA 10 00 Below 5 01 Second IB 10 00 Below 10 00 Below 2 23 24 5 26 27 2B 23 a 32 This screen displays the Status of the Limits set in the Programming Limits section of the Device Profile sections 3 10 and 4 10 Up to 32 Limits can be set main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click Edit Profile
57. Magnification 3 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES Print Pages Adjust the Range of Pages to be printed at 100 Buttons Copies How many copies do you want to print Print Pages Select indiviual pages to print Separate numbers by commas Print This screen sends you to Print Setup screen where you select printer properties paper and orientation Click OK to Print Save Save these selections for future use Done Exit the screen and return to the Device Profile screen y If you change the Com settings for the meter you will not be able to communicate with the meter You will have to sign off and sign on again with the new settings NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 25 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 3 3 6 General Settings gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button or double click on the General Settings line All of the settings in the General Settings group are listed Device Profile 5 General Settings EX CT PT Ratios and System Hookup XF Limit and Waveform Full Scales EXS Time Settings EX5 Labels EXF Communications oe EX5 DNP Custom Classes Map Custom Modbus Map Click on the particular programmable setting you would like to program The settings will be detailed in the order on
58. Month Date Day and or Time if appropriate For example Scheduler Available Scripts for Scheduler 5002 New script 2 Schedule Frequency Time Use the pull down menus to make selections Type in desired time Click OK to add to the Scheduler Or click Cancel If you click OK the new scripts will immediately be added to the Scheduler and you will return to the main Scheduler screen Repeat steps to add additional scripts to the Scheduler GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM EDIT SCHEDULER SCRIPTS 14 14 Edit Scheduler Scripts wre Scrip Tchedulor it tyne Wesi Day of week Friday Time 20625PM IMODI 20629 PM Dody Time 1558 Pu AOO PIGSOPM MYI IISSIPM Monthly try data Dote 1 Time 35053 ONON 35053 m Daily Tine 42259 Pas 4 2001 42259PM 9 4 2001 423 09 PM Weekly Day ot week Sunday Time 36153 PM 9 9 2001 26153 PM Dady Time 40025 PM W200 40025PM 84 2001 401 14 PM Dei Time 41526 PM 35200 41526PM 342001 41529 PM Day Time 40046 PM YS200l A PM 20I A01 SI PM OLOO aco 22 PA YLI 40027 PM werent status ANII 43050 PM Scheduler si unag AWIW 431 2 PM Scheduler stopped ATUTI 431 27 PM Scheduler a rurmeng SCHEDULER To edit a script currently running on the Scheduler gt Stop the Scheduler gt Select a script from the Active Scripts window gt Click Edit Script One of the Add Edit Script to Scheduler screens will appear the one th
59. NOT click anywhere on the spreadsheet while the system is in Calculation Mode NOTE 13 16 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE NOTES 13 11 Notes 13 11 1 Excel 2002 The Excel Spreadsheet used in the EBM is designed for use with Excel 97 When using this module with Excel 2002 the first time a file is opened it takes several minutes for the file to be converted into the updated format Save the file immediately after the load is completed After the initial conversion the file will open more quickly When using Excel 2000 with SP3 or 2002 check that a level of security is in place gt Select Tools gt Macro gt Click on Security The following screen appears Security Level Trusted Sources C High Only signed macros from trusted sources will be allowed to run Unsigned macros are automatically Medium You can or not to run entially unsafe macros C Low not recommended You are not protected from potentially unsafe macros Use this setting only if you have virus scanning software installed or you are sure all documents you open are safe gt Click Medium gt Click OK 13 11 2 Trouble Shooting If you are experiencing a problem executing this module you may be missing the DAO component To add the DAO component to your system do the following gt Click Tools gt Macro gt Visual Basic Editor The Visual Basic Editor screen appears GE COMMUNICATOR
60. Operation Manuals gt Before connecting any I Os to the EPM Meter make sure each one has its own unique address All I Os are shipped with a pre set address and a baud rate of 57600 See section 11 5 for a list of factory set addresses and baud rates To assign or change I O addresses see section 11 6 gt Write down the name and unique address of each 1 0 you will be using You will need to know the addresses for the EPM Meter s Device Profile gt Connect the I O or group of I Os to the EPM9450 9650 Meter s Port 3 or 4 or EPM 9800 Meter s Port 4 e You must use the correct port Be sure ports are set to operate at the same baud rate as the I O modules e The ports must also be configured as Masters See Chapters 3 EPM 9450 9650 and 4 EPM 9800 for how to configure the communication ports gt Retrieve the EPM Meter s Device Profile e inthe External Devices section enter the name of each I O and its unique address e Use the Edit buttons to configure the I Os e ach I O connected to the unit must be included in the Device Profile e Update the Device Profile to record the changes See section 11 7 J Updating the Device Profile will reset all logs v NOTE This chapter also covers the following O utilities 10 2 Meter I O Device Status section 11 13 lists all registered I Os currently in use Query I O Module section 11 14 locates an I O s address and baud rate Locator Utility sect
61. Phase or 1 Phase values If 3 Phase values are entered calculate 1 Phase values by dividing 3 Phase values by three Convert 1 Phase Self Cooled MVA to 1 Phase kVA by multiplying by 1000 Exciting Current Impedance Value Phase to_Phase Phase to Neutral Test Voltage volts Full Load Curre nt amps Test Voltage is generally Phase to Phase for three phase transformers Calculate Phase to Neutral Voltage by dividing Phase to Phase Voltage by v3 Calculate Full Load Current by dividing the 1 Phase kW Self Cooled Rating by the Phase to Neutral Voltage and multiplying by 1000 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION Meter Installation Data Instrument Transformers Numerator Denominator Multiplier Potential Transformer Current Transformer Power Multiplier PT Multiplier X CT Multiplier gt Enter the Numerator and Denominator for each instrument transformer For example a PT with a ratio of 7200 120 has a numerator or 7200 a denominator or 120 and a multiplier of 60 7200 120 60 1 Meter Secondary Voltage volts Meter Secondary Current amps Base Conversion Factors Quantity Transformer Multiplier Trf IT Sec Meter Base Meter Trf Voltage Current
62. Registers M Reset Time of Use Active Registers gt Click on the box beside the value s you would like to reset gt Click OK fi If you click Reset Logs a warning will appear asking you if you want to Save Connected v Device Settings Click on the settings you would like to save then proceed with the S Update If you do not save the settings they will be overwritten For each box you select a window will appear which states that the Reset is Completed Click OK The reset is completed You can password protect this feature by enabling the Password feature of the Meter See Chapter 12 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide for details GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL MANUAL WAVEFORM CAPTURE CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 9 Manual Waveform Capture gt From the Menu bar click on Tools gt Manual Waveform Capture The Manual Waveform Capture screen appears Waveform Log Statistics Log Records Memory Used Newest Record Time Oldest Record Time Record Size Max Records Memory Wavetorm Trigg nN 05 31 2006 17 39 05 12 04 12 2006 16 52 1651 256 11 12 05 31 2006 17 39 05 12 04 12 2006 16 52 16 51 16384 This screen displays the Waveform Log Statistics of the logs that have possible Waveform Triggers gt Click the Trigger Now button at the bottom of the screen to create a waveform GE Communicator EXT creates a waveform in the Meter s memory The Records on the
63. Repeat for each desired Binary Input Point gt Update the device The meter will scan those points every second Object 2 Any DNP Static Point can be configured to create a DNP Event Points Class Assignments on the Object 2 screen are used to configure Binary Input Change Event Points In order to create Event Data Object 2 Points must be assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Each point can have a different Class Assignment The Clear All button clears all assigned items on all the tabs The Clear button clears only the items on the current tab view GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 3 ANALOG INPUT OBJECT 30 CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 16 3 Analog Input Object 30 A meter can use up to 64 Analog Input points Values available for Analog Input use can be found in the EPM DNP Object Mapping Only Class 0 is used when polling Analog Input Object 30 Data Class 1 2 or 3 is used when polling Analog Change Event Object 32 Data E DNP Points p 1 2 t 3 4 5 t 6 4 J Line Point Description Double click on the box under Description A pull down window will appear gt Choose a Type of reading and a Channel gt Click OK The corresponding numbers for the selected reading and channel will appear in the Line and Point columns Line and Point Numbers can also be found in the DNP Object Mapping Chapter 7 of the DNP V3 00 Level 2 Protocol Assig
64. SYSTEM DEVICE COMMAND EDITING A EPM DEVICE COMMAND ueesssesssssssssesesseessssesssseenns DELETE A SCRIPPS COMMAND cinis REA RAON NARAN ADO SCRIPIS TO THE SCHEDULER oiiire ana a a Ed EDIT SCHEDULER SCRIPTS DELETE SCHEDULER SCRIPTS cirnunnnoiia N Da A U oa NNN N 6 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 15 FLICKER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT APPENDIX A GE SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER COMPONENT FILES APPENDIX B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS APPENDIX C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS V 1 11 APPENDIX D TFTP SERVER PROGRAM SETUP APPENDIX E DNP CUSTOM CLASS MAP READINGS APPENDIX F APPLICATION NOTES TABLE OF CONTENTS C A oe nen ee ene nS ana EE A E E E ee re etme 16 gt i THEORY OF OPERATION aissa a i wii baie annette 152 INSTANTANEOUS FLICKER EVALUATION sssssssssssessssssssssssesesseeseessnsneeeseeessessnnnseseeeeeeeet 15 2 SHORT TERM FLICKER EVALUATION LONG TERM FLICKER EVALUATION CONNECTING TO GE COMMUNICATOR EXT UM aaea A e chested Selererl att aabdat dei mebtastecadiedwmaas ANALOG INPUT OBJECT BO sscassccccsssscssnceoscccassssssuneuvesaeasssvopevweaierstsassspvectoecoeemrauanunwecceamnaareres BINARY COUNTER OBJECT 20 BINARY OUTPUT OBJECT PO errira AEA RMD RM ALUE ine a e AE DNP SETTING rirsnpeenn i A N NE GE SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER COMPONENT FILES csninronncsnin N A 1 IN
65. TFTPD32 program Step 4 above The following screen appears GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL D 1 TFTP SERVER PROGRAM SETUP CHAPTER D TFTP SERVER PROGRAM SETUP gt Click the Settings button The Tftpd32 Settings screen appears Titpd32 Settings F Hide Window at startup 7 Show Progress bar IF Create ditt files I Translate Unix file names F Beep for long transfer T Activate Tftpd32 on this interface I Use anticipation window of fo Bytas y The screen shown here displays GE s recommended settings NOTE All firmware files for INP100 should be placed inside the C Program Files TFTPD32 TFTP_files folder before updating firmware lt NOTE It is not recommended to check the Activate Tftpd32 on this interface box Once that box is checked and your computer s IP is changed the TFTPD32 program may not work properly To fix the problem you may have to disable this feature inside the Windows Registry WARNING D 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Appendix E DNP Custom Class a Map Readings 1 E 1 Available DNP Class Map Readings for EPM94500 1 Second Readings Thermal Readings Accumulations Maximum Readings Minimum Readings Block Window Average Rolling Window Average THD and K Factor Phase Angles and Voltage Sequence 0 1 Second Readings Harmonic Magnitud
66. THE EPM 9800 METER You may use the on board display or one of the meter s External Displays to learn the current baud rate address and communication protocol of each meter port The settings for the Optical Port are fixed and cannot be changed Port 1 and Port 4 are the meter s RS 485 ports and are used for RS 485 communication with a variety of devices Port 3 is an internal modem or Ethernet Ports 1 and 4 are factory set at 115200 and 9600 baud rates Modem Gateway is 38 400 maximum gt Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application by clicking on the box or pull down menu of any of the following settings Address Assign an address to each port to communicate with other devices Multiple Meters on an RS 485 bus must each have a unique address set for the port that is connected to the bus Type in unique address Baud Rate The baud rate entered in this field must match the baud rate of the device that will be connected to the Meter at this port Use 9600 for modem connections From the pull down menu select 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 Data Bits for Modbus RTU and ASCII leave the Data Bits at 8 Other protocols may require a different setting Use the pull down menu to select from 5 6 7 or 8 Parity for Modbus RTU and ASCII leave the Parity at None Other protocols may require a different setting Use the pull down menu to select from None Even Odd Mark or Space St
67. The following submenu appears Limit D 01 Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage A N Limit D 02 Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage B N Limit D 03 Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage C N LimitID 04 Fifty Millisecond Updated Current A This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings for Limits Not all limits are shown above Limit ID extends to 32 gt Double click on any of the settings Limit ID 01 etc The Limits screen appears Percentage of Full Scale settings The limits are set in of full scale of FS so that when a user creates a profile he can keep his settings This is true even though the CT and PT Ratios change when the meter or a new meter is placed in a different location Changing the CT and PT Ratios will not effect the of full scale limits previously set This is useful when using large numbers at meters Umt 5 Ae Sats Maay O IAS Peep 12000 15 84 Below 12000 1584 Below 0 00 120 00 1504F Below 10 00 Belew 10 00 Below 10 00 Below 170 00 Below 25 00 Below GM Below MES Below 101 20 Below ZOD Below 101 20 Below 200 Above Lat 2 wn 5g 2 ees BE a s THEE p Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application gt To set the type of limit and the channel assigned to it double click in either the Type or Channel column gt From the pop up menu choose the desired settings and click OK gt To des
68. Used Full Load Loss VARs LVCU DIV 0 DIV 0 Quantity PU Value as o o O MP a MVA Base oo ooo doo O Nominal Voltage Lere instrument Transformers Numerator Denominator Multipler Potential Trf a 0 Curent tf J 0 Power Mutpier Meter Secondary Voltage 120 120 volts for EPM 9650 Meter Secondary Current 5 5amps for EPM 9650 Value 3 Ph Loss 1 Ph Watt 1 Ph kW ull Load Loss Watts o o o ooo 000 ull Load Loss VARs es ee 3 2 Watts Loss at CT Full Load Phase to Phase Phase to Grd TestVoltage ss CO 0 Full Load Current DIV 0 B 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION Line Lass Compensation Calculation Example Three Element Meter with 3 VWye connected PT s and 3 CT s ABC Power Compan Name Joe Engineer Cd Stn Trf Bank No Small Station 138 Date 2714 2002 Metering Point Information Meter point is 45 miles down line from Big Station aaa a ee for GE Communicator Software Full Load Loss Watts LWCU 0 00362 0 004 Full Load Loss VARs LVCU 0 01872 0 019 Loss Factors Calc Used Quantity PU Value Vale Used R 00304 0 0304 X o oasa O 01573 MVA Base 100 100l Meter Installation Data Potential Trf 138000 1200 Current Tf 2300 J 5 180 Power Multiplier 216000 Meter Secondary Voltage 120 120 volts for EPM
69. Vg Vp and Ve Displayed values include Pg and Pip Max and Min for Vg Vp and Ve 15 12 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 FLICKER PERFORMANCE NOTES 15 8 Performance Notes P and P average time are synchronized to the clock e g for a 10 minute average the times will occur at 0 10 20 etc The actual time of the first average can be less than the selected period to allow for initial clock synchronization If the wrong frequency is chosen e g 50Hz selection for a system operating at 60Hz Flicker will still operate but the values computed will not be valid Select carefully User settings are stored If Flicker is on and power is removed from the meter Flicker will still be on when power returns This can cause data gaps in the logged data The Max and Min values are stored and are not lost if the unit is powered down Flicker meets the requirements of IEC 61000 4 15 and former IEC 868 Refer to those specifications for more details if needed Operation is at 230V for 50Hz and 120V for 60Hz as per specification If the input voltage is different the system will normalize it to 230V or 120V for computational purposes GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 13 PERFORMANCE NOTES CHAPTER 15 FLICKER 15 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Chapter 16 Customizing DNP V3 0
70. a percentage of the Full Scale of FS Set the Full Scale in the Limits and Waveform Full Scales section of the Device Profile section 3 4 Full Scales are based on the CT and PT ratios set in the CT PT Ratios and System Hookup section 3 3 gt Before programming the PQ and Waveform Thresholds set the CT and PT ratios gt Set the Limits and Waveform Full Scales Caution Changing the CT amp PT Ratios will reset the meter and clear all Logs and Accumulations Note on Sampling Rate A higher sampling rate allows for transients to be monitored Generally users will set the meter to 128 samples per cycle for this purpose Lower sampling rates have advantages because they allow you to record more cycles of information per event screen Low sampling rates are better for long duration events like motor starts or distribution faults The meter enables users to tailor the recording for both these applications For more information on Sampling Rate see the graph later in this section GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 45 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 3 46 kA NOTE kA NOTE CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 double click on the PQ Thresholds Waveform Recording line The Waveform CBEMA Profile screen appears _ Wavelorm Above er eae Wevelorm Below Setpoint et Valva En Enable Yeweri B Enable 120 00 x 120 00 120 00
71. a unique address To remove devices select and click Remove Click on the Close button when you have finished adding or removing devices The first Connection Manager screen returns Click once on the Location to which you would like to connect your computer You may only connect to one location at a time GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SOFTWARE CONNECTION gt To change to a different location you must first disconnect from the current location by clicking on the Disconnect button or by selecting Disconnect from the Connection Menu Connection Manager ES te Meter lite lat Connected to Location gt Click Connect The computer connects to the meter via the network When GE Communicator EXT has located the meter s at that location the Device Status screen appears confirming the connection The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters ii Troubleshooting the Connection If the connection fails check first to see if the both the v physical and software connections to the primary Internal Network Option Meter are viable see below Once these connections have been checked check the connections with other devices Suggested checkpoints Internal Network Option Meter gt Check cables gt Check IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway settings gt Check that the Address is 1 gt Check that Modbus TCP was
72. addresses General attribute lt item DATA POLL DELAY 400 ALARM POLL DELAY 1000 SYSTEM COMM TIMEOUT 1000 ALARM CONTACT PHONE ALARM CONTACT PERSON Administrator gt lt item gt Table 6 8 System Attributes Attribute Description Settings DATA_POLL_DELAY Poll delay between each Modbus Min 500 Max 65536 poll in milliseconds Default 500 SYSTEM_COMM_TIMEOUT System communication timeout Min 500 Max 32000 in milliseconds Default 500 ALARM_POLL_DELAY Poll delay between each Modbus Min 1000 poll for each device s alarm Max 65535 polling in milliseconds Default 1000 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 29 CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Table 6 8 System Attributes Attribute Description Settings ALARM_CONTACT_PHONE Alarm contact phone number Max size 10 digits ALARM_CONTACT_PERSON Alarm contact person name Max size 64 characters Email Attributes lt item EMAIL 1 FORMAT 1 long EMAT EMAT EMAT EMAT EMAT EMAT EMAT gt lt item gt L 2 FORMAT 2 long L 3 FORMAT 3 long L 4 FORMAT 4 short L 5 FORMAT 5 short L 6 FORMAT 6 short L 7 FORMAT 7 short L 8 FORMAT 8 short Device Elements lt DEVICE_X gt and lt DEVICE_X gt where X is from 1 to 16 Contain parameters for each device General Attributes lt item DEV_T
73. an I O module by connecting it Toe directly to your computer use the Stand Alone Programmer utility section 11 17 You must know the current address and baud rate of the I O you want to change See section 11 5 for a list of factory settings if the I O is new or use the Query 1 0 function section 11 14 Port 4 ONLY if the address and or baud rate has been changed or is no longer known When you have determined the current address and baud rate proceed with the steps listed below gt Make sure the EPM Meter s Port 3 or 4 is configured to communicate with the I O module at the same baud rate 57600 recommended gt Set the Port to Master mode See Chapter 3 EPM 9450 9650 or Chapter 4 EPM 9800 for details on configuring the EPM Meter s communication ports gt Connect the I O to the EPM 9450 9650 Meter s Port 3 or 4 or EPM 9800 Port 4 You may connect a group of I Os to the EPM Meter to make address baud rate changes LA only if each I O already has a unique address If the I Os have the same address such as oes three new KYZ modules you must connect and change their addresses individually See section 11 3 for details on using multiple 1 0 modules gt From the I O Devices menu select Change I O Module Address Baud Rate The following screen appears Change Address Baud Rate Through Device Current Settings New Settings LO MERETE ERCI 57600 857600 z oka Chenge gt From the pull down
74. and accumulations Be sure to capture needed meter information before changing CT and PT Ratios CAUTION Note on Sampling Rate A higher sampling rate allows for transients to be monitored Generally users will set the monitor to 128 samples per cycle for this purpose Lower sampling rates have advantages because they allow you to record more cycles of information per event screen Low sampling rates are better for long duration events like motor starts or distribution faults The meter enables users to tailor the recording for both these applications For more information on Sampling Rate see the graph on page 4 39 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 47 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 double click on the PQ Thresholds Waveform Recording line The Waveform CBEMA Profile screen appears ice Profile Waveform CEMA Prose Mookuge gt Wavetorm Above Setpoint Wevetorm Below Setpoint Channel Value Enable Value s Enable POEnabie 120 00 z J z 120 00 z 120 00 120 00 a w 120 00 input q Sampling Rate 126 j samples Cycle 60Hz L 1 Wavelorm PO Tagger 2 Wavetorm PO Trigger eom EO ane E Total Capture Windows Per Event iz 6 Waveform PO Trigger i mo 7 Wavetorm PO Trigger B Waveform PO Trigger 8 Cycles Captured Per Window 60Hz 1 Software Triggers gt To set
75. and Point is slower than the other two options Colors Background Foreground Subsets User can reverse the colors Point Sizes for Each Subset Small Medium Large or Micro Line Types for Each Subset Pull down menu offers Dashed Dot Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot Medium Solid Thick Solid Medium Thin Solid Medium Thick Solid Extra Thick Solid Item Point Types for Each Subset Pull down menu offers Plus Cross Solid Circle Square Solid Square Diamond Solid Diamond Upward Triangle Solid Upward Triangle Downward Triangle Solid Downward Triangle Dash or Pixel To include the laux in the graph gt Click the laux On button Click the laux Off button to remove Double click on the laux graph for a closer view To include the High Speed Inputs in the graph Click the Inputs On button Double click on the Inputs graph for a closer view Each input is listed on the Y axis followed by a 1 or 0 a 1 denotes that the input is open a 0 denotes that the input is closed Click Inputs Off to remove To Print the graph Click the Print Graph button To Export an image from the screen Click the Export Picture button To Export the data only Click the Export Data button To view the previous or next waveform record Click the Previous or Next buttons To Zoom In ona portion of the graph Click and drag to form a box Double click To Zoom Out GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Click
76. button when the column is at the desired width gt Click Pause to temporarily stop the screen update and enable the Copy button gt Click Resume to continue the real time update GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL f 5 REAL TIME READINGS 7 2 4 Poll Multiple Devices CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING gt Click Print to send the data to a printer gt To Copy the data into another program click Pause to enable the Copy button then click Copy gt Paste into your new document gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen To view polled data from multiple devices connected to your computer gt Select Poll Multiple Devices from the Real Time Polling menu The Poll Multiple Devices screen appears gt Click on the tabs to access the following readings see previous page for details on measurements 7 6 0 1 Seconds Volts AN BN CN Aux IA B C Nm Volts AB BC CA VAA B C Total VAR A B C Total Watt A B C Total Freq Power Factor A B C Total VAN Aux Update Time 1 Second Volts AN BN CN Aux IA B C Nm Nc Volts AB BC CA VAA B C Total VAR A B C Total Watt A B C Total Freq Power Factor A B C Total Imb V I Update Time Average Volts AN BN CN Aux IA B C Nm Nc Volts AB BC CA VAA B C Total VAR A B C Total Watt A B C Total Freq Power Factor A B C Total Imb V I Update Time Maximum Minimum Volts AN BN CN
77. does not have the G option you will damage the meter Please check the end label on your meter and your invoice to make sure you have the G Option MODEL NUMBER G must be in the PL9650 G D2 60HZ 2meg part number for a 300volt direct SERIAL NUMBER POWER INPUT connection 04 20347 90 276 vats AC or DC Max Voltage also MAX VOLTAGE MAX CURRENT shows the max 300V L N 10A _ voltage the unit SOO can measure C T RATIO P T RATIO NOTES c US LISTED ELECTRICAL amp ELECTRONIC MEASURING amp TEST EQUIP 645A 3 8 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS G must be in the part number for a 300 volt direct connection Max Voltage also shows the max voltage the unit can measure To select the 300 Volt Option check the 300 Volt Secondary box Are you sure you want to select this box gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter Then Reset Logs Warning Resetting Logs clears Logs and Accumulations Be sure to capture needed meter A information before updating the Device Data will no longer be available after the Reset The meter will be prepared for new installation 3 3 2 One Amp Current Input Addendum Modification Number M10 0 For sp
78. event captured Alarm Details Limits 4 1s IA Below Limit 2 Combination OR value 0 38 5 1s IB Below Limit 2 Combination OR value 0 38 6 1s IC Below Limit 2 Combination OR value 0 38 Inputs 1 HSI Input 1 BK101 Off 3 HSI Input 3 Closed 4 HSI Input 4 Closed Configure Alarm Polling Options gt Enter values within the double quotes gt To enable the polling for a device set DEV_POLL_ALARM to Yes to disable it set No Alarm polling options 1 to 9 See table below The default is to send alarm emails for all options 1 to 9 You can configure the polling profile to have any combination of options gt Edit the poll_profile xml gt Set up the alarm polling options by concatenating the options IDs such as 1 2 3 4 5 9 gt Set the alarm delay for limits in Milliseconds a value of 1000 1 second If a limit condition occurs for 1 second or more an alarm email will be sent lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt lt DEVICE x gt lt item DEV_POLL ALARM DEV_ALARM OPTIONS DEV_ALARM DELAY gt lt item gt lt DEVICE_x gt lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt fi Most of the Alarm Triggering Conditions for EPM devices rely on the device s vo configuration in the Device Profile Make sure that the settings are correct for Limits ee Inputs Waveforms etc GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 41 CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Table
79. for these Logs see section 3 12 See Chapter 8 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide for how to view logs gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Trending Setup or double click on the Trending Setup line The Trending submenu appears gt To change the settings for Log 1 double click on Log 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 51 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt To change the settings for Log 2 click on Log 2 The Snapshot Channel Assignment Log 1 or 2 screen appears Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application gt gt e er we er mec 4days Ohour Omin Osec ig F Total Records p KE concet E CN EM Type Using pull down menu select the type of snapshot Channel Using pull down menu select a channel for the snapshot Click on Add to include the selections in the Log click on Remove to delete To remove multiple items hold Control while clicking items to be removed Click Remove To remove a range of items click the first item hold Shift then click the last item Click Remove When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen Click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile Reset Logs Total bytes used and Bytes remaining screens display the memory status for that particular file meter assumes 256 by
80. from software e Flash Upgrades e Flicker Start and Stop e Pulse Test e CT and PT Compensation e Relay Control and 1 0 Utilities e Time of Use Accumulations and changes to the Time of Use calendar settings Password protection has two levels e Level 1 accesses Time of Use Accumulations Only These are billing functions e Level 2 accesses all password protected functions listed above The Level 2 Password also allows a user to enable or disable the password function GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL died OVERVIEW CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS When the password feature is enabled GE Communicator EXT will ask for the appropriate password each time a user attempts to perform a protected operation The password feature is on a two minute timer after exiting from a password protected area the user has two minutes to access another protected area without re entering the password If more than two minutes elapse GE Communicator EXT will ask for the appropriate password Use the Log On Off feature section 12 4 to renew password protection immediately GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS ENABLING PASSWORDS 11 2 Enabling Passwords gt From the Tools Menu select Passwords gt Enable Disable Enable Password feature To Enable Passwords Please Fill In The Following Fields 10 Characters Max For Each Level 1 Password Retype Level 2 Password Retype Passwords may contain up to
81. gt To access click on the Device Status button or select Tools gt Retrieve Device Status Device Status Network IP Address 3 94 246 209 S02 List of Currently Connected Devices Device Device Type Boot Run time DSP Boot DSP Run time Comm State DSP State On Time Serial NVRAM Pro 121689 EPM 9650 601 618 600 628 Healthy Healthy 9 15 2006 20 10 37 33 00121689 4 MB Full tj e Device The Primary Device is listed first See section 2 5 for details e Device Name The name you give to the Primary Device e Boot Version number of the GE Initialization and Diagnostic Firmware This firmware runs first on power up This firmware is not field upgradeable Run time Version number of the GE Communicator EXT Operating Firmware See Chapter 13 for details on upgrading firmware e DSP Boot Version number of the DSP Initialization and Flash Reprogrammer This firmware runs first on power up as part of the Boot This firmware is not field upgradeable DSP Run time Version number of the DSP operating firmware See Chapter 13 for details on upgrading firmware Com State Health status of the communication processor DSP State Health status of the DSP processor On Time Date and Time at which the GE meter was last powered up Serial Number The device s Unique Identification Number NVRAM Amount of NVRAM nonvolatile RAM available to the device This memory is used for Logs e Protection Stat
82. menu Select from 0 to 96 captures The higher the number the more information you will be stringing together When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter Reset Logs With the Flicker Settings screen the user can set the test times for the Flicker function gt From the Device Profile screen section 3 2 click on the button beside Flicker Settings or double click on the Flicker Settings line This screen appears 50160 Picker From the pull down menus select a Short term test time and a Long term test time From the Frequency pull down menu select 50 or 60 Hz When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter Flicker is discussed in detail in Chapter 15 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 3 5 5 Squared T and V Squared T Thresholds With the Squared T and V Squared T Thresholds screen the user can set at what point the Current and Voltage should accumulate gt From the Device Profile screen section 3 2 click on the button beside Squared T and V
83. menus enter the module s current address and baud rate gt Enter the address and baud rate you would like to assign gt Enter an address from 1 to 247 being sure that the address is not already assigned to any other I O you will be using gt Click Make Change Aconfirmation screen appears after the module has been updated gt Repeat the procedure for all I Os in the group gt Write down the module s new address and baud rate 10 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES ASSIGNING ADDRESSES AND BAUD RATES TO AN I O MODULE gt Proceed to section 11 7 to enter the I O in the EPM Meter s Device Profile and configure all other I O parameters GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 9 ENTERING I O MODULES IN THE EPM METER S DEVICE PROFILE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 7 Entering I O Modules in the EPM Meter s Device Profile 10 10 The EPM Meter uses a Master Slave polling architecture when communicating with the I O modules therefore you must enter all I Os in the EPM Meter s Device Profile This procedure tells the unit what types of modules are connected to it what parameters you have set for them and at what address they may be found gt 20mAON4 Analog Out 4 20mA 4 ch 132 te te 4 AO Mode 1 ZOMAON4 Analog Out 4 20mA 4 ch 132 ta ta 4 AD MORe 2 BAJI Analog iInd ImA 8ch R 138 te 4 Al Modde 1 Write down the name and unique address of each 1 0
84. meter The computational corrections used for transformer and transmission line loss compensation are similar Generically no load losses and full load losses are evaluated and a correction factor for each loss level is calculated However the calculation of the correction factors that must be programmed into the meter differ for the two different applications For this reason the two methodologies will be treated separately in this chapter In the EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 meters Loss Compensation is a technique that computationally accounts for active and reactive power losses The meter calculations are based on the formulas below These equations describe the amount of active Watts and reactive VARs power lost due to both iron and copper effects reflected to the secondary of the instrument transformers Total Secondary Watt Loss Measured Voltage Cal point Voltage x LWFE Measured Current Cal Point Current x LWCU x Full scale Secondary VA Total Secondary VAR Loss Measured Voltage Cal point Voltage x LVFE Measured Current Cal Point Current x LVCU x Full scale Secondary VA e The Values for LWFE LWCU LVFE LVCU are derived from the transformer and meter information as demonstrated in following sections e The calculated loss compensation values are added to or subtracted from the measured Watts and VARs e The selection of adding or subtracting losses is made through the meter profile when
85. on the number of cycles captured Increasing Sampling Rate increases waveform definition but reduces the length of the observed window The approximate length of the observed window is shown in the last column For example For observed events of approximately 1 2 second a sampling rate of 32 samples should be used Table 3 3 Effects of Sampling Rate Samples Samples Cycles per Time per Ehonnels per Capture Approx Cycle Channel Analog HSI 16 7 8 1024 64 1 second 32 7 8 1024 32 1 2 second 64 7 8 1024 16 1 4 second 128 7 8 1024 8 1 8 second 256 3 8 2048 8 1 8 second 512 1 8 4096 8 1 8 second i Note on Waveform Event Captures Ascreen of data is one capture If you set Total Captures to 3 and you are recording at 16 samples per cycle you will record NOTE 16 Samples 3 x 64 192 cycles of recorded waveforms GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 47 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 3 48 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 128 Samples 3 x 8 24 cycles of recorded waveforms With the 2 MB module you can have a total of 64 captures With the 4 MB module you can have a total of 96 captures You can partition the memory in any fashion required for the specific application There is no limitation on the number of cycles that can be recorded per event gt EN 50160 Flicker To choose the total amount of captures click on the Total Captures pull down
86. one amp current transformers This will give the Meter a range of 0 to 1 amps with an additional over range of 1 amp This option is used where 1A IEC meters are required or extended low current performance is needed and higher current performance is not needed This option is not used for most 1A installations The standard Meter has the capability of very accurately monitoring 1A loads and providing extended current overload GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS The following shows the change made to the toroid to adjust for the modification Standard 5 amp input one wind around internal meter toroid Modified 1 amp input 5 winds around internal meter toroid In order to maintain maximum accuracy with one 1 amp current inputs the wire is wound around the internal toroids five 5 times instead of the usual one time This effectively multiplies the current input by five 5 times to maintain maximum resolution gt No modification is required to the CT Ratios because EPM 9800 CT Ratios automatically adjust internally for this modification J Use of the M10 0 Option is not recommended unless direct 1A IEC meter replacement of vw very extended low current performance is needed NOTE 4 3 3 Limit and Waveform Full Scales All Limit and Waveform settings sections 4 5 1 and 4 5 3 respectively are based on a percentage of the Full Scale F
87. or the total of all registers you would like to view for the selected month or season 9 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE VIEWING TOU ACCUMULATED DATA The EPM Advanced Meters are true four quadrant power meters They display the VARs and VA for each quadrant as illustrated below Quadrant Power Factor Watts VARs 1 Lag 4 2 Lead 5 Lag 4 Lead 2 gt Print or Export the data by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen Send Password If Passwords are Enabled the Send Password button will be visible on the screen You must enter a Password initially to view the screen Then when the Password has expired you must click Send Password to continue polling This feature was initiated because some users found that continuous polling filled up the system event log too fast gt Click OK to close this window and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 15 VIEWING TOU ACCUMULATED DATA CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE 9 16 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 10 1 Overview The External Devices section of the EPM Meter s Device Profile Chapter 3 9450 9650 Chapter 4 9800 tells the Meter which I O Modules are connected to it at which addresses This profile must reflect
88. pull down menu select from the following e Add to Watts and Subtract from VAR e Subtract from Watts and Add to VAR e Add to Watts and VAR e Subtract from Watts and VAR gt With a third pull down menu apply the loss based on the power flow direction From the menu select one of the following e Both Watts and Watts e Watts only e Watts only Do NOT use the last settings if you do not have the appropriate firmware Check with A Technical Support if you have a question WARNING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 37 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt When all settings are complete click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter 4 4 7 Cold Load Pickup gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Cold Load Pickup or double click on the Cold Load Pickup line The following submenu appears showing the current settings for Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Time after control power is restored to start demand Disabled Minimum time control power must be off before using Cold Load Pickup 0 Second s gt Double click on one of the parameters and the following screen appears Cold Load Pickup Time after control power is minutes restored to start demand Minimum time control p
89. returned for each Object gt Click on the Object on the left side of the screen gt Click on a Variation on the right side of the screen gt Click OK to save the new settings The Clear All button clears all assigned items on all the tabs The Clear button clears only the items on the current tab view GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 13 DNP SETTINGS CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 16 7 DNP Settings In this window you can enable DNP Time Synchronization The Time Interval is the amount of time the device waits before requesting Time Synchronization from the Master using IINI 4 The Time Interval is configurable from 1 minute to 1 day in 1 minute intervals The initial factory setting is 1 day gt Select a Class 0 Poll Counter Object using the lower pull down menu DNF Time Syn mg Enable s 0 Poll Countur Object Froren Couster Otyect 21 X gt Click OK to save the new settings The Clear All button clears all assigned items on all the tabs The Clear button clears only the items on the current tab view 16 14 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Appendix A GE Script amp Scheduler 010101110010 011 1 Component Files A 1 GE Script amp Scheduler Component Files The GE Script amp Scheduler software prog
90. scanned for One Second Phase to Neutral Volts AN If the new data is different from the previous standard value by the boundary value an Analog Change Event will be created Example If the previous standard value is 110 and new data is lower than 98V or higher than 122V a new Analog Change Event Point will be created The new value then becomes the previous standard value for future scans Analog Input Points have various Full Scales values due to different data types Volts Amps Watts etc These Full Scale values are used for Exception Polling in DNP Some Full Scale values are programmable by users and others have fixed numbers See the chart of Full Scale Values below The Clear All button clears all assigned items on all the tabs The Clear button clears only the items on the current tab view Full Scale values are 4 byte integer numbers The units are as fo GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Analog Input Full Scale Unit lA B C Nc Programmab 1 65536 Amps I Nm Programmab 1 65536 Amps V AN BN CN Programmab 1 65536 Volts V AB BC CA Programmab 1 65536 Volts V Aux Programmab 1 65536 Volts Power Phase Programmab 1 65536 Watts Power Total Programmab 1 65536 Watts Frequency Programmab 1 65536 Hz Power Factor 4000 0 001 PF Angles 18000 0 001 PF Percent 10000 0 01 K Factor 500 0 01 TOU Ratio N A N A Temperature 10000 0 01 16 5 ANALOG INP
91. see later sections Labels are user defined names for the Meter the Auxiliary Voltage terminal and the N Measured terminal fi It is important to label the meter under Meter Designation because the label given will 4 become the name of the file for any logs retrieved from that meter see Chapter 8 of the GE NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Communicator EXT Guide for details on viewing stored logs GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt From the Device Profile screen section xxx click on the button beside General Settings then click on Labels The following submenu appears Meter Designation 00121689 VAUX Vaux IN Measured Inm Power Direction Quadrant1 4 Delivered and Quadrant 2 3 Received Power Factor Display Method 2 Q1 Lag Q2 Lead Q3 Lag Q4 Lead gt Double click on any of the designation names The following screen appears Device Profile Labels Meter Designation p0121689 V Aux N Measured Power Direction Quadrant 1 4 Delivered and Quadrant2 3 Received Loh d al ar 0a 8 aD EETA Method 2 Q1 Lag O2 Lead Q3 Lag O4 Lead Memo Field gt Enter the labels in the appropriate fields Meter Designation MUST be set for Partial Log Retrieval When all changes are entered gt Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt Click on the Update Device button to effect changes This sends the new profile to the meter
92. see the EPM 9450 9659 User s Manual EPM 9800 RJ 45 Connection The 10 100BaseT option conforms to the IEEE 802 3 specification using unshielded twisted pair UTP wiring This allows the use of inexpensive RJ 45 connectors and CATS or better cabling An RJ 45 connector is supplied with the meter This LAN connection allows multiple PCs to be connected concurrently The RJ 45 line is inserted into the RJ 45 Port or Jack on the Port 3 cable coming from the back of the EPM 9800 with 10 100BaseT option The connection using RJ 45 into the EPM 9800 connects the meter to a network using Modbus TCP protocol over the Ethernet You can access the meter with a SCADA system MV90 and PCs all at the same time RS 232 Use the Optical Port on the face of the meter to make the RS 232 connection The magnetic coupler snaps into place the other end of the cable connects to your PC This connection is necessary to set the initial software configuration For additional details on EPM 9800 connections and wiring refer to the EPM 9800 User s Manual 6 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SOFTWARE CONNECTION 6 4 Software Connection All EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 Meters Connect a meter to a computer using Port 1 9450 9650 or Port 3 9800 to configure the network parameters and add a network connection The meter must be configured to speak Modbus TCP Modbus TCP is the common protocol used for Modbus communica
93. ss Start Screen 0 Device Status APPLICATION COMMAND LINE METHODS 1 Phasors Diagram EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only 2 Instantaneous Polling GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL C3 APPLICATION COMMAND LINE METHODS CHAPTER C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS V 1 11 C 4 Poll All EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only Poll Max Min Poll Power Readings Poll Harmonics Poll Internal Inputs Poll Multiple Devices EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only Oo ON DH FW Poll Pulse Accumulations EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only 10 Poll Limit Status 11 Poll Time of Use Readings EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only 12 Poll Meter External Digital Inputs EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only 13 Poll Meter External Analog Inputs EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only 14 Poll Meter ElectroLogic Status EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only 15 Poll Relay Control 16 Poll Readings with DDE Service EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only Tech Mode ONLY 17 Poll Log Statistics Added 08 06 2003 18 Log Retrieval Screen Added 08 06 2003 19 Poll Power and Demand EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only Added 01 22 2004 20 Poll Energy EPM9450 9650 amp 9800 Only Added 01 22 2004 If left out Start screen is Device Status dn Device Name Must use period as place holder for a space In Location Name Must use period as place holder for a space vm View Mode 0 Normal 1 Hide Main Window and Exit Program upon closing of Start Screen GE Communicato
94. the Device Status button or by selecting Tools gt Retrieve Device Status will now list the New Primary Device first 5 2 5 Merge Connection Databases This is a tool for combining old Connection directories with new Connection directories 6 GE Communicator File Connection Real Time Poll Tools I O Devices Connection Manager a Quick Connect Pro Disconnect Change Primary Device Merge Connection Databases From the GE Communicator EXT Toolbar gt Click on Merge Connection Databases The Merge Connection Databases screen appears GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 9 EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER Merge Connection Databases Select Two CNEXCOM databases to merge Select the source cnexcom directory Select the destination cnexcom directory E Select Src and Dest database directories gt Type in the Source File or browse for the file by clicking Browse gt Type in the Destination File or browse for the file by clicking Browse gt Click Merge to import the Source File into the Destination File gt Click OK to exit the screen and return to the Main GE Communicator EXT screen 5 10 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE 5 3 Configure the EPM 6000 Device Profile gt From the GE Communicator EXT Toolbar click the Profile icon A group of screens appea
95. the Meter gt You may Reset Logs after updating the device See section 4 26 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 45 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 4 46 4 5 2 ElectroLogic Relay Control CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER To edit a Device Profile s ElectroLogic Relay settings gt mio ck rin TR Clone Assigneditems E Hop From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the GE Relay line EX5 Power Quality and Alarm Settings Set Delay o I Seconds Ruset Delay Suconds P Digital on f To assign an item to the RelayLogic Tree gt gt Select an Input for the tree by clicking on a bullet next to numbers 1 through 8 Choose Limits or Digital Inputs by clicking on the bullet in front of the word Select the Limit or Input you want to assign to the RelayLogic Tree Input you selected Press Set to confirm your selection and the software will place the selection in the appropriate window in the screen After you have assigned all the RelayLogic Inputs select the gates that will be used to combine the logic to trigger the relay To select a gate click on the gate or choose one from the dropdown menu below the gate To change items on the RelayLogic Tree use the following steps GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS gt To change t
96. the monitor These voltages are measured between the phase voltage inputs and Vn input to the meter Technologically these voltages can be measured even when the meter is in a Delta configuration and there is no connection to the Vn input However in this configuration these voltages have limited meaning and are typically not reported Voltage Vaux This is the fourth voltage input measured from between the Vaux and Vref inputs This input can be scaled to any value However the actual input voltage to the meter should be of the same magnitude as the voltages applied to the Va Vb and Vc terminals GLOSSARY 8 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
97. the screen to Clear All Clear Cancel or Print your selections gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click the Update Device button to send the new profile to the meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 4 Revenue and Energy Settings Revenue and Energy Settings is the second group of settings in the Device Profile gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Revenue and Energy Settings line All of the settings in the Revenue and Energy Settings Group are listed EPM 9800 iai General Settings X5 Revenue and Energy Settings EX5 Energy Scaling 45 Demand Integration Intervals EXF Internal KYZ Display Configuration d EX5 CT and PT Compensation ia EX Transformer Line Lass Compensation EAB Cold Load Pickup dp 45 Cumulative Demand Type q 45 Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval EX Pulse Accumulations gt Click on the particular programmable setting you would like to configure The settings will be detailed in the order they appear on the Device Profile screen 4 24 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS 4 4 1 Energy Scaling gt From the Device Profile s
98. the screen to grab the most current values and add them to the file The Poll Interval can be set Set to 0 for as fast as possible oe GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING POLL REAL TIME TRENDS The Min and Max Y Values that the graph displays the Y Range can be set Auto Scale determines the best range of values automatically gt Click Cancel to return to the main screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 33 POLL REAL TIME TRENDS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 34 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 ooo111010110110 Chapter 8 Viewing Logs 010101110010 011 1 8 1 Overview The EPM 9450 9650 and EPM 9800 Meters record the following logs EPM 7000 logs as noted Historical Trends Logs 1 and 2 EPM 7000 Historical Log These logs are two separate collections of time stamped records or snapshots used to track any parameter over time Each record or snapshot can contain multiple data items which are recorded at specific intervals and stamped with the time of recording The following programmable criteria determine when the Meter will take a snapshot The user specified time interval A parameter s exceeding of a limit or a return to within limits The capture of a waveform An 1 0 event a change in a relay or input Limits Log The Limits Log retrieves ind
99. this screen according to the requirements of your application Zone Descriptor A Zone Descriptor sets the Time Zone for the EPM Monitor y 0 Greenwich Mean Time NOTE See the chart below for the Zone Descriptor for your Time Zone Table 3 1 Greenwich Mean Time GMT Table Dublin London 1 00 Azores 1 00 Brussels Paris Warsaw 2 00 Mid Atlantic 2 00 Athens Cairo Helsinki 3 00 Buenos Aires Georgetown 3 00 Baghdad Kuwait Moscow Teheran 4 00 Atlantic Time Canada 4 00 Kabul Baku Santiago 5 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada 5 00 Karachi Lima 6 00 Central Time US amp Can Mx 6 00 Daka City 7 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada 7 00 Bankok Hanoi Jakarta GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Table 3 1 Greenwich Mean Time GMT Table Dublin London 8 00 Pacific Time US amp Can 8 00 Beijing Hong Kong Singapore Tijuana 9 00 Alaska 9 00 Osaka Sapporo Seoul 10 00 Hawaii 10 00 Brisbane Melbourne Guam Hobart 11 00 Midway Island 11 00 Magadan Solomon Islands 12 00 Eniwetok 12 00 Auckland Fiji Daylight Savings Information Enable Enables an automatic adjustment for daylight savings Disable Disables an automatic adjustment for daylight savings Auto DST Sets Daylight Savings Time automatically for the United States only
100. watts VARs VA the average is a calculated value that corresponds to the thermal average over a specified time interval The interval is specified by the user in the meter profile The interval is typically 15 minutes So the Average Watts is the thermal average of watts over the previous 15 minute interval The thermal average rises to 90 of the actual value in each time interval For example if a constant 100kW load is applied the thermal average will indicate 90kW after one time interval 99kW after two time intervals and 99 9kW after three time intervals A unit of computer information equivalent to the result of a choice between two alternatives Yes No On Off for example Or the physical representation of a bit by an electrical pulse whose presence or absence indicates data Relating to a system of numbers having 2 as its base digits 0 and 1 The Block Fixed Window Average is the average power calculated over a Power user set time interval typically 15 minutes This calculated average corresponds to the demand calculations performed by most electric utilities in monitoring user power demand See Rolling Window Average A group of 8 binary digits processed as a unit by a computer or device and used especially to represent an alphanumeric character A voltage quality curve established originally by the Computer Business Equipment Manufacturers Association The CBEMA Curve defines voltage disturbances that cou
101. where X is from 1 to 8 In each of the 8 device elements Device info elements card copies data from poll_profile xml lt DEV_NAME gt and lt DEV_NAME gt lt DEV_TYPE gt and lt DEV_TYPE gt Up to 64 polling data attributes card copies data from poll_profile xml lt item D_UID 1_1 D_LABEL Inst Van D_VALUE 126 06 Data value gt lt item gt Configuration File for Generic Modbus Device The purpose of the configuration file is to allow the user to set what real value or information could be available in the poll_data xml file Each configuration file allows the user to set up 8 interpreted values or strings The configuration file s format is XML Below is an example xml file with three values lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt GE_Multilin_CONFIGURATION gt lt item CFG COMPARE TYPE Value CFG VALUE 0 CFG REF Disabled gt lt item CFG COMPARE TYPE Value CFG VALUE 128 CFG REF Enabled gt lt item CFG COMPARE TYPE String CFG VALUE 107 EPM 1250 CFG REF EPM 1250 Meter gt lt GE_Multilin_CONGFIGURATION gt The root tags are lt GE_Multilin_CONFIGURATION gt and lt GE_Multilin_CONFIGURATION gt with up to 8 items between the root tags GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 35 CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CFG_COMPARE_TYPE settings are Value for numeric comparison or String for text comparison CF
102. which uniquely identifies a computer attached to the Internet An IP Address can be assigned using a DHCP Server or it can be entered manually For your information here is a brief explanation of DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol was created by IETF Internet Engineering Task Force to enable individual computers on an IP network to extract their configurations from a server the DHCP Server or servers that have no exact information about the individual computers until they request the information The DHCP Server leases the IP Address to the DHCP Client for a period of time from 15 minutes to a year More information can be found in the Internet RFCs Request for Comments regarding available servers and technical details In DHCP Mode if a NACK message is received from the DHCP server INP100 will stop all vw Ethernet activities immediately and start a new DHCP process NOTE 6 5 1 DHCP Setup Enable the DHCP Mode in the meter gt From Device Profile in GE Communicator EXT open the Communication Ports screen Click on Advanced Settings Click DHCP tab Click Enable DHCP VV VV Access a working DHCP Server DHCP Servers automatically assign an IP Address and Subnet Mask Some DHCP Servers such as the one in Windows 2000 allow you to assign a Default Gateway IP DHCP Option 3 DNS IP DHCP Option 6 and SMTP Server IP DHCP Option 69 to the meter If your DHCP Server does not let you a
103. work you must have the Excel program in eae your system If you do not have Excel software or if the spreadsheet file is not in the GE Communicator directory a Warning will be displayed instead of the worksheet You can do your own calculations using the hardcopy Transformer Loss Compensation Worksheet in Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT Guide J For most Excel users this spreadsheet will not run until permission is given to run the LA Macros contained in the sheet This is done by changing the Excel Security Setting from i High to Medium GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS Device Profile Transformer and Line Loss Compensation Percent Loss of Watts Due to iron Due to Copper Percent Loss of VARS Due to Iron 0 000 Due to Copper 1 000 Transformer and Line Loss Applies to Both Watts and Watts X OK ff IcCaicuitor f cancel ff Heip The Excel Command gt From Excel Toolbar select Tools gt Security gt Options gt On the Security Tab Pag click on the Macro Security button gt Select Medium Security This setting allows Excel to run in GE Communicator EXT gt Enter the percent Loss of Watts and Vars for copper and iron in the appropriate fields gt Enable Transformer Loss Compensation by selecting Iron only Copper Only or Both Iron and Copper from the pull down menu at the bottom of the screen gt With the second
104. you plan to use Be sure all baud rates match that of the EPM 9450 9650 Meter s Port 3 or 4 EPM 9800 s Port 4 57600 is recommended Be sure all addresses are unique See section 11 6 for how to assign addresses and baud rates Connect the I O module s to the EPM 9450 9650 Meter s Port 3 or 4 EPM 9800 s Port 4 see the Meter s Installation and Operation Manuals for hardware installation details Be sure Port 3 or 4 is operating at 57600 baud and is in Master mode see Chapter 3 EPM 9450 9650 Chapter 4 EPM 9800 Click on the Edit Profile button or select Edit Current Device Profile from the Tools Menu to retrieve the EPM Meter s Device Profile See Chapter 3 EPM 9450 9650 Chapter 4 EPM 9800 When GE Communicator EXT has retrieved the Device Profile from the EPM Meter double click on External Devices The following screen appears Assigned EPM Module EPM Type ess Setting Settings Port Log Limal 1D No Device Assigned i No Device Assigned Ko Device Assigned No Device Assigned Ko Device Assigned Ho Divico Assigned No Device Assigned Ro Devion Assigned No Device Assigned Ho Device Assigned Ko Device Assigned No Device Assiqned Ko Device Assigned gt a 4 a 4 4 4 a 4 a 4 a 4 Click in the Type column and use the pull down menu to select the specific I O you wish to enter You may enter up to 16 modules Enter each module s unique address If you have not assigne
105. 0 METER gt Double click on a programmable setting eg Time Zone The Time Settings screen appears Zone Descriptor Daylight Savings Information Auto DST z Line Synchronization Enable No gt Frequency feon z gt Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application e Zone Descriptor Sets the Time Zone for the Meter 0 Greenwich Mean Time Table 4 1 Greenwich Mean Time GMT Table Dublin London 1 00 Azores 1 00 Brussels Paris Warsaw 2 00 Mid Atlantic 2 00 Athens Cairo Helsinki 3 00 Buenos Aires Georgetown 3 00 Baghdad Kuwait Moscow Teheran 4 00 Atlantic Time Canada 4 00 Kabul Baku Santiago 5 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada 5 00 Karachi Lima 6 00 Central Time US amp Can Mx 6 00 Daka City 7 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada 7 00 Bankok Hanoi Jakarta 8 00 Pacific Time US amp Can 8 00 Beijing Hong Kong Singapore Tijuana 9 00 Alaska 9 00 Osaka Sapporo Seoul 10 00 Hawaii 10 00 Brisbane Melbourne Guam Hobart GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Table 4 1 Greenwich Mean Time GMT Table Dublin London 11 00 Midway Island 11 00 Magadan Solomon Islands 12 00 Eniwetok 12 00 Auckland Fiji 4 3 5 Labels Daylight Savings Information Enable Enables an aut
106. 0 OR One Second Updated VA Total 110 00 4570 50 Below 30 00 3739 50 OR 8 One Second Updated Var Total 25 00 1038 75 Below 21 00 87255 OR 9 One Second Updated Watt Total 95 00 3947 25 Below 2 00 3822 60 OR Fifty Millisecond Updated Power Factor To Above 24 65 0 986 LAG Below 25 35 0 986 LEAD AND 101 20 4204 86 Below 98 80 4105 14 OR 20 00 831 00 Below 16 00 664 80 OR 101 20 4204 86 Below 8 80 4105 14 OR 3 00 3 00 Above 3 00 3 00 OR HHHH _11_ Fifty Milisecond Updated VA Total 12 Fifty Milisecond Updated Var Total 13 Fifty Milisecond Updated Watt Total 14 One Second Updated THD Current A tts Primary Values at 100 Example 1 Limit ID 1 Type 1 Second Readings Channel Volts AN Limit 1 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is below 12V Limit 2 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is above 132V Combination Limit 3 Setting AND If Limit 1 AND Limit 2 are exceeded then Limit 3 is exceeded Example 2 Limit ID 1 Type 1 Second Readings Channel Volts AN Limit 1 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is below 12V Limit 2 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is above 132V Combination Limit 3 Setting OR If Limit 1 OR Limit 2 are exceeded then Limit 3 is exceeded To combine Limits of different Limit IDs use the Relay Logic Diagrams Full Scale settings are shown in the lower left of the screen These values are set in the Limits and Waveform Full Scales section of the Device Profile section 3 4
107. 09 11 127 34 145 57 1638 182 03 Milliseconds jarmonic amp C 1000 2 1 rE Ee ES To view a graph gt Select a Starting Point if it is other than the first point of the waveform default 8 30 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS gt Select System Frequency 50Hz or 60Hz before performing the analysis by clicking Options at the top of the screen and clicking 50Hz or 60Hz The last frequency set will be the default until it is changed Two more graphs will be displayed Harmonic amp Interharmonic Spectrum 50Hz Window W_Meter1 Vbn 4 16 2002 2 24 10 561 00 PM 1745 IEC 1000 2 1 1 Interharmonic Spectrum 50Hz Window W_Meter1 Vbn 4 16 2002 2 24 10 561 00 PM 45010 00 0010 650 75010 800 90010950 1050t01100 120010 1280138001400 1500101550 Frequency Hz Group GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 31 VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS Measurement IEC 61000 4 7 ref First Edition establishes a well disciplined measurement method for harmonics which utilizes 10 50Hz systems or 12 cycle 60Hz systems sample windows upon which to perform the Fourier transform The result is a spectrum with 5Hz resolution for both 50Hz and 60Hz systems The standard further defines ways of combining individual 5 Hz bins to produce various groupings and components for referenced limits and guidelines The IEC Measurement Method define
108. 10 characters and may include the digits 0 9 and or the letters A Z Passwords are not case sensitive gt Enter a password for Level 1 and then retype it The Level 1 password blocks a user access to the Poll Time of Use Registers screen only without a password y If you enter and retype only a Level 1 Password or Level 2 Password and click OK the following screen will appear NOTE You must enter passwords in both fields for the system to accept any password gt Enter a password for Level 2 and then retype it The Level 2 password blocks the user s access to all password protected functions listed in section 12 1 without a password Only the Level 2 password can disable the password feature 3 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENABLING PASSWORDS CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS gt Click OK A screen appears Enabling Password Feature xi Warning Q Once Passwords have been enabled you must know the Level 2 Password to Disable Password Protection Are you sure you want to continue mema jE gt Click Yes The Password Status screen appears Protection Status gt Click OK J The password function is now enabled The computer status bar at the bottom of the LA screen will read PW Enabled See section 12 4 for how to disable passwords NOTE 11 4 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS PASSWORD STATUS 11 3 Password Status To confirm if the password protection feat
109. 120 00 120 00 120 00 10 00 Sampling Rate 120 Hie amples Cycle 60Hz B Cycles Captured Per Window 60Hz Wavelorm PO Tigger Wavetorm PO Trigger Waveform PO Trigger Waveform PO Trigge We vg te Total Capture Windows Pert To 6 Wavetorm PO Trigger hst 7 Wavelorm PO Trigger Wavelorm PO Trigger wmaun ih Software Triggers To set the threshold for a PQ Event and Waveform capture enter the desired percentage of Full Scale in the Value column of the Above Setpoint and Below Setpoint sections Full Scales are shown in the lower right corner of the screen Note on CBEMA The CBEMA plotting is a power quality standard known world wide for recording the amount of damage voltage transient conditions have done to the equipment being monitored The meter automatically records this information For CBEMA purposes the user programs internal set points for voltage below 90 and above 110 of full scale 10 from the nominal voltage These setpoints are defined by the ITI CBEMA specification The ITI CBEMA Curve is published by Information Technology Industry Council ITI and is available at http www itic org iss_pol techdocs curve pdf A user can set a recording with tighter voltage limits to trigger a waveform recording However CBEMA plotting will be based only on the limits internally set Note on Setting the EPM 9450 9650 Meter to Record Current Faults As discussed the voltage setp
110. 20V DC at 50 200mA use any port to computer on the EPM 9450 9650 The I O is 2 wire RS 485 Be sure to wire minus to amp minus and positive to positive ld I O Module RS 232 RS 485 fo re i i rehi Female T oO co c G es R Bi RS 485 Port a JJe s Connect RS 485 wires from the RS232 485 Converter display to the RS232 485 Converter gt Use an RS 232 cable to connect the RS232 485 Converter and your computer e Set the Converter to operate at 57600 baud e Set the Converter to DCE and HD GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 27 LOCATOR UTILITY STAND ALONE METHOD CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES gt Click on the GE Communicator EXT Connect icon on the tool bar or select Connect gt Quick Connect The following screen appears Serial Port g Network Device Address 7 Host Network Port a Protocol This screen displays your computer s communications settings gt Leave the Device Address field at 1 gt Inthe Baud Rate field enter 57600 or the baud rate to which the RS 232 RS 485 converter is set gt In the Serial Port field enter the computer s communication port into which the RS 232 cable is inserted gt Leave the Protocol field set at Modbus RTU gt Click Connect GE Communicator EXT will be unable to locate the device after a few seconds a No Device Found At This Location dialogue box will appear gt Click OK 10 28 GE COMMUNICATOR E
111. 289354719 38219 289354719 38143 38201 289354719 38201 289354719 38163 38221 289354719 38221 289354719 38228 17606926 38228 17606926 17606926 38231 17606926 50A 60 00A 60 50A 60 00A 60 10 00A 60 ajlnj js c Copy Factory Table to CT amp PT Comp Teble J gt Click Copy Factory Table to CT amp PT Comp Table gt Click OK CT amp PT Compensation is now Enabled and ready for corrections gt Collect data to determine the correction required Compensate CTs amp PTs gt Click Tools gt CT amp PT Comp gt Compensate CTs amp PTs gt Follow direction on screens Click tabs to make additional corrections instuctons Apply Voltage to each Phase Write in error in pacent for each phase Press Write New Gain Factors after entering all Errors tor Voltage Click Step 2 Tab _ _m gt Click OK GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 65 CT AND PT COMPENSATION CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 66 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 2 GE Communicator EXT 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Chapter 5 Configuring the EPM d 6000 Panel Meter 1 5 1 Introduction GE Communicator EXT Software enables you to configure the EPM 6000 9450 9650 and 9800 GE Panel Meters To configure the EPM 9450 9650 see Chapter 3 To configure the EPM 9800 see Chapter 4 To configure the EPM 6000 see Chapter 5 y If you cannot mak
112. 2MB DRAM Size 32MB Flash File Update Settings Run Time File Update Settings Fixed sew 0 re a g Dnt koo taana fite oo Gaw foo ma File yoe Fic amme Net Mask ss Mac ddess 0 SerF FFFS ea Firmware Update Via the Web Username rods Password Boot Fie Cunoni Uremame I Retrieve Setting Wite Setting Pumed Os Change Parsword gt Click on Retrieve Settings to retrieve the network settings used to download Flash Files for updating the network option board via TFTP The Initial Settings appear in the settings windows gt Inthe text boxes provided enter the name of the Runtime Update File and or Boot Update File Check with your Network Administrator and make any changes necessary to the network settings y These changes facilitate file transfers while in Boot Mode there is no permanent change Click on Write Settings to send the updated settings to the Meter A screen will ask Are you sure you want to Update the Flash File Settings Click Yes to update The sub window will display Write Completed gt Start up a TFTP server on your computer gt Set the default file path for the TFTP server to the location of the Runtime Boot Flash file location TFTP server software is available from GE See Appendix D for more information on TFTP gt To update Runtime Boot click on Update Runtime or Update Boot gt Click Yes to verify that you would lik
113. 3 11 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Limit and Waveform Full Scales or double click on the Limit and Waveform Full Scales line The following submenu appears SS EE ELE 1A B C Nc 5 00 INm 5 00 VAN BN CN 277 00 V AB BC CA 480 00 VAUX 277 00 Power Phase 1385 00 Power Total 4155 00 Frequency 60 00 This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings for the Limit and Waveform Full Scales The values shown are for example only iy Frequency and Voltage values are nominal values The Phase Powers are computed using nominal voltage and rated maximum current NOTE gt Double click on any of the settings The Limit and Waveform Full Scales screen appears Device Profile Limit and Waveform Full Scales IA B C Nc I Nm V AN BN CN 277 00 V AB BC CA 480 00 V Aux 277 00 Power Phase 1385 00 Power Total Frequency 60 00 ALL Enter the Full Scale for each parameter 3 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS e The Limits and Waveform settings section 3 10 and 3 14 respectively will be based on a percentage of the Full Scales entered here e GE Communicator EXT automatically recalculates the Full Scale Voltages Currents and Power every time the CT and PT ratios change Frequenc
114. 439 PM Weekly Day of week Friday Time 20625 PM W7 200t 4625 PM Dody Teme 15 58 Pu NON MISSOPM WYM 21S59 M Monty try data Date 1 Tana I5053PM TORON 35053PM Dady Tima 42259 PM 452001 42259PM A4200 42209 PM Weekly Day ot week Sunday Time 34153 PM 3 9200 24159 PM Dady Time 40025 PM D500 40025PM 842001 401 14 Doody Tine 41526 PM 35 200 41526PM 9 42001 41529 PM Dady Time 40046 PM ASO 40045 FM MY20 ADSI PM ROM 4002 Pu coi 40077 PM werent shatus ARID 43050 PM Scheduler runmeg LIIW 431 275 PM Scheduler stopped ATUTI 431 27 PM Scheduler a rurmeny SCHEDULER gt On the main Scheduler screen click Add Script in the Scheduler section of the screen The following screen will appear Scheduler Available Scripts for Scheduler 002 New script 2 i Schedule Frequency Date Time 11 00 01 AM gt To add a script to the Scheduler select an Available Script from the pull down menu By changing the Frequency you can create additional versions of the script and add the updated version s to the Scheduler 14 21 ADD SCRIPTS TO THE SCHEDULER 14 22 CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM gt Inthe Schedule section of the screen use the pull down menu to select the desired Frequency Select from Yearly Once Interval Daily Weekly Monthly by Date Monthly by Day or Last Day of the Month Based on the desired frequency the screen will change to offer the following selections
115. 50 or Port 3 9800 to configure the network parameters and add a network connection The meter must be configured to use Modbus TCP Modbus TCP is the common protocol used for Modbus communication over a network J The Gateway operates as a Modbus RTU Master with programmable Baud Rate up to 115200 NOTE gt Click the Connection Manager icon or select Connection gt Connection Manager The example screen appears Connection Manager List of Locations Connected to Location 2 Select the New Location listing in the Locations field Your selection will be highlighted gt Click the Edit button The Location Editor screen appears displaying the computer s communication settings Enter a Location Name in the field at the top of the screen if desired 6 6 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SOFTWARE CONNECTION gt Click on the Network button The screen will change to the following Connection Manager Location Editor d E ELO E CA Substation 1 Serial Port 9 Network gi Use Data Switch String s Host Devices At Location gt Enter a Computer s IP Address in the Host field gt Inthe Network Port field enter 502 assigned port for Modbus TCP gt To add or remove devices from the network click Add or Remove gt Ifyou are adding a device click Edit to change the device Name Address and or Description The following screen will appear Co
116. 6 12 Alarm Polling Options Option ID Option Name Description Limits exceeded Any limit condition exceeded for the 32 EPM limit channels Inputs abnormal condition Any internal digital input abnormal condition Waveform captured When EPM captures a waveform PQ CBEMA event captured When EPM captures a PQ event Control Output changed When any relay modules connected to meter changes state Communication Failure Network card has difficulty talking to EPM Meter Configure Alarm Polling for more individual devices Edit the poll_profile xml file for each device s section Configure the parameters lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt lt DEVICE_x gt lt item DEV POLL ALARM DEV_ALARM OPTIONS gt lt item gt lt DEVICE_x gt lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt Common Problem If you entered a name for the SMTP Server instead of an IP Address make sure your DNS Server is working and you have either set a DSP IP inside the meter or your DNS can supply a DNS IP Otherwise if it cannot resolve the name to an IP translation no email will be sent Stored Emails User can access the stored_emails htm page from any internet browser The last 10 emails sent will be stored in the RAM on a FIFO basis First In First Out and will be displayed in descending order The page will be cleared after a complete system restart 6 42 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION M
117. 8 35 DATABASE STATUS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 13 Database Status The Database Status screen provides statistical information about the selected logis gt Click on the Database button or View Data gt Database Status The following screen appears 00121589 00121683 Carera sies 1 A aA L AAN T N VILDU Bytes TATOOS 233 21 Pu NIRA 1217 4 PU Dn os OWT Acted ENSTI EO Festres Fen se Lent bee hbn of ns Humber of Reo TAM 7 27 2008 Na A partial download consists of the newest records and captures appended to the existing records in the log database The snapshot must be a timeframe within the database dates otherwise there is no data from which to retrieve the snapshot To copy the data to the computer s clipboard gt Right click with the cursor positioned anywhere in the table gt To return to Log Viewer s main screen click Back 8 36 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS AIREPORTS 8 14 AiReports AiReports 2 0 is an optional power quality analysis software package used in conjunction with GE Communicator EXT Logs It provides a comprehensive report on the status of the equipment being monitored and it uses artificial intelligence to diagnose PQ events and provide the possible cause of the event The screen below is an example of one of the screens Most Severe Events The following page describes the most severe power event recorded during this survey The c
118. 85 INTERNAL MODEM OPTION CONNECTION CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 4 3 Adding a Location gt Click on the Add button The Location Editor screen appears displaying the computer s communications settings and the location name New Location ection Manager List of Locations Connected to Location gt Enter your Location Name in the Location Name field at the top of the screen replacing New Location Connection Manager Location Editor Location Name 9 Serial Port Network gi Use Data Switch String s Com Port Devices At Location 2 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 4 4 Handling Multiple Locations RS 485 INTERNAL MODEM OPTION CONNECTION If you already have several locations on your List of Locations gt gt gt gt To add additional locations click on the Add Button To sort locations use the pull down menu to select a sort method A to Z Z to A Newest gt Oldest or Oldest gt Newest and click Sort By To remove locations select and click Remove Click once on the location to which you would like to connect your computer You may only connect to one location at a time To change to a different location you must first disconnect from the current location by clicking on the Disconnect button or by selecting Disconnect from the Connection menu Choose your new location Click Connect The computer begins dialing When
119. 9650 Meter Secondary Current 5 5amps for EPM 9650 1 Ph kW Full Load Loss Watts 3 040 1013 33 1 01 Phase to Phase Phase to Grd Test Voltage 138000 79674 Full Load Current GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 13 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS B 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Appendix C GE Communicator EXT 11110001001101 010101110010 Command Line 011 i Arguments V 1 11 C 1 Script Command Line Methods Tells GE Communicator EXT to perform a task corresponding to the Script ID Number snnnn Script ID Number Example CommExt s1234 s Script ID Number uc Start Log Converter ODo not start log converter 1 Start log converter If left out of command line Start Log Converter assumed Example Commext with Script 1234 will Start Log Converter if Log Retrieval is in the script Commext s1234 uc 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL APPLICATION COMMAND LINE METHODS CHAPTER C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS V 1 11 C 2 Application Command Line Methods Tells GE Communicator EXT to make a connection and display a particular application screen c additional arguments with a space between each argument Example 1 Meter with address 2 on network with IP address
120. ANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS FTP SERVER 6 7 FTP Server A built in FTP Server is available for INP100 It has a 3 user limit three users can connect to the FTP Server simultaneously The FTP Server logon User Name and Password are stored in the INP100 card not in the meter s programmable settings The Initial FTP Server User Name and Password are GE Multilinnet and inp100 The FTP Server s quota is 4Meg RAM To change the Initial FTP User Name and Password switch to INP100 s boot mode and change the Initial Settings See section 6 9 To copy a file into the FTP Server simply copy the file and paste it into the Server If there is a file with the same file name in the Server you must delete the existing file first then copy and paste the new file If the memory quota is filled before a new file is completely copied into the FTP Server that file will be deleted and an error will be sent to the FTP Client Since poll_profile xml and poll_data xml file sizes can be dynamic it s preferable to have some reserved space in the FTP Server for those files Example After a test run if poll_data xml is approximately 1kB you should reserve at least 4kB for those files The ratio is about 1 to 4 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 43 UPDATE NETWORK CARD FIRMWARE FROM A BROWSER IN RUNTIME MODE ONLY CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 8 Update Network Card Firmware from a Browser in Runtime Mode ONLY Ne
121. AR e Subtract from Watts and VAR Enhanced E 9650 Units have additional choices and firmware to support the additional A features A warning may appear if you DO NOT have an Enhanced Unit NOTE Warning The last Watt VAR Combinations are only available if you have an Enhanced Unit or the DSP Firmware Version is greater than 212 Check with Technical Support if you have VENEN a question gt When all settings are complete click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 33 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 4 5 Transformer Loss Compensation for Enhanced Units gt Ifyou have an Enhanced E 9650 Unit double click on any loss value LWFE etc Asimilar Transformer Loss Compensation screen appears but with additional calculation choices Device Profile Transformer and Line Loss Compensation Percent Loss of Watts Due to Iron 000 Percent Loss of VARS Due to Iron Due to Copper a Add to Watts and Subtract from VAR Transformer and Line Loss Applies to Both Watts and Watts x OK Trc Coicuietor ff Cancel ff teie gt Click on TLC Calculator to find the values to enter into the Percent Loss windows The Calculator button will launch an Excel Spreadsheet which will do t
122. ATION sssssssssssssssssssesssscssssssscssscssscssscssscssecssscsseesseesseesseesseeseseesees ADDING A LOCATION eseesssesssseessesesses HANDLING MULTIPLE LOCATIONS ADDING NEW DEVICES METERS AT ONE LOCATION TROUBLESHOOTING TTHE CONNECTION wessssessssesssssssssescssecsssscssssscsssessssecsssccssssesseeeessseesees CHANGING THE PRIMARY DEVICE secnssiesssssisnicecnnssnienrons abi emeseaiemnnramainenceies DISCONNECTING FROM A GE METER DE E E E a E a O ERVEN aana a a nyt eenetarrsrerrevoy eee se rvetter ost RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES cos sss ses czscbpnssnurtausla de tennin nn a Jsa USING THE REPORT PAGE GENERALE SETTINGS arcus EET GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS CT AND PT RATIOS AND SYSTEM HOOKUP sssesssesssesssesssecsssssssesssesssessecsssessecsssessseesss ONE AMP CURRENT INPUT ADDENDUM MODIFICATION NUMBER M10 0 e LIMIT AND WAVEFORM FULL SCALES o cecscesssssssssessssesesssosescsesesesesesesesesesesesesesessnssenseanses MME S ETING SE eent AEAEE AEE AOAO COMMUNICATION S iongan an nnn eana ann e DNP CUSTOM CLASS MAP CUSTOM MODBUS MAP REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS 7 DEMAND INTEGRATION INTERVALS oessssessssessssessssescsseesesseesssecssssesssesessessssecsssecessseesseessseeess TERNAL KYZ OUTPUTS AND TEST LED SETTINGS occesscssssssessssssssscssssessssseeesssseeesssees EXTERNAL DISPLAY OPTIONS cs cccoisesdudedccssc
123. Amps kW KVAR PF kVA Freq kWh kVAh KVARh V Switch 4 V4 Volts Amps kW KVAR PF kVA Freq kWh kVAh KVARh THD Monitoring and Limit Exceeded Alarms To change the V Switch follow these simple steps gt Install GE Communicator EXT 3 0 on your PC gt Set up the EPM 6000 to communicate with your computer power up your meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 13 CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER gt Log on to GE Communicator EXT 3 0 software gt Click on the Profile icon The SETTINGS screen appears gt Click CHANGE V SWITCH Asmall screen appears that requests a code t Change Switch To change the V Switch contact your vendor to purchase an encrypted key Be ready with the V Switch number you wish to change to and the serial number of your EPM 6000 meter The serial number can be found in device status under the tools menu If you already have the encrypted key enter the key below Then click ok to change the V Switch gt Enter the code which GE provides The V Switch will be changed automatically and the meter will restart How to get a V Switch V Switches are based on the particular serial number of the ordered meter To obtain a higher V Switch you need to provide GE with the following information 1 Serial Number or Numbers of the meters for which you desire an upgrade 2 Desired V Switch Upgrade 3 Credit
124. CT Ratio 1000 1 Meter M10 0 One Amp CT Ratio 1000 5 The CT Ratio screen shows the correct input for the typical one amp user 3 10 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS PLEASE NOTE This adjustment is for EPM 9450 Hardware Rev A ONLY Device Profile CT and d PT Ratios CT Ratio _ PT Ratio Line to Neutral Priman Pnmar SA r Voltage 300 Volt Option Only a ational Frequency Range 20Hz to 65Hz 5 y Even though the software is configured from 1000 5 it is actually displaying current from NOTE CT 3 3 3 Limit and Waveform Full Scales GE COMMUNICATOR EXT All Limit and Waveform settings sections 3 10 and 3 14 respectively are based on a percentage of the Full Scale Full Scales are based on the CT and PT ratios see see section 3 3 Be sure to set the CT and PT ratios first GE Communicator EXT automatically recalculates the Full Scales every time the CT and PT ratios change and should be verified every time CT and PT Ratios are changed NOTE Changing the CT and PT Ratios Resets the meter clearing Logs and stored data This action prepares the meter for placement in a new installation or change of the Instrument Transformers 1000 1 amps If you are not concerned with maximum accuracy you can use the standard Meter without specially ordering the M10 0 option to display readings from a O to 1 amp INSTRUCTION MANUAL
125. Chet on the Update Gun time Firmware burton to continas Please note the update process could take several minutes Drowte Update Runtine Vemware elim DE Loc traet gt Click the Browse button to select the correct runtime firmware file gt Click on the Update Run Time Firmware button to continue The whole process can take several minutes Make sure that during the process you do not close the Update Run Time Firmware screen or update1 htm browser window During the update process the INP100 Update Run Time Firmware Status screen appears It displays the current status of the update gt If the update is successful restart the connected meter Restart one of two ways gt Go to reset_ethernet htm Click on Restart gt Power down up the connected meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 45 UPDATE NETWORK CARD FIRMWARE FROM GE COMMUNICATOR EXT CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 9 Update Network Card Firmware from GE Communicator EXT NOTE v NOTE 6 46 Using this screen is the ONLY way to change the Boot Firmware and Username and Password Changes are easy with this screen Usage is the same for all meters Connections are different While you are on this screen the Network Card is in BOOT MODE Changes made here DO NOT modify the meter s Device Profile gt Using an RS 232 RS 485 converter connect your computer to the EPM 9800 Port 1 Port 1 is RS 485 so an RS 232 RS 485 Conv
126. DNP3 Specification Volume 7 Networking according to the Version 2 0 Draft E of March 12 2004 The official DNP 3 0 specifications can be found at www dnp org Table 6 3 DNP Parameters Name Settings Notes DNP Over TCP Enabled If set to Enabled network card will receive DNP Disabled over TCP requests DNP Over TCP 20000 TCP Listening Port Listen on Port User Defined DNP over UDP Enabled If set to Enabled network card will receive DNP Disabled over UDP requests DNP Over UDP 20000 UDP Listening Port Listen on Port User Defined UDP Respond to Client Port If set to Client Port UDP response will be sent User Defined to the UDP Request Port Otherwise UDP Response will be sent to a user defined port number Default is fixed at 20000 UDP Addressing Unicast If set to Unicast amp Broadcast all UDP requests Broadcast are accepted If set to Unicast network card will check to see Unicast amp if the UDP Destination Address matches the Broadcast meter s IP Address If set to Broadcast network card will check to see if the UDP Destination Address is 255 255 255 255 If no match the UDP connection is refused Validate Sources Validation If set to Disabled network card will not perform IPs Disabled validation on any incoming IP Addresses 1 IP Address If set to 1 to 4 network card will perform validations on every IP Address defined by user 2 to 4IP Addresses GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MA
127. Downloads button gt Copy the new firmware upgrade file to a directory on your computer The Internal Modem firmware upgrade is a single file gt Be sure to read the text file accompanying the firmware files for important information such as the Checksum Code Write down the Checksum Code You will need to verify it later in the Flash Upgrade process The Checksum Code consists only of the digits 0 9 and the letters A F The checksum will 1 7 never contain the letters O or which are often confused for zeros and ones NOTE Connect to the GE Meter gt From the Tools Menu select Flash Me If the Password Feature is Enabled the following Password screen appears Enter Password The Password is the number 2 12 16 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL MODEM CARD gt Enter 2 and click OK The Internal Modem Flash Programmer screen appears Enter Command Mode is highlighted Internal Modem Flash Programmer 3 Program Flash gt Click on Enter Command Mode In the Status windows the words Entering Command Mode and Sending Escape Sequence will appear Then In Command Mode appears on the screen Internal Hetwork Option Flash Programmer pa Enter Command Mode Program Flash gt Click on Program Flash The following screen appears 2x R102 hex Desbtop a My Docum
128. E 9 8 CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE gt Double click on one of the fifteen minute blocks in the schedule The following screen appears Set schedule s registers Schedule 1 Weekday Register Name gt From the pull down menu select the Register Name you would like to apply to this fifteen minute block gt Click OK gt Repeat the above procedure until all fifteen minute blocks in the schedule s are assigned registers gt gt When all schedules are formatted click OK to return to the main Edit Calendar screen gt Click on Calendar Assignments The following screen appears Time of Use Profile January 2006 ee Prev lt lt Month j Weekday Weekend S3 Holiday No schedule name s5 No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name s13 No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name No schedule name The schedules created in steps 16 21 are shown beneath the calendar Each schedule is color coded GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE gt Assign a particular Schedule to each day by clicking on the day The following screen appears Assign a schedule to a date Current Date Schedule Schedules Sil Weekday gt From the pull down menu select the Schedule you wou
129. ECIAL is set to 6 1 Default D_TAG_SPECIAL Cross linked multiplier ID for Generic Modbus device Setting is any unique D_UID s setting within polling profile D_MASKING_TYPE Data masking type for Generic Modbus device 0 do nothing default 1 NOT 2 OR 3 AND 4 NOR 5 NAND 6 XOR 7 XNOR GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Table 6 11 Data Element Attributes Attribute Description Settings D_MASKING_VALUE Data masking value for Generic Modbus device setting is hex ASCII string for up to 8 bytes of data 0x0 default Example of a 3 byte value OxAB12CD D_CFG_FILE Configuration file name for Generic Modbus device Case sensitive file name up to 128 characters the file must be available at system start up using FTP download D_VALUE Va po ue processed by Total Web Solutions and stored in _data xml file D_REF po po Reference info or value for led item stored in _data xml file Data source is the configuration file 3 Values for Generic Modbus D_TYPE ware 1 ASCII string 2 1 byte signed high byte of the Modbus Register 3 1 byte signed low byte of the Modbus Register Parent device ID DEV_PARENT for polling expansion beyond the 64 items per device limitation If set it will use the parent device s communication settings
130. EDULER PROGRAM gt Enter the following selections e Phone Number Type in Phone Number e Setup String Type in Data Strings if needed New Connection Type Ethernet To add edit or delete devices gt Click Devices button To add edit or delete commands gt Cick Commands button To exit the screen and return to the main screen gt Click Close Choosing a port The script opens and closes a PC communication port creates a log and r creates a database for the script When you run the Scheduler if the port your script is using is already open i e being used by a different program the script s command will fail 14 10 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM DEVICES 14 6 Devices This screen lists the current devices for a particular script Columns shown include the device s number or identification the device s unique address the device type and the device s unique name 1 EPM9000Series Device COMPort Modbus ASCII e You can enter up to 256 devices for each script The Add Edit and Delete buttons on this screen facilitate the adding of new devices and the editing and deleting of current devices e You must set up an address protocol device type and a unique name for each device Optional settings for each device are passwords for an EPM9450 9650 or 9800 device When GE Communicator EXT retrieves a log from a device and it does not ha
131. ENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 4 6 Transformer Line Loss Compensation gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Transformer Line Loss Compensation or double click on the Transformer Line Loss Compensation line The following submenu appears Enabled Disabled LWFE 0 000 LVFE 0 000 LWOU 0 000 LYCU 0 000 Apply Both Watts amp Watts Add to Watts and Subtract from VAR This screen displays the current values for the meter s Transformer Loss Compensation LWFE Percent Loss of Watts due to Iron LVFE Percent Loss of Vars due to Iron LWCU Percent Loss of Watts due to Copper LVCU Percent Loss of Vars due to Copper gt Consult Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT Guide on Transformer Loss Compensation in the appendix pages of this manual Double click on any of the loss values LWFE etc The Transformer and Line Loss Compensation screen appears see next page Click on TLC Calculator to find the values to enter into the Percent Loss windows The Calculator button will launch an Excel Spreadsheet which will do the calculations for you once the required data is entered A copy of the Excel Spreadsheet with example numbers is in Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT Guide GE Communicator EXT will automatically launch the Excel Spreadsheet as part of its A software package But for the TLC Button to
132. FM Aca 40159 ANTI 43050 PM Scheduler runing 4202007 AV 25 PM Scheduler stopped ATUTI AI 27 PM Scheduler a rurmeng To delete a script that is currently running on the Scheduler gt Stop the Scheduler gt Select a script from the Active Scripts window by clicking on it gt Click Delete Script A warning window will appear Script Scheduler v3 0 15 gt Click Yes The script will be deleted immediately from the Active Scripts window and you will return to the main Scheduler screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 25 STATUS 14 16 Status 14 26 CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM AOO Ph Soh Py D1SG9eM boned 35053 Fu 952001 42259Pa4 9 4 2001 423 09 New script Weebly Day ot week Sunday Time 34153 PM 9 9 2001 26153 PM New script Dady Time 40025 PM A500 46025Pm MADII 401 14 Mew script Daly Tine 41526 PM ISO 41526Fe 42001 415 29M 352001 400 45 PM Rabi 40159 01 40022 Pu Currant shatus AEDO 43050 PM Scheduler s unaa AIUTI 471 25 PM Scheduler stopped ATUTI AN 27 PM Scheduler a nanny SCHEOULER The Current Status window on the Scheduler screen displays entries in the EPM Scheduler Log It shows the date time in minutes and seconds and the status or action performed The EPM Scheduler Log records all the activities for the GE Script amp Scheduler program gt To view the entire Scheduler Log click the View Log button The Scheduler Run Time Status Log screen will ap
133. Flash has been Programmed as below memal ietwortk Option Flash Programmer status The Flash has been programmed Enter Command Mode Program Flash Boot Version mware Version Current Mode gt Click Exit to exit the program and return to the Main screen 12 21 FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING 12 22 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 oe 000111010110110 peparen Chapter 13 Energy Billing Module 010101110010 011 1 13 1 Overview 13 1 1 Managing Your Load Profile Your monthly electric bill is composed of your total energy usage kWh plus your maximum demand kW during the billing period Maximum demand a k a peak demand can represent 30 to 60 of your total energy cost Managing your load profile is the key to reducing your costs reducing your peak demand even without changing your total usage lowers your costs The optimal load profile would be flat with minimum demand at constant usage But a flat load profile is not possible in industrial and commercial environments because of the variation and number of loads in the system However there are steps you can take to control those variations and ultimately reduce costs The steps are listed below e Collect historical and real time energy data e Use graphical tools to calculate and analyze the data e
134. GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin Wiha Ey a mmunicator METER SETUP AND DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE Instruction Manual GE Communicator EXT revision 1 0x GE publication code GEK 113307 Manual Part Number 1601 9020 Copyright 2007 GE Multilin GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham Ontario Canada L6E 183 Tel 905 294 6222 Fax 905 201 2098 Internet http www GEmultilin com GE Multilin s Quality Management System is registered to IS09001 2000 QMI 005094 UL A3775 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 2 CONNECTING TO AGE METER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents WEN REDUREMENT S emer neon Ute ee eer NAE INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT SOFTWARE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BASIC SCREEN ELEMENTS MENU BAR ICONS sesesssssssssssessccsssscccssccesssecsssecessssssssee COMPUTER STATUS BAR MODEM cissassssssessssssssssssssssssssscsssssssesccssssssesessssssesssssssseseesssssseees COMPUTER STATUS BAR NETWORK csscsssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssescsssssseessssssseessssssseseesssssseess HIELP MENU isceceuciih ssssctetversteds ii i EGA Me cxts nts fel Aas needle SOFTWARE LICENSE srant anran A NAAA FEATURE COMPARISON FOR ADVANCED MODELS s ccccsssisseensstunaceessseosencdecsesssicennsins OPTIONS ssmncadcemnemenaudnanenaamnepanccanme RN ERE te apache tess sistas oxen tar cerecaesd ass usearees tease eae aoe DIRECT
135. G_VALUE can be a numeric value or text string up to 256 characters to be used for comparison CFG_REF is any interpreted value or text string when the comparison returned a match up to 256 characters for a text string D_REF is the corresponding value in the poll_data xml file Order of Data Processing for Generic Modbus Device The steps in data processing are as follows gt Set byte order gt Apply bit masking gt Apply multiplying factor gt Apply interpreted values from generic file s 6 6 3 Configuring WebReacher Through the configuration of poll_profile xml you can poll up to 8 individual devices or up to 512 unique items via Modbus RTU protocol or Modbus TCP protocol Devices supported Any device that supports Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP protocol with at least one available socket Devices supported for Advanced Features EPM 9450 9650 and EPM 9800 Use Generic Modbus device settings for EPM 4000 5000 6000 7000 meters System set up Set DATA_POLL_DELAY in milliseconds the system will pause between each Modbus poll Set SYSTEM_COMM_TIMEOUT in milliseconds Example lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt lt GE_Multilin_ SYSTEM gt lt item DATA POLL DELAY 400 SYSTEM COMM TIMEOUT 500 gt lt Item gt lt GE Multilin_ SYSTEM gt lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt Device Set up within the boundary of lt DEVICE_X gt and lt DEVICE_X gt gt gt gt Assign a device type DEV_TYPE
136. Graph button 8 28 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS To export an i To export the To view detail To view detail VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS mage from the screen gt Click the Export Picture button data only gt Click the Export Data button s of one of the Waveform graphs gt Double click on the desired graph s for this waveform gt Click on the Waveform Details On button The following screen appears RMS 0 10 KFac NA Masan Erio rrom ouch if adoba Franettaber Det TYC Mow t_ Eate Photoshop Qomus Dt Pures fist Wevetoren 012160 ESR sum To return to the previous graph gt Click Back or click Waveform Details Off To zoom in on a portion of the graph gt Draw a box around the desired area by dragging the mouse and holding down the left button gt Release the mouse button to active the zoom To zoom out on a portion of the graph GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt Click the Zoom Out button to decrease the resolution VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 10 1 Interharmonic Analysis A new feature has been added to the Log Viewer program for Interharmonic Analysis It is only available for advanced meters on Voltage Va Vg Vc and Current channels la Ip Ic IEC 1000 2 1 1 defines Interharmonics as follows Between the harmonics of the power frequency voltage and current further freque
137. IFY JAVASCRIPT CHAPTER F APPLICATION NOTES F 2 Modify JavaScript Using the default files supplied by INP100 102 Network Options as templates the user should modify the JavaScript code for all web pages using the sample below The sample portion of JavaScript code is for demonstation purposes only You must insert your own code where needed lt script language Javascript gt insert your own code here Define multiple XML DOM Documents objects var xmlDoc_ Meter _1 new ActiveXObject MSXML DomDocument var xmlDoc_ Meter 2 new ActiveXObject MSXML DomDocument var xmlDoc_Meter_l async true var xmlDoc_ Meter _1 onreadystatechange do get data Meter 1 var xmlDoc_Meter_2 async true var xmlDoc Meter 2 onreadystatechange do get data Meter 2 function name start process should be placed in web page s lt body gt tag such as lt body onLoad start_process gt function start_process do_get_xml Meter _1 do_get_xml Meter _1 Load each poll data xml file from different locations into an XML DOM Document objects function do_get_xml Meter _1 xmlDoc_Meter_1 load http 192 168 1 2 poll_data xml function do_get_xml Meter 2 xmlDoc_Meter_1 load http 192 168 7 8 poll_data xml functions to read parse and display data from each XML file function do get data Meter 1 insert yo
138. ING LOGS gt Click the selected day and use the slide at the bottom of the screen to select a time gt Click OK gt To select a range of hours days months or years only click the appropriate radio button and the counter menu beside it gt To return to the main screen click OK The time range you selected is displayed above the button After you have loaded the log file s selected data points and chosen a time range you may begin viewing the data The following sections detail the different viewing formats for each type of log 8 10 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING HISTORICAL TRENDS AND SNAPSHOTS 8 5 Viewing Historical Trends and Snapshots gt From Log Viewer s main screen click on the Historical Trends button or View Data gt Snapshots Log Viewer will display Snapshot Information for the selected log file s based on the time range and data points specified in the Select Data and Time Range windows of the main screen section 8 4 ime Raege QUIZES Utt Veh UUIEINSY 0 16 YAR 121609 hst Ven ODIZIGEF bat YLA The name of the log file Feeder 1 in this example and the type of data point are listed in the top row The viewer can move columns so that the most important data is most accessible gt Right click on the column title and drag it to the desired location on the table Repeat as desired to customize the table gt To save the da
139. ITY THROUGH METER METHOD 10 16 Locator Utility Through Meter Method Use this utility if you do not have accesses to an I O module s reset button otherwise use the Query I O function The Through Meter Locator Utility searches each address in succession only at the baud rate at which the computer and the EPM Meter are connected fi The Locator Utility Stand Alone Locator method section 11 16 allows you to search for A an I O s address and baud rate without a EPM Meter by connecting the I O directly to the a computer gt Connect the module to the EPM Meter at Port 4 gt Establish a connection between the computer and the EPM Meter The baud rate at which the computer and the EPM Meter are connected is the baud rate that Locator will use to search for the I O s address gt From the I O Devices menu select Locator Utility gt Through EPM The following screen appears Through Device Locator Start Address End Address Nexus Port Pora Device Type Address gt Set the Address range for the search GE Communicator EXT will begin at the start address searching every address up to and including the End Address Set the Address range as small as possible to limit the time of the search gt Click the Start button to begin the search GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 25 LOCATOR UTILITY THROUGH METER METHOD CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES Device Locator lists any device it finds
140. LOGS 8 15 PQDIF Converter The latest release of AiReports includes a new useful feature PQDIF Converter Power Quality Data Interchange Format PQDIF is a tagged compressible binary file format which offers a platform neutral flexible means of exchanging power quality data between instruments and data management and analysis software PQDIF is currently under adoption by EPRI as the standard file format for power quality data and under consideration by IEEE as its standard file format Using the PQDIF Export Feature with Log Viewer System Requirements Installation of AiReports with NEXAIPWR DII file version 2 1 0 8 or higher PQDIF Viewer Program optional Meters Supported EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 Operation gt Use the Meter 1 button select a DB file with waveform data gt Select a Time Range gt Press the PQDIF Format button gt gt Select a PQDIF file name PQD to which you will export data gt Click OK PQDIF exports the waveform data and converts it to PQDIF format 8 38 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS COMTRADE CONVERTER 8 16 COMTRADE Converter The latest release of AiReports includes a new useful feature COMTRADE Converter Common Format for Transient Data Exchange COMTRADE is a standard that defines a format for the files containing transient waveform and event data collected from power systems or power system models The format is intended to provide an easily in
141. Logs see section 4 6 1 See Chapter 8 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide for how to view logs gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Trending Setup or double click on the Trending Setup line The following submenu appears Log 1 Log gt To change the settings for Log 1 double click on Log 1 To change the settings for Log 2 click on Log 2 The Snapshot Channel Assignment Log 1 or 2 screen appears 4 54 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER TRENDING PROFILE SETTINGS AND LOAD PROFILE RECORDING Fifty Millsecond Updated Voltage A B Fifty Milisecond Updated Voltage B C Fifty Millisecond Updated Voltage C A Total bytes used 3 Estimated Log Timespan 7 Bytes re 3 T Total Records 9 EE a EA CEN EA Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application gt Type Using pull down menu select the type of snapshot gt Channel Using pull down menu select a channel for the snapshot gt Click on Add to include the selections in the Log click on Remove to delete gt To Remove multiple items hold Control while clicking items to be removed and click Remove gt To Remove a range of items click the first item hold Shift then click the last item then click Remove gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt Click on the Update Device button
142. MAT_1 to FORMAT_8 enter the format name as either short or long within the double quotes A section of a poll_profile xml file is shown below without values entered lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt lt GE_Multilin_ SYSTEM gt lt item EMAIL 1 FORMAT 1 EMAIL 2 FORMAT 2 EMAIL 3 FORMAT 3 EMAIL 4 FORMAT 4 EMAIL 5 FORMAT 5 EMAIL 6 FORMAT 6 EMAIL 7 FORMAT 7 EMAIL 8 FORMAT 8 gt lt item gt lt GE Multilin_SYSTEM gt lt GE_Multilin POLL DATA gt Short Format For all handheld mobile devices with text messaging service capable of receiving up to 160 characters Character number includes sender address subject and body plus additional separator characters This format is defined by GE Multilin and the user cannot modify it Example of the Short Format 64 characters of sender s email address 32 characters of Meter ID Alarm 10digit operator s phone number 1IDs1 2 3 44 5 6 7 84 94 104 114 12 134 144 15 16 Long Format For all handheld mobile devices and PC users who can receive regular email This includes detailed alarm information Example of Long Format GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS Device Name Meter Demo 1 Contact Person Administrator Contact Phone 1234567890 Alarm IDs 1 2 3 4 Alarm Names 1 Limits changed 2 Inputs changed 3 Waveform captured 4 PQ CBEMA
143. MMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Chapter 6 Total Web Solutions 010101110010 011 1 6 1 Overview The 10 100BaseT Ethernet Option INP100 for GE s EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 Meters a fully customizable web server provides access to real time data via Internet Explorer GE s name for this dynamic system is Total Web Solutions This is an open design that enables you to communicate with any device via a variety of open protocols The system incorporates a highly programmable network card with built in memory installed in 10 100BaseT Option meters Each card can be programmed to perform an extensive array of monitoring functions y The EPM meter with the INP10 Option does not support Total Web Solutions NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 2 System Components The components of the Total Web Solutions system are detailed below Each component adds special features to this fully configurable system For Flow Charts of the components see 6 10 to 6 12 WebExplorer This component uses your Web Browser to provide you with direct access to all power data Using your browser you can access any data file and because it looks like a standard HTML web page to an IT department the data transmits through corporate firewalls This fully configurab
144. MMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL OPTIONS CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 Log Retrieval gt Click the first box on this screen to keep a log from being updated while it is being retrieved gt Click the second box to disable Backup of the retrieved log file gt Click the third box to enable the software to insert missing records from when meter is not in Normal Operation Mode and therefore not recording with value of 0 for each log retrieval process Energy Billing Module gt Click the box on this screen to enable the Energy Billing Module The Energy Billing Module can help you manage your Load Profile See Chapter 14 Miscellaneous gt Click the box on this screen to enable the Kh Ke Test Pulse Calculation screen Set the Ethernet Packet Delay in milliseconds Some systems may require a longer delay if they are slow gt Make any adjustments using the Browse buttons V Click Apply to execute the changes gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 1 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 2 1 Overview v NOTE v NOTE GE Communicator EXT Chapter 2 Connecting to a GE Meter There are six ways to connect to a GE Meter e RS 232 Direct Connect section 2 2 e RS 485 Direct Connect section 2 2 e RS 232 Modem Conn
145. MODULE 13 9 Demand Statistics The Demand Statistics screen displays statistical energy data for the time period you selected gt Click the Demand Statistics tab in the Demand Graph screen The Demand Statistics screen appears Energy Billing Module GE Multilin rreren data avalat from 5 14 2002 to 6 2 2002 Select Parameters gt Enter a Start Date End Date and Select a meter Peak Time Range is your Utility Time Structure setup Example Your utility has the following setup On Peak 7 00am 6 00pm Off Peak 6 00pm 7 00am To retrieve statistics for that setup Select the following gt Select On Peak from 7 00 to 18 00 in Range 1 and N A s in Range 2 gt Since no Mid Peak is given select Mid Peak from 6 00 to 6 00 in Range 1 and 18 00 to 18 00 in Range 2 gt Select Off Peak from 18 00 to 0 00 in Range 1 and from 0 00 to 7 00 in Range 2 gt Click on Refresh Data to get statistical results Data will appear for each time period and for each day y DO NOT click anywhere on the spreadsheet while the system is in Calculation Mode NOTE 13 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE BILL VERIFICATION 13 10 Bill Verification The Bill Verification screen calculates and displays cost analysis results for a billing period you selected gt Click the Bill Verification tab in the Demand Graph screen The Bill Verification screen appears GE Mu
146. Meter From the Device Profile screen section 4 2 click on the button beside EN50160 Flicker or double click on the Flicker Settings line This screen appears EN50160 Flicker Short term test time PST ho Minutes Long term test time PLT feao Minutes Frequency feo e es Hee From the pull down menus select a Short Term test time and a Long Term test time Typical values for PST and PLT are 10 minutes and 120 minutes From the Frequency pull down menu select 50 or 60 Hz When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter Flicker is discussed in detail in Chapter 16 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 4 5 5 Squared T and V Squared T Thresholds With the Squared T and V Squared T Thresholds screen the user can set at what point the Current and Voltage should accumulate gt From the Device Profile screen section 4 2 click on the button beside Squared T and V Squared T or double click on the Squared T and V Squared T line This screen appears I Squared T and Squared T Thresholds 1 Squared T AAARRL pNYNr NmNmAaAaAA Accumulate when Current is above 5 000 O Amps VOTES scm TUM Ait
147. Meter connect an RS 485 cable to the group s available female RS 485 port Connect the other end of the cable to the EPM 9450 9650 Meter s Port 3 or 4 Port 4 ONLY for EPM 9800 You may combine different types of I O modules together in a group After all modules have been assigned a unique address and connected to the EPM Meter you must enter them in the EPM Meter s Device Profile See section 11 7 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 3 STEPS TO DETERMINE POWER NEEDED CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 4 Steps to Determine Power Needed e Available power for All Ports of the EPM 9450 9650 is 12 VA EPM 9800 does NOT support I O Modules a power supply is required e Refer to the table in the next section Section 11 5 to determine the VA Ratings for 1 0 modules and displays e Add together the VA Ratings for I Os and Displays in use e Compare Available Power to Power Needed See the Meters Installation and Operation Manuals for details 10 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES I O MODULES FACTORY SETTINGS AND VA RATINGS 10 5 1 0 Modules Factory Settings and VA Ratings All I Os are shipped pre programmed with a baud rate of 57600 and addresses The table below details the factory set address for each module and the VA Ratings for I O modules and displays Refer to the previous section section 11 4 for the steps to determine if you must use an additional power sour
148. Meters to which the computer is connected 5 2 3 Disconnect from a GE Meter To disconnect from a GE Meter or to disconnect from a location do one of the following gt Click on the Disconnect Icon me Poll Tools IJO Devices TOU Calendar Logs 1 amp amp nlog connect connect dis polling gt From the menu bar select Disconnect 98 GE Communicator File Connection Real Time Poll Tools I O Devices Connection Manager za Quick Connect disconnect gt Click on the Connection Manager icon or from the menu bar select Connection Manager gt Select the location from the List of Connections gt Click the Disconnect button 5 2 4 Change the Primary Device One copy of GE Communicator EXT connected to one or multiple GE Devices may only view data or Edit Device Profiles from one device at a time the Primary Device An exception is the Poll Multiple Devices screen see Chapter 7 for details 5 8 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION To change the Primary Device gt Select Connection gt Change Primary Device Address The following screen appears Change Device If you have multiple meters connected to GE Communicator EXT a window with a pull down menu appears gt Select the device you would like to designate as the Primary Device gt Click OK The Device Status screen reached by clicking on
149. Move by Sample box gt Click on the Forward or Reverse buttons each time you would like to view the next or previous sample To view a continuous sample by sample rendering of the graph gt Click the Move by Sample box and the Auto Show box gt Select a speed by sliding the Auto Show Speed bar left or right gt Click on the Forward or Reverse button to determine the direction of the Auto Show gt To stop Auto Show deselect the Auto Show box GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 15 VIEWING TRENDING AND DEMAND GRAPHS XY AND CIRCULAR CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS To print the graph on a color printer gt Check the Color Printout box gt Click Print To print the graph on a black and white printer gt Click the Use Symbols box gt Click Print To copy the graph data to the computer s clipboard gt Select Copy from the File menu gt Paste the data into a spread sheet such as Excel To export the graph s data gt Select Export Data from the File menu To change the graph s color assignments gt Select Select Colors from the Options menu The following screen appears XY Graph Color Assignments Foreground E E a a al E E Background SS Es eca ea The small squares under the Color heading represent the color currently assigned to each component of the graph To make adjustments to an item s color gt Click the radio button beside it gt Create a
150. NECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Table 6 2 INP102 Modem Commands Command Description 3 seconds pause Set the modem to User Command mode CM 3 seconds pause ONLINE lt CR gt Set the Modem to Passthrough mode E lt CR gt Command or querying modem s characteristic information Modem returns INP 102 Ethernet Modem MODEM lt CR gt Command for querying modem s ID PASSWORD lt CR gt If the Modem Password was enabled the modem will send this query to the user once the connection is established asking for a Password The user must enter the Correct Password before sending any other user data The user has 20 seconds to reply with a Password If there is no response from the user the modem will resend this command If the Password was incorrect the modem will resend this command The user can have 3 attempts to enter the Correct Password before the modem automatically disconnects FBOOT lt CR gt Command for querying modem s boot firmware version FRUN lt CR gt Command for querying modem s Runtime Firmware version More information about the modem operation ap When the Share the Phone Line option is set the modem should drop the connection in about 5 seconds assuming someone picked up the receiver and didn t hang up If the receiver was hung up quickly the connection will not drop When the Share the Phone Line option is not set the modem should not drop the conne
151. NUAL SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS NOTE Table 6 3 DNP Parameters Name Settings Notes Validate Source No If set to No network card will not perform Ports Yes validations on incoming TCP and UDP Ports for a given IP Address IP Addresses User Defined Up to 4 IP Addresses to validate Subnet Mask User Defined Masking bits applied to IP Address When defined properly user can specify validation on a single or a range of IP Address TCP Ports Start User Defined TCP Port Range to be validated and End UDP Ports Start User Defined UDP Port Range to be validated and End Settings in bold are default for Standard Mode GE s DNP 3 0 LAN WAN feature is available for certain EPM advanced meters with INP 100 102 Network Card Currently advanced power meters with INP 100 102 have this feature If a user chooses to use this feature the user has to configure the EPM meter s DNP Custom Classes Map in the meter s Device Profile See Chapter 4 of this manual for configuration screens and details Modes of Operation Disabled Feature is disabled No DNP 3 0 LAN WAN communication will be accepted Standard Feature is enabled Most communication parameters are fixed except the port number to which UDP packets respond Security features are not available Manual Feature is enabled All communication parameters are configurable Security features are availa
152. Numeric Min and Max for each axis In the Font screen to set the Fonts for the Graph I x General Plot Subsets Ass Font Cole Syl Main Title I bold I iaie I undetine Sub Tithe Times New Roman x F bold I ita ic I undedine Subset Port Avis Labels Arial v F bold I taic M undedine gt Select from the list of different font styles in Bold Italic or Underline for Main Title Sub Title Subset Point Axis Labels 8 26 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS In the Color screen to choose colors from Graph Attributes vanced Wavelorm Analysis Cotesia General Piot Subsets Ass Fort Color Stylo Graph Altebutes C Desk Foreground co ANNANN nA C Shadow Color comc E E C A C Graph Background amp Table Foreground f Table Background Lick core _teeh tee tera tioot Mac gt Select from the available colors for Desk Foreground and Background area surrounding graph Shadow Color Graph Foreground lines andpoints Graph Background Table Foreground and Background To select color Point Type and Line Type from a wide selection gt Use the Style screen vanced Wavelorm Analysis Customization General Plot Subsets Ass Font Coox Style UGBUBBUU Pont Type TE sd Line Type a Lok corcet aco He Oriona Epot Masimize To combine mul
153. OGGING CHAPTER 15 FLICKER 15 5 Logging The EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 meters are capable of logging Flicker values in an independent log When Flicker is on entries are made into the log in accordance with the times that associated values occur Pet Pot Max Pe Min Pi Py Max Pi Min Start Reset and Stop times are all recorded All values can be downloaded to the Log Viewer where they are available for graphing or export to another program such as Excel All Flicker values are predefined and cannot be changed 15 10 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 FLICKER POLLING 15 6 Polling The Pinste Pots Pot Max Po Min Pit Pie Max Pi Min values are all capable of being polled through the Communications Port Refer to the appropriate Modbus and DNP Mappings for register assignments and data definitions GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 11 LOG VIEWER CHAPTER 15 FLICKER 15 7 Log Viewer gt From the GE Communicator EXT Log Viewer screen using the menus at the top of the Log Viewer screen select a meter time ranges and values to access gt Select Flicker The values and the associated time stamps when the values occurred are displayed in a grid box Use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to create a graph or export the data to another program Max and Min values are only displayed they cannot be graphed But Max and Min values are available for export Graphed values include Pg and Py
154. OGS 8 7 Viewing Trending and Demand Graphs XY and Circular To display Trending or Demand data as either an XY or Circular graph NOTE Holding down the Ctrl key allows you to add or remove multiple items CX E VIEWING TRENDING AND DEMAND GRAPHS XY AND CIRCULAR gt Click on the Graph button in the main Log Viewer Historical Trend or Demand screen Pee eee upshot Typ UOTEIES Ute Veo YUITIENY U14 VARI Select Parameter to Graph Available tems Graph Items _Data Name Inst Van Inst Ven Inst la Inst Ib Inst Ic Inst VA Inst VAR Inst W Inst PF Inst PF Raw Scaled Energy 01234VAh interval Scaled Energy O12VARh interval Scaled Energy Q34VARh interval Scaled Energy Q1 4Wh interval Scaled Energy Q2JWh interval cancel Cicular Graph Bl xv Groph Fl Advanced Graph Hj Hein The Available Items column lists the data points that have been selected for the log file GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt To add a new data point return to Log Viewer s main screen and click on the Data Points button see section 8 4 VIEWING TRENDING AND DEMAND GRAPHS XY AND CIRCULAR CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS gt From the Available Items column click on the parameters you want to graph You can select up to six parameters gt Ifyou want to remove a parameter from the Graph Items list highlight it and click the Remove button gt Click the Add button The items will appear
155. OK to return to the main Device Profile screen VV VV For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter 4 52 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER TRENDING PROFILE SETTINGS AND LOAD PROFILE RECORDING 4 6 Trending Profile Settings and Load Profile Recording This section of the Device Profile enables you to set the Trending Profiles for historical logs gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Trending Profile Settings line This submenu appears amp Trending Log Time Intervals amp Trending Setup gt Double click on one of the Trending topics to access the programming screens Load Profile Recording Definition Load Profile Recording is a subset of the Meter s more general Logging and Trending capability The same screens are used for setup but Load Profile Recording only deals with Accumulated Values Energy Wh Reactive Energy VARh and Apparent Power VAh Historically Load Profile Recording referred to recording of Quadrant 1 Energy Wh because electromechanical meters only measured energy and were detented to prevent reverse rotation outside of Quadrant 1 4 6 1 Trending Log Time Intervals Trending Log Time Intervals determine the interval at which Historical Logs 1 and 2 will take a snapshot To set the parameters
156. OMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 3 Hardware Triggers gt To enable a Waveform or PQ recording for any of the 8 High Speed Inputs click in the appropriate box This will trigger a recording based on a contact trigger This is useful to monitor an open device and to capture the waveform during that operation 4 Samples per Cycle gt To choose the Samples per Cycle to be recorded at 60 Hz click on the Sampling Rate pull down menu gt Choose from 16 32 64 128 256 and 512 samples per cycle The number of samples per cycle you choose will inversely affect the number of cycles per capture e Ifyou select 256 a Capture Only pop up screen will ask you to select Volts A B C or I A B C e Ifyou select 512 a Capture Only pop up screen will ask you to select one of the individual channels As you increase the number of samples you will record more detailed information The Table below illustrates the Effects of Sampling Rate on the number of cycles captured Increasing the Sampling Rate increases Waveform Definition but reduces the length of the observed window The approximate length of the observed window is shown in the last column For example to observe events of approximately 1 2 Second a Sampling Rate of 32 Samples per Cycle or less should be used Table 4 3 Effects of Sampling Rates
157. ONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 3 Serial RS 232 RS 485 Modem Connections y For an RS 485 Internal Modem Option Connection see section 2 4 below NOTE Modem Connections Require Modbus ASCII Protocol The meter s communication port that you use for the modem connection must be configured to speak listen to Modbus ASCII and operate at either 9600 baud or match the speed of the remote modem Modbus RTU does not support modem communication If you use Modbus RTU to LA communicate with a modem it will fail or be unreliable NOTE 2 3 1 Before Setting the General Configuration gt Establish a direct RS 232 or RS 485 connection to the meter See section 2 2 gt After you have established a direct connection refer to Chapter 3 EPM 9450 9650 and Chapter 4 EPM 9800 for details on how to configure the meter s communication ports gt Set the port to Modbus ASCII at 9600 baud If you are connecting to multiple meters on a bus you must also assign a unique address to each meter see section 2 5 gt Install the modem connected to the computer the originate modem and the modem connected to the GE meter the remote modem See the Installation and Operation Manuals for the meter s in use for details of the hardware requirements 2 3 2 Atthe Remote Meter Site If you are using RS 232 communications without a Modem Manager gt Set the remote modem to operate at 9600 baud remote and originating g
158. Off Frequency 15 6 Base is the current operating frequency selected by the user 50 or 60 Hz Current is the real time frequency measurement of the applied voltage GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 FLICKER SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE e Base Voltage is the normalized voltage for the selected frequency 230 V for 50 Hz or 120 V for 60 Hz Flicker Monitoring gt Click on Stop to cause Flicker to stop being processed and freeze all the current values Stop Time is recorded and clears the current Max Min Values gt Click on Start to start Flicker processing Start Time is recorded gt Click on Reset to cause the Max Min values to be cleared and restart the Flicker P and Py timers Click OK to exit the Flicker screen Click Help for more information on this topic Instantaneous Readings gt Refer to the Instantaneous section of the Main screen above gt Ifyou are on the Short or Long Term screens click on the Instantaneous tab to display the Instantaneous screen The PU values Pinst for Voltage Inputs Va Vp and V are displayed here and are continuously updated The corresponding Current Voltage values for each channel are displayed for reference Short Term Readings gt Click on the Short Term tab to access the screen containing three groups of P readings Pt Readings Displayed e Current P values for Va Vp and Ve and the time of computation e Current Pet Max values for Vg Vp an
159. PTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 4 2 Poll Harmonics To view harmonics data for the currently connected device gt Select Poll Harmonics from the Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms menu The Harmonics screen appears Harmonics THD KFactor VoltsA Frequency _ Polling 00121689 Magnitude Angle Magnitude Angle Magnitude Angle g Values Spectrum Waveform gt To change the presentation format click on the Values Spectrum or Waveform buttons The screen above is in Values mode gt To change the channel use the pull down menu located beneath the Spectrum radio button Select from Volts A B C or Current I A B C Use the scroll bar at the right side of the screen to access all the values The EPM 9450 and 9650 poll harmonics to the 127th order gt Click Print to send the data to a printer gt Click Copy to send the contents of the screen to the clipboard gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 7 26 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS 7 4 3 Flicker To view Flicker data for the currently connected device gt Select Flicker from the Real Time Polling menu The Flicker screen appears th 50160 Picker Time StaryReset v PINSI Voltage Reading ET Current Nea PST Neat PLT tatus Frequency Vase Current Base Voltage Flicker Monitoring gt To view Short Term or
160. PUTER NAME DNS uu ccccesecsssssssssssssssessssssssssssssesessesssssssssssssesessssssssssusesisssessssssseeess 6 14 AUTO VETIP DOWNEOAD Ss scccsicedsteavseesdecdscavssnr ached viisianantaeiclindisteans a a 6 15 WEBALARM EMAIL ceecssssssssssetssssssssssssssutssssssscsssssssutsssssssessssssssutiessssssssssssumessesesesssnssntussesen 6 15 FTP CLIENT INP 102 ETHERNET MODEM COMBINATION ssssssssssessssssssssssssssessessssssssssssetesssssssssssse 6 18 DNP FOR LAN WAN snssninnnninnnnann CUSTOMIZING SCREENS sannio CONFIGURING WEBEXPLORER CONFIGURING WEBXML CONFIGURING WEBREACHER ssessssessessssesssesssesssecsseceseceseessecesecesecesesesscesscesscesscenseesecs CONFIGURING WEBMOD gijacke sia cnincuill a E TR CONFIGURING WEBALARMO 44 UPDATE NETWORK CARD FIRMWARE FROM GE COMMUNICATOR EXT ou 6 46 WEBXML FLOW CHART WEBEAPLORER FLOW CHART cissscac cose uss ssc ussancesiassdionoeasuninescconepaaaininnsslbtesaassabeasuusbbbboianaanaintd 6 50 WEBALARM FLOW CHART ucanuisnainiiiiiaain ni N ARAN 6 51 EE EN aS S S cee cect LUCE Zel REAL TIME READINGS iinisreinmoinnn ana 7 3 INSTANTANEOUS POLLING sis zcsscssdustdedetececor conssactetecda coud a a 7 3 POLL MAX AND MIN READINGS csccsssssscssssssscssssssscsssessscssscsascsasesescsascssncssncssncsencsancessees 7 3 POLL READING GRID wiescessesscsscsssssscssscssesssesscsssssscssesssesscsssssssssesstesscsacssessessutassessesscssesaneaseeess 7 5 POLL M
161. RING THE EPM 9800 METER RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES Buttons Copies How many copies do you want to print Print Pages Select individual pages to print Separate Page Numbers by Commas Print This button sends you to Print Setup screen where you select printer properties paper and page orientation Click OK to Print Save Save these selections for future use Done Exit the screen and return to the Device Profile screen y If you change the Com settings for the meter you will not be able to communicate with the meter You will have to sign off and sign on again with the new settings NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 5 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 3 General Settings General Settings is the first group of settings in the Device Profile gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the General Settings line All of the settings in the General Settings Group are listed Device Profile EXF Communications F 45 CT PT Ratios and System Hookup F 45 Limit and Waveform Full Scales 5 Time Settings F 45 Labels EX5 DNP Custom Classes Map EX5 Custom Modbus Map gt Click on the particular Programmable Setting you would like to configure The settings will be detailed in the order they appear on the Device Profile screen 4 3 1 CT and PT Ratios and System Hookup
162. RUCTION MANUAL 4 57 SET AND RETRIEVE METER TIME CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 8 Set and Retrieve Meter Time The EPM 9800 uses its on board clock for time stamping any logs it is recording To set the meter s clock gt Select Tools gt Set Meter Time The meter s On board Clock screen appears Set EPM9500 On Board Clock Month Day Year Date a CO Zo Hour Minute second Time a Co gl Use PC Time om lt gt To synchronize the meter and your computer leave the Use PC Time box checked gt To set the date and time to be independent from the PC deselect the Use PC Time box and enter the time and date settings gt Click the Send button to update the meter s time settings To retrieve the Meter device s current time and date settings gt Select Tools gt Retrieve Meter Time This screen appears Date and running time display in LEDs Current EPM Device Time gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 4 58 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 9 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Reset Meter Information The following set of screens appears Reset EPM9800 Parameters Accumulators Max Min and Demands i Reset All Logs Revenue Power Quality Etc i Reset Historical Log 1 Revenue Log gf Reset Historical Log 2 Revenue Log Bj Reset Sequence of Events Log i Reset Digital Input Lo
163. RY OF OPERATION CHAPTER 15 FLICKER Data available Simulation Of Eye Brain Response Block 3 Pet Pot Max Pot Min values for long term recording Pit Pit Max P Min values for long term recording Figure 16 1 Simulation of Eye Brain Response 15 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 FLICKER SETUP 15 3 Setup Initially the user must set up several parameters to properly configure Flicker gt Using GE Communicator EXT from the Icon Menu select Profile gt From the Device Profile screen open Power Quality and Alarm Settings then select EN 50160 Flicker The following screen will appear EN50160 Flicker Short term test time PST jo Minutes Long term test time PLT 240 Minutes Frequency jso e LK Heo gt Select a P time range from 1 to 10 minutes The standard measurement period is nominally 10 minutes gt Select a Py time range from 1 to 240 minutes The standard measurement is nominally 12 P periods 120 minutes Plt time must always be equal to or great than and a multiple of P time This is reflected in the selections available to the user gt Select the frequency of operation 50 Hz is the approved frequency according to Flicker standards A 60 Hz implementation is available and can be selected This implementation is the proposed 60 Hz standard that is still in the approval process Remember the voltage is normalized For 50 Hz the normalized volt
164. Ree E 14400 000 Volts gt Input the desired thresholds gt Click OK to exit the screen and return to the GE Communicator EXT main screen 4 5 6 High Speed Inputs This section of the Device Profile enables you to label the eight High Speed Inputs Using this storage field allows a user to label the inputs so that when the data is later analyzed the user knows the source of the status change gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Digital Inputs line gt Double click on High Speed Inputs The following submenu appears E Input 1 NAME HSI Input 1 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger Input 2 NAME HSI Input 2 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger Input 3 NAME HSI Input 3 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Trigger Input 4 NAME HSI Input 4 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger Input 5 NAME HSI Input 5 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger Input 6 NAME HSI Input 6 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger Input 7 NAME HSI Input 7 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Trigger Input 8 NAME HSI Input 8 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 51 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt Double click on any of the Input lines The High Speed Digital Input Assignments screen appears 8 HS Input Double click on the Input you would like to label Enter text in each field Click
165. S 485 AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS At the Originating Computer Location gt Serial Port amp Network Device Address po Host Network Port Protocol a ra Click the Network radio button on this screen The screen changes for Network settings Enter settings for Network Connection See your Network Administrator for correct settings In the Device Address field enter 1 In the Host field enter an IP Address or a Registered Name See your Network Administrator In the Network Port and Protocol fields the example settings are probably correct Check with your Network Administrator to be sure Click Connect GE Communicator EXT locates the meter and the Device Status screen appears confirming the connection See section 2 8 for details Click OK The computer is now connected to the meter The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters Status Bars will differ slightly for the two connections fi You may use an internal or external display to view the baud rate address and y communication protocol of each port NOTE See Chapters 3 4 5 for details of how to configure the meter s communication ports i For details on Network Hardware Connections refer to the Network sections of the LA meter s Installation and Operation Manuals NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 5 SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 MODEM CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2 C
166. S CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 3 Revenue Energy and Demand Readings 7 3 1 Power To view Power readings for the currently connected meter gt Select Power from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The set of Power screens appears gt Click on the tabs at the top of each screen to access other readings Examples of the additional screens follow Total Multiphase Total and Individual Phase Readings for Watts VARS VA and PF Thermal Rolling Predicted Wotts ar aT Py Ph GON maT VARS a eee ee PF eT ae Instantaneous per Phase One second Per Phase Values and Multiphase Totals 7 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS Thermal per Phase Per Phase and Multiphase Totals Uncompensated Metered Values without Line and Loss Compensation and Multipliers Includes Interval and Rolling Demand gt Click Print to send a copy of the screen to a printer gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 7 3 2 Demand To view Demand data for the currently connected device gt Select Demand from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The set of Demand screens appears gt Click on the tabs at the top of each screen to access other readings Examples of the additional screens follow GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 729 REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READING
167. S CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING Peak Peak Demand Readings for Watts VARS VA and PF Peak or Maximum Demand is the largest Average Value for the selected demand interval Walts Coincident VARS Watts Comcident VARS IVARS VARS Thermal Demand Thermal or Exponential Demand is used to emulate the operation of electromechanical Thermal Demand meters This measurement responds like lagged thermal heating effects in electrical equipment Average Maimam e Stamp Maximam Minimam Minimum 7 10 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS Thermal Average VARS The exponential average VARs Exponential averages are used because they discount older values and respond more like the thermal effects Mexnmam Menimam Minimans Minimum Thermal Average VA Average Meximam Minemnam Block Window Average or Average Demand GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING Max and Min Watts VARS and VA readings with Time Stamp Click on tabs to access readings Average Menimem Maximam Minimam Minimam Rolling Window Average or Average Rolling Demand Max and Min Watts VARS and VA readings with Time Stamp Click on Watts VARS and VA tabs to access readings tMeaoximam Maximam Minimam Minimam GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTR
168. SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS SERIAL CONNECTIONS ssssssssdevsscasucwsbusheyhvascessssiesscavassaaceuyciat casts cavtvatetgsossecands aii NETWORK CONNECTIONS coissin iniaiaiai SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 MODEM CONNECTIONS BEFORE SETTING THE GENERAL CONFIGURATION AT THE REMOTE METER SITE vocsessscssssseesssssssseeeesssseee ON THE ORIGINATING COMPUTER csssssssssssssssssssssessesssesssecssesssssssssssscssscssecssscssecssseesssesse HANDLING MULTIPLE LOCATIONS ecsssesssesssesssssssssssesssssssssssessssssscssssesecssssesscssseesseesseesseees SETTING UP THE ORIGINATE COMPUTER MODEM ADDING NEW DEVICES METERS TO A LOCATION wiessscsssssseesssseesssssseecssseessssseeessseeesssseess IF THE CONNECTION BALES seyasicssisitecsessesaiabibatecsussstgocccdastbsaatvsessaadsteviennstannaittaduneedentindsd RS 485 INTERNAL MODEM OPTION CONNECTION oieccesccscscsssssssssessessessssecssessssessenses AT THE REMOTE METER SITE ceseessssssssssssccsssssssssssccsssecssssseecssssscssssesessssecssssesssseeeessssees ON THE ORIGINATING COMPUTER ADDING ALOCATION iniae aa RREAN HANDLING MULTIPLE LOCATIONS csssesssessssesssesssesssesssecssscssscssscssscsuecssecsuecsseseseeeseeesscesees SETTING UP THE ORIGINATE COMPUTER MODEM ADDING NEW DEVICES METERS AT ONE LOCATION IF THE CONNECTION FAILS woseesscessssssssesesseesssseessseesssssessees INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION sicienininneni nii TO SET THE CONFIGUR
169. STOMIZING SCREENS Table 6 5 Diagnostic Functions Server Side Include Function Name Parameter Description ssi_diag_modem Show internal modem INP102 status ssi_diag_system Show system info such as start time ssi_diag_web_server Show Web server info stats fn Show ethernet communication status Table 6 6 Stored E mail Functions Server Side Include Function a Parameter Description Name ssi_show_email_date_time 1to 10 Show stored email s date time ssi_show_email_subject 1to 10 Show stored email s subject text ssi_show_email_from 1to 10 Show stored email s from text ssi_show_email_to 1to 10 Show stored email s to text ssi_show_email_cc 1to 10 Show stored email s cc text ssi_show_email_device_name 1to 10 Show stored email s device name text ssi_show_email_contact_person 1 to 10 Show stored email s contact person name ssi_show_email_contact_phone 1to 10 Show stored email s contact phone number ssi_show_email_alarm_ids 1to 10 Show stored email s alarm IDs ssi_show_email_alarm_names 1to 10 Show stored email s alarm names ssi_show_email_alarm_details 1to 10 Show stored email s alarm details ssi_show_email_send_status 1to 10 Show stored email s send status NOTE 1 Newest 10 Oldest STORED EMAIL FUNCTIONS Table 6 7 Special Functions for MODBUS DEVICE 1
170. Scaling Byte Order Data Size etc GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 19 GENERAL SETTINGS NOTE CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt From the Device Profile screen section 4 2 click on the button beside Custom Modbus Map or double click on the Custom Modbus Map line The screen appears Data entry is straightforward Each type of data is described below Note that not all selections will appear on the screen at the same time You have to scroll the screen from right to left to reach some of the functions Certain entries such as Format Data Size etc have different allowable selections depending on the data point used The pull down menu will automatically adjust to provide the appropriate selections for that data point Table of the Most Commonly Used Modbus Map Readings on page 4 18 Data Point Selection There are two different ways to select a Data Point gt Refer to the Modbus Map and find the associated Line and Point for the value you want When you enter those values into the table the software will complete the associated Group and Channel OR gt Double click the Group field gt From the pull down menus select a Group and Associated Channel value The software will complete the Map and Line values e Number of Registers The number of registers polled for this Data Point is automatically computed The number is dependent on the Data Size selected in the Data Size column
171. Services to Enable the features desired Unless these Services are Enabled they will not work gt If you do not want to Block Password Protected Access press OK gt OK to return to the main screen and press the Update Device button Block Password Protected Access This feature blocks access to an EPM 9650 or 9800 at Modbus Address 1 in INP100 102 The feature was added to INP100 102 runtime firmware in v0 1 52 a Advanced Network Option Settings fare Security Once it is enabled the INP100 102 network card will block all network requests when it detects that a user is sending a password to the meter at Modbus Address 1 As a result if the meter is password enabled and the user is trying to gain access by sending a password through the network interface via Modbus TCP or through the modem via Modbus ASCII the operation will be stopped and the user will not be able to access the password enabled area iy Use of this feature requires an INP100 102 firmware update and a GE Communicator EXT software update NOTE Update Procedures gt Go to the meter s update1 htm page to update its firmware Example 100 0 0 0 update1 htm gt When done go to reset_ethernet htm page to reset it gt Uninstall the old software GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 13 SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS gt Install the new software y Connect to a meter via serial port and r
172. Squared T or double click on the Squared T and V Squared T line This screen appears I Squared T and Squared T Thresholds 1 Square d oo Accumulate when Currentis above 0 000 Amps SC Accumulate when Voltage is above 0 000 Volts gt Input the desired thresholds gt Click OK to exit the screen and return to the GE Communicastor EXT main screen 3 5 6 High Speed Inputs This section of the Device Profile enables you to label the eight High Speed Inputs Use of this storage field allows a user to label the inputs so that when the data is later analyzed the user knows the source of the status change gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button or double click on the Digital Inputs line and double click on High Speed Inputs The following submenu appears E Input 1 NAME HSI Input 1 ASSIGNED TO Wavetorm PO Trigger Input 2 NAME HSI Input 2 ASSIGNED TO Wavetorm PO Trigger Input 3 NAME HSI Input 3 ASSIGNED TO Wavetorm PO Trigger Input 4 NAME HSI Input 4 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Trigger Input 5 NAME HSI Input 5 ASSIGNED TO Waveform PO Tngger GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 49 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt Double click on High Speed Inputs The following submenu appears Device Profile High Speed Digital T HSI Input 8 HSI Input 8 gt Double clic
173. T software program and Log Converter program After GE Communicator EXT finishes retrieving a log or finishes a script the Log Converter program automatically translates the binary logged data into a database file Access format At the top of the screen the Run Stop button turns the Scheduler On and Off To add scripts to the Scheduler or edit existing scripts the Scheduler must be turned OFF You can perform only one of the following tasks at a time set up scripts set up scheduler or run scheduler Active Scripts window displays the scripts that are currently running on the Scheduler Using the buttons at the bottom of the screen those scripts can be edited or deleted and new scripts can be added Current Status displays the Script amp Scheduler operations 14 1 2 Using the GE Scheduler gt Access the GE Script amp Scheduler program from Drive C Program Files GE Applications GE Communicator Script amp Scheduler gt Click on it The main screen above will appear There are four sections at the bottom of the screen Script Scheduler Status and the Help Exit section The components in these sections enable the user to set up all the elements of the Script amp Scheduler program and view the resulting logs Step by step directions are given in the following sections and Help buttons are on each screen To work on the Scheduler the Scheduler must be stopped by pressing the Run Stop button at the top right of t
174. TRODUCTION cscaassasactecosasdaanessdsscusassaauasssanszensannssansdannsces sanvanuasonse dss saawasnssannesde sdeasnua sanocdtesasanagehsss B 1 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION iccsssssssssssssscecccesssecsececssseeseesssseecesssnseseeseeseee B 3 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION ccccccccssssecsccossesesssssssccescsssssseceessnsnseeceenseveess B 4 LOSS COMPENSATION IN THREE ELEMENT INSTALLATIONS u ccsesseescsssccscessessessesesseeees B 4 THREE ELEMENT LOSS COMPENSATION WORKSHEET unveescescesscssesseessesseesccssessesseessesseees B 5 MS EXCEL SPREADSHEET WITH EXAMPLE NUMBERS u eseescesccsscsssessessestescesstssessseesees B 9 SCRIPT COMMAND LINE METHODS csisssescscsssssstussesssesesavosnsa sennsosesavesnsa shassesesesesnsa sasecssvaavousase C 1 APPLICATION COMMAND LINE METHODS scssssssasssnvvienaeviccasssnnnsenn scstin rvs snaw anecesdpnosodaliin C 2 TETP SERVER PROGRAM SETUP aicsin ea EEA D 1 AVAILABLE DNP CLASS MAP READINGS FOR EPM9450Q ssssssnssssooossssssrsessssssssssserrree E 1 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS MEGA PAGE wirion aaa E F 1 MODIFY JAVASCRIPT rnnr e aa A A bOnanuansoniaenteuss F 2 CHANGE BROWSER SETTINGS ciiise NNR F 3 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX G ETHERNET NETWORK ERROR CODES GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS ESP 3 iS 12 E E ene ne ED ee ener Ene G 1 NETWORK ERROR CODES REPORTED BY SOFTWARE THAT USES ETHERNET INCLUDING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT uucsscssssss
175. TTINGS AND VA RATINGS CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES Below are the dimensions and the labels for the PSIO PSIO Power Source Male RS 485 Side Port 3 e t o j ojjan m O O anes o O jw O O ene PSIO Power Source with I O Modules 10 6 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES I O MODULES FACTORY SETTINGS AND VA RATINGS Top Label Side lt POWER trai lt POWER Max Power 12 VA Input Voltage 12 60V oc O 90 240V acoc O Output voltage 12V DC GE Multilin www GEmultilin com Labels for PSIO Power Source Connection Steps gt Connect the A and B terminals on the meter to the A and B terminals of the male RS 485 port gt Connect the shield to the shield S terminal The S terminal on the meter is used to reference the meter s port to the same potential as the source It is not an earth ground connection You must also connect the shield to earth ground at one point gt Put termination resistors at each end connected to the A and B lines RT is 120 Ohms GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 7 ASSIGNING ADDRESSES AND BAUD RATES TO AN I O MODULE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 6 Assigning Addresses and Baud Rates to an I O Module fi The utility described below requires the I O to be connected to the EPM 9450 9650 Meter LA at Port 3 or 4 EPM 9800 at Port 4 ONLY To configure
176. The first Connection Manager screen returns 2 4 7 If the Connection Fails Check that all cables are secure that the RS 485 cable is connected to the Modem Gateway on the Modem unit and that other GE units are set at 57600 baud using Modbus ASCII GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 5 Internal Network Option Connection Internal Network Option Connection Requires Modbus TCP Protocol Some meter models offer an Internal Network Option which allows them to communicate over a network Connection to a network is now as easy as plugging in a phone Simply connect a meter to a computer using Port 1 EPM 9450 9650 or Port 3 EPM 9800 to configure the network parameters and add a network connection The meter must be configured to speak Modbus TCP Modbus TCP is the common protocol used for Modbus communication over a network fi The Internal Network Option operates internally at a fixed Baud Rate of 115200 The v Gateway operates as a Modbus RTU Master with a programmable Baud Rate up to A 115200 kA NOTE For Direct Connection refer to section 2 2 of this manual 2 5 1 To Set the Configuration Connect the network to the computer using Port 1 See the meter s Installation and Operation Manuals for details of the hardware requirements gt At the RJ 45 Ethernet connection jack on the meter plug in a network connection gt Click on the
177. Time changes automatically occur at 2 00 AM your local time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October User Defined Allows you to set the Daylight Savings Time manually Start Set the Month Day and Hour when the adjustment for Daylight Savings will commence End Set the month day and hour when the adjustment for Daylight Savings will conclude Line Synchronization Set Enable or Disable and Frequency The basic function of Line Synchronization is to adjust the real time clock to track the time based on the power line frequency For this purpose Phase A voltage ONLY is used Line Sync is disabled if a GPS signal is present How Time is Adjusted After the clock is synced to the line the meter periodically checks the cumulative difference between the real time clock in cycles and the line cycle count If the absolute difference is greater than 50 60 cycles the clock is adjusted 1 second accordingly GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt To set the meter s on board clock use Set Meter Time from the Tools Menu gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 3 5 Labels Labels are user defined names for the meter the Auxiliary Voltage terminal
178. UCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS 7 3 3 Energy To view Energy data for the currently connected device gt Select Energy from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The set of Energy screens appears gt Click on the tabs to move from screen to screen The EPM 9450 9650 Series Meters are true four quadrant power meters In the Quadrant Energy Primary section of this screen shown above readings are displayed for the VARS and VA in each quadrant Quadrant Power Factor Watts VARS 1 Lag Ae 2 Lead 3 Lag 4 Lead Power Factor Lag and Lead is programmable in the Limits section of the Device Profile kd 3 5 1 4 5 1 NOTE Additional screens are shown below GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 13 REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING Cumulative Demand Readings in Secondary and Primary Delivered Watts Received Watts amp V Squared T Positive Readings for Phases A B and C 7 14 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS Q Hours Plus and Minus Readings in Secondary and Primary Secontdnry Uncompensated Energy Plus and Minus Watt VAR and VA Readings in Secondary and Primary Primary GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING
179. UERY I O LOCATING AN UNKNOWN ADDRESS AND BAUD RATE 10 15 Query O Locating an Unknown Address and Baud Rate This utility requires you to press the I O module s reset button If you are off site or cannot pi vw access the reset button use the Locator Utility described in section 11 15 16 NOTE Os may be connected to either the EPM Meter s Port 3 or 4 However ONLY Port 4 is programmed to query Be sure the port is configured to operate at 57600 and is set to Master mode see Chapter 3 for how to configure the EPM Meter s communication ports gt Select I O Devices gt Query I O Module The following screen appears gt Click Continue The following screen appears gt Use a fine point to depress the I O module s reset button Hold it in for at least three seconds This resets the I O module to address 247 at 57600 baud for thirty seconds allowing GE Communicator EXT to retrieve the stored address and baud rate GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 23 QUERY I O LOCATING AN UNKNOWN ADDRESS AND BAUD RATE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES gt Click OK The EPM Meter will begin looking for the device at the temporary address of 247 When the I O s programmable information is located the following screen appears the Communications setting Addie gt Write down the address and baud rate 10 24 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES LOCATOR UTIL
180. ULTIPLE DEVICES cc20 5 ccecceses ctsusrecsetuetevacdcissdovecbeusstctunavaosstosuresed ea daeceee sebsuieatvecls 7 6 ENERGY PULSE AND ACCUMULATIONS IN THE INTERVAL INTERNAL KYZ OUTPUT ACCUMULATIONS u scssssseesssscssssccssecsssecsssscssnccsssecesuecsssccssnseessses TOTAL AVERAGE POWER FACTOR ssscssscssscssscsssssssessscssscssscsascsascsasesasesascssnsssnceencssncesncesnees TIME OFUSE REGISTERS 5 ccs5s ch atslyiedadedatecsec dives sede seeds ana ana ai POLL PULSE ACGUMULATIONS cosine nnen U ERR RR POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS PHASORS inoa a tier eestor csaecansnstese aces anette ats aneeectes tse t eettet eeae ALARM STATUS ueccssssssesssessseesseesseeeee POLL DEVICE CONTROL STATUS POLL INTERNAL INPUTS cessscssssescsssssssssssssscsssssessesessseesssssssssessssessssesssssssseessasessseesseseessecsssess POLL EXTERNAL DIGITAL INPUTS ccscsessssesssssssssesesssessssesssseessssessseesssesssssssssecsssseessnsessecees EN Me ers tesla otha cee ean OVERVIEW enn naa see aamnas ancien GEE ence ae aNKeNEaEED 8 1 4 PROGRAMMING AND RUNNING LOGS isisisi iiinn pirssin 8 4 RETRIEVING LOGS arenino iaa N mea Aan 8 5 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 TIME OF USE 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 11 PASSWORDS 12 FLASH UPGRADING TABLE OF CONTENTS EWING TRENDING AND DEMAND GRAPHS XY AND CIRCULAR ou 8 13 EWING IHE LIMIS LOG eae ee net a ODER ONNPEr MMU REE Ie Pee EWING THE WAVEFORM LOG
181. UNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE GE EXTERNAL DISPLAY gt Click OK In a moment the following screen appears Enter Flash Checksum Flash Checksum gt Enter the checksum code from the text file accompanying the firmware upgrade file If you do not enter the correct checksum code the flash upgrade will fail gt Click OK Flash upgrading begins The following screen displays the progress of the upgrade Flashing Status Requesting Current Operations Mode D The D Unit is Running in Normal Mode Flash Programming Complete Sequence Number When the Flash upgrade is complete the Cancel button changes to OK gt Click OK To upgrade additional GE External Displays click Previous and return to Communications B A Parameters screen Repeat the steps as needed entering a unique address for each unit NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 15 FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL MODEM CARD CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING 12 5 Flash Upgrading the Internal Modem Card gt Contact GE to receive the most recent Internal Modem Option Flash firmware upgrade This Flash Upgrade effects ONLY the Internal Modem Card within the meter This Flash Upgrade DOES NOT UPGRADE THE GE UNIT To upgrade the GE device refer to sections 13 2 13 3 and 13 4 of this manual You can download the latest software version through our internet site at www GEmultilin com Click on the Free
182. URE oaoiiaaiiiai Ea 4 CONFIGURING THE OVERVIEW sna RRS 4 1 EPM 9800 METER RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES 4 3 GENERAL SETTINGS riinan nnn 4 6 CT AND PT RATIOS AND SYSTEM HOOKUP sssesssesssesssessssssecsssesssesssesseesssessseesse 4 6 ONE AMP CURRENT INPUT ADDENDUM MODIFICATION NUMBER M10 0 0 4 8 LIMIT AND WAVEFORM FULL SCALES scssssssssssssssssssssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssessnessseesse 4 9 TIME SEMINGS runaire Sieates stetucdsaethes aed ARATE N 4 11 COMMUNICATIO DNP CusTtOoM C CUSTOM MODBU a REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS aiun csccssssssssssesssssssssssssssesssssssssssssessasesssessvenssssessniesseeees 4 24 ENERGY SCALING sirtarin ena e NTRA 4 25 PROGRAM DEMAND INTEGRATION INTERVALS DEMAND INTERVALS cssscssssssesseesseees 4 29 INTERNAL KYZ OUTPUTS AND TEST LED SETTINGS scsssssessssseesssssseccssseesssseessssssees 4 31 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION ccsscssssssssesssessseessesereeesesesscesess 4 32 CT AND PT COMPENSATION scessesssesssessseesseeeee 4 35 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION weeecsssssssssssssessssssssssssssssstssssssssssssssessessssssesssees 4 36 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS COND LOAD PICKUP iss taisccssteciilinesidcctististeascscectetadsieessivelansatissetetoienvaredstestivered anette 4 38 CUMULATIVE DEMAND TYPE o sccc
183. UT OBJECT 30 16 6 CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT Flicker 65536 0 0001 In Interval 1000 1000 Day of Week 6 1 Sequence 1 1 Status 100 1 Avg Select 100 1 Delay 100 1 Log Index 100 1 Countdown 100 1 Example In order to find out if there is new log data use a Log Index Number One of the Log Index Numbers Last Index will increase when a new log is created In Object 30 Program Last Log Record Index Waveform Log Line 499 Point 7 Input Deadband 1 00 and assign a Class The exception data will be created when the Index Number increases by one GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BINARY COUNTER OBJECT 20 16 4 Binary Counter Object 20 A meter can use up to 8 Binary Counter Points Values available for Binary Counter use can be found in the DNP Object Mapping Only Class 0 is used when polling Binary Counter Object 20 Data and Frozen Counter Object 21 Data Class 1 2 or 3 is used when polling Counter Event Object 22 Data and Frozen Counter Event Object 23 Data Line Point Description gt Double click on the box under Description to Add Delete or Modify DNP Points A pull down window appears gt Choose a Type of reading and a Channel and click OK The corresponding numbers for the selected data and channel will appear in the Line an
184. Value w Exp Meter Base No Load Loss kW V 2 No Load Loss kVAR y 4 Load Loss kW l A2 Load Loss kVAR l A2 Normalize Losses to Meter Base gt Enter Value at Transformer Base for each quantity from calculations above gt Enter Meter Trf Factor value from Base Conversion Factor calculations above B 8 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION gt Calculate M T Factor with Exponent by raising the M T Factor to the power indicated in the Exp or Exponent column gt Calculate the Value at Meter Base by multiplying the M T Factor w Exp times the Value at Trf Base Loss Watts Percentage Values Meter Base kVA 600 PT Multiplier CT Multiplier 1000 600 ye 1000 Calculate Load Loss Values Value at Meter Loss Quantity Meter Base at Quantity Base kVA Meter Base No Load Loss kW Loss Watts FE No Load Loss KVAR Loss VARs FE Load Loss kW Loss Watts CU Load Loss kVAR Loss VARs CU gt Enter Value at Meter Base from Normalize Losses section V Enter Meter Base kVA from previous calculation gt Calculate Loss at Meter Base by dividing Value at Meter Base by Meter Base kVA and multiplying by 100 gt Enter calculated Loss Watts values into EPM meter using Communicator EXT software B 2 3 MS E
185. WEB SOLUTIONS SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION gt Click on the FTP Client tab An example screen is shown here a Advanced Network Option Settings ea et E we oiocol EG aa Sa gt Enter the following settings to load user defined files FTP Client Settings e FTP Server IP or Name requires DNS setup e FTP Server Port Initial Setting is xx e Startup Directory where files are located subdirectory is not supported If the file has the same name as the one in the Initial Files within the meter the new file will replace the Initial one e User Name e Password FTP Client Settings Example By default Microsoft s FTP Server will use C Inetpub ftproot as the root directory When a user logs onto the FTP Server this is the initial directory the user will see 1 If the files for INP100 are stored in the root directory C Inetpub ftproot leave the Startup Remote Directory text box empty Example Files in FTP Server s Root Directory e CA netpub ftproot index htm e CAlnetpub ftproot poll_profile xml e C Inetpub ftproot logo gif When INP100 starts up it will check to see what files are in the server s directory and will download them all 2 If the files for INP100 are stored in a subdirectory in the root directory such as C Inetpub ftproot EPM_meters feeder_12345 put EPM_meters feeder_12345 in the Startup Remote Directory text box Note the different between directory na
186. Waveform Capture The Manual Waveform Capture screen shown here appears if the connected device is an EPM 9800 Waveform Log Statistics 6 19 2006 12075262 04 12 2005 16521651 6 82006 1201 5262 04120006 16621651 This screen displays the Waveform Log Statistics of the logs that have possible Waveform Triggers gt Click the Trigger Now button at the bottom of the screen to create a waveform GE Communicator EXT creates a Waveform in Meter memory The Records on the screen will increase by 1 gt To retrieve the Waveform from the Menu Toolbar click Logs gt Retrieve Log from the device gt Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 61 TEST MODE PRESET ACCUMULATORS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 11 Test Mode Preset Accumulators There are two reasons why a user might want to use the Preset Accumulators screens 1 A meter in Test Mode is out of service and is therefore not monitoring accumulations The New Value can be used to adjust for the values not monitored while in Test Mode When replacing an old meter that has accumulations with a new meter that has no accumulations the New Value can be set with the value of the accumulations of the old meter Setting Test Mode Preset Accumulators for EPM 9800 gt From the menu bar select Tools gt Test Mode gt Preset Accumulators The set of screens shown here appears Internal Input Ac
187. YPE Meter 1250 gt lt item gt Polling Data Elements lt DEV_DATA gt and lt DEV_DATA gt Polling data attributes up to 64 in each lt DEV_DATA gt element DEV_PROTOCOL Modbus RTU DEV_NAME Meter Demo 1 DEV_ADDRESS 1 DEV_IP DEV MAX PACKET LEN 127 DEV POLL ALARM yes DEV ALARM OPTIONS 14 2 3 4 5 9 DEV_ALARM DELAY 2000 DEV_COMM_TIMEOUT 750 DEV_PARENT 1 lt item D UID 1 1 D D_ADDR 180 D LENGTH 2 D_TYPE 7 LABEL Inst Van GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS D_USE_SPECIAL 3 D_VALUMODE Primary CUSTOMIZING SCREENS gt lt item gt Table 6 9 E mail Attributes EMAIL_X Email address X is from 1 to 8 Max size 64 characters FORMAT_Y Email format Y is from 1 to 8 Strings long or short Table 6 10 System Elements Device Element Settings Description DEV_TYPE Supported device Generic Modbus name EPM 1250 EPM 9450 EPM 1252 EPM 9650 EPM 1260 EPM 1262 EPM 1270 EPM 1272 EPM 9800 DEVICE_TYPE_LABEL Auto detect device s type Only supported in EPM devices DEV_PROTOCOL Protocol name Modbus RTU Modbus TCP DEV_NAME User assigned device name Max 32 characters DEVICE_LABEL Use the name stored inside the device Only supported in EPM devices DEV_ADDRESS Device address Modbus protocol 1 to 247
188. a requested document Example of using Server Side Include Functions 1 In HTML file add to the first line of that file lt THIS FILE DOES CONTAIN REALTIME DATA gt Without that line any server side Include functions will not be processed by the web server 2 Inside the HTML file where you want the info displayed add lt exec cgi server_side_include_function_name gt where server_side_function_name can be one of the function names 3 To display stored email 1 s date time add the following to your HTML file at the location where you want the data displayed lt exec cgi ssi_ show email date time 1 gt Table 6 4 General Functions Server Side Include Function Name Parameter Description get_ip fn Show local IP address Table 6 5 Diagnostic Functions Server Side Include Function Name Parameter Description ssi_diag_cpu Show CPU info ssi_diag_ethernet_hardware Show ethernet hardware info ssi_diag_firmware Show firmware info ssi_diag_ftp_server Show FTP Server info ssi_diag_imported_files Show FTP client imported files status ssi_diag_memory Show memory info ssi_diag_modbus_com Show all Modbus communication info ssi_diag_modbus_tcp_server Show Modbus TCP Server info GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CU
189. a window to the other script screens Each single script can be used to retrieve data from multiple GE meters You need to assign one script for each telephone number The pull down menu lists all the scripts that have been created and are currently in use with the number the Scheduler assigns to it If you currently have no scripts a screen will appear that shows New Script 1 in the window is not a valid character for a script name Create New Open Delete Script Up to 300 script Current Scripts IELE New f open Mf Delete Mf cose E Beron o Hee Stop the Scheduler by clicking the Run Stop button at the top right side of the Scheduler window gt Press the Scripts button on the Scheduler window gt To create a new script click New The Set Up Script screen will appear see section 14 5 After the new script is created Scheduler will add it to the pull down menu gt To edit an existing script use the pull down menu to select a script e Click on the script name e Click Open The Set Up Script screen will appear see section 14 5 e Make desired changes gt To delete an existing script use the pull down menu to select a script e Click on the script name e Click Delete A window will appear which asks Are you sure you want to delete this script e Click Yes or No gt To exit either screen and return to the main screen click Close gt To generate a multiple page S
190. age But for the TLC Button to work you must have the Excel program in your system If you do not have Excel software or if the spreadsheet file is not in the Communicator directory a warning will be displayed instead of the worksheet You can do your own calculations using the hardcopy Transformer Loss Compensation Worksheet in Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide For most Excel users the spreadsheet will not run until permission is given to run the Macros contained in the sheet This is done by changing the Excel Security Setting from High to Medium The Excel Commands are D gt From the Excel Toolbat select Tools gt Security gt Options gt On the Security Tab Page click on the Macro Security button gt Select Medium Security This setting will allow Excel to run in GE Communicator EXT In the Device Profile Transformer and Line Loss Compensation Window above GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS gt Enter the percent Loss of Watts and Vars for copper and iron in the appropriate fields gt Enable or Disable Transformer Loss Compensation with the top pull down menu Click Disable or to Enable click one of the following Fe only Cu only or Both Fe and Cu gt With the second pull down menu select from the following e Add to Watts and Subtract from VAR e Subtract from Watts and Add to VAR e Add to Watts and V
191. age is 230 V and for 60 Hz the normalized voltage is 120 V gt Press OK when you are finished gt Press Help for more information on this topic GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 5 SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE CHAPTER 15 FLICKER 15 4 Software User Interface Main screen gt From the GE Communicator EXT Icon Menu select Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms gt Flicker The following screen appears EN 50160 Flicker Drme Short Term Long Term SG PINST Voltage Reading Stop Volts A Current 5 Volts B Next PST Next PLT Volts Status _ _ __ Frequency Base Current Base Voltage Flicker Monitoring SE EF KJ EF This section describes the Main Screen functions The available values Instantaneous Short Term Long Term will be described below Time e Start Reset is the time when Flicker was started or reset A Reset of Flicker causes the Max Min values to be cleared and restarts the Flicker P and Ph timers A Start of Flicker is also equivalent to a Reset in that the P and P are restarted and the Max Min Values are cleared e Stop corresponds to the time when Flicker is turned off e Current is the current clock time e Next Pois the countdown time to when the next Pet value is available e Next P is the countdown time to when the next Py value is available Status e Indicates the current status Active On Stopped
192. ail Address User Preferred Address or Any Monitoring Receive Address 4 Return Reply From Address 5 Subject test 1 DNS IP 1 2 DNS IP 2 optional See configuring WebExplorer and WebXML for details 6 51 WEBALARM FLOW CHART CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 52 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 e 1 1 90111010110110 Chapter 7 Real Time Polling 010101110010 011 1 7 1 Overview The Real Time Polling features of GE Communicator EXT are used to continuously view instantaneous and stored values within one or several EPM Series 6000 7000 and 9000 Meters GE Communicator EXT provides tabular views of Metered Values Circuit Measurements Interval Data Power Quality Values Pulse Data and Input Output Status and Accumulations The Real Time Polling features are divided into three groups accessed by clicking the Real Time Polling menu 1 Real Time Readings 2 Revenue Energy and Demand Readings 3 Power Quality and Alarms GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7i OVERVIEW CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING All screens are not available on all models EPM 6000 meters have a unique screen Fle Connection Real Time Pol Took WODevikes TOUCslender Logs View Heb RealTime Resdeogs eous oi ao Revenue Energy and Demand Readings gt Pol Max and Min Readings prosle ios Power Qualty and Alarms
193. al Settings Click on the Date tab When all selections are made click OK to return to the main Edit Calendar screen Click Method in the Register Accumulation section of the window The following screen appears Current Monthly and Active Registers Accumulation method 9 Accumyulations in Registers stort at zero when new period starts Accumulations in Registers continue where Prior Month and Frozen Registers left off gt Click the radio button for the type of Accumulations you require and click OK 9 6 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE gt Click TOU Schedules The following screen appears 01 45 00 01 59 59 Ot Peak 02 00 00 02 14 59 Ot Peak 03 00 00 03 14 59 Off Peak 03 15 00 03 29 59 Off Peak e The first column lists each fifteen minute block of a 24 hour day e The Individual Registers defined in Step 5 will be applied to each fifteen minute block e Aschedule is the type of accumulation structure you will apply to individual days You may program up to 16 different schedules gt Double click on one of the Schedule Headings for example Schedule_1 The following screen appears Edit schedule name Schedule 1 SEGUE gt Enter a Name for the schedule such as Weekday Weekend or Holiday gt Click OK GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 97 CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFIL
194. aling 1 1 10 or 100 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 17 CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE System Wiring 3 Element Wye Delta with 2 CTs 2 5 Element Wye CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER If invalid CT PT and Interval Settings are entered a warning will appear on the screen GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER USING EPM 6000 POLLING AND TOOLS MENUS 5 4 Using EPM 6000 Polling and Tools Menus 5 4 1 Using EPM 6000 Polling Menu The Polling Menu for the EPM 6000 is similar to that of the other GE meters with two exceptions 1 There are fewer screens for the EPM 6000 Unavailable screens may appear on the menu and be greyed out 2 EPM 6000 has a unique screen Real Time Trending Details in Polling Chapter 7 The Polling Screens for the EPM 6000 display the following Volts Current Instantaneous Minimum and Maximum Values for Voltage Current and Frequency Poll Multiple Devices View polling data from multiple connected meters Power and Demand Instantaneous Minimum and Maximum Values for Power and Accumulated Energy Real Time Trending Displays a graph of instantaneous values Also provides Logging of instantaneous values in a csv Comma Separated Value Excel file 5 4 2 Using EPM 6000 Tools Menu The Tools Reset Screens for the EPM 6000 are similar to the other GE meters Reset Meter Information Resets stored Max M
195. ample the Test LED can generate Energy Pulses for conventional testing or Reactive VARh Pulses for complex testing and approvals The settings also allow you to determine the frequency and the duration of the pulse for each output and for the Test LED gt From the Device Profile screen section 4 2 click on the button beside Internal KYZ Settings or double click on the Internal KYZ Settings line The screen appears Internal KYZ Outputs KYZ Assigned Channel Watt Hour Pulse Mode Form Output Per Pulse Width ms _ te gt Click on the arrow of the pull down menu next to KYZ Output to which you would like to assign a channel gt Make changes to Watt Hour per Pulse Pulse Width Mode and Form for each output and for the Test LED Note on Form Form A Transition Form C Pulse gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter iy If your EPM 9800 meter is equipped with the KYZ Output Option the KYZ Output Settings will appear Otherwise only the Test LED will appear on the screen NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 31 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 4 4 Display Configuration gt From the Device Profile screen section 4 2 click on the button beside Display Config
196. and click Open If you are upgrading GE Comm firmware repeat the process for File 2 GE DSP firmware requires only one file Two files are entered for a GE Comm upgrade 12 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE GE COMM AND GE DSP FIRMWARE gt When the files have been entered click Next gt The following screen appears Communications Parameters Serial Port EUT ETICE 600 as If you are already connected to the GE Meter you want to upgrade disregard this screen click Next and skip to Click Start to begin the upgrade below If you are not connected to the GE Meter and or you have a series of GE Meters to upgrade this screen avoids the reloading of files gt gt GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL In the Address field enter the Address of the GE Meter to which your computer is connected that you want to flash upgrade In the Baud Rate field enter the baud rate of the GE Meter port to which your computer is connected that you want to flash upgrade In the Serial Port field enter the computer s comm port you are using Click Next Flashing Status arming you are about to begin the Flash Process Pross Start to Continue Sequence Number 12 9 FLASH UPGRADING THE GE COMM AND GE DSP FIRMWARE CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING Ww NOTE 12 10 gt Click Start to begin the upgrade A final warning screen appears g
197. and the N Measured terminal fi It is important to label the meter under Meter Designation with a Unique Name because LA that label will become the name of the file for any logs retrieved from that meter Duplicate meter designations interfere with retrieved log databases gt From the Device Profile screen section 3 2 click on the button beside General Settings gt Double click on the Labels line This submenu appears EF Labels Meter Designation EPM 9800 VAUX Vaux INMeasured Inm Power Direction Quadrant 1 4 Delivered and Quadrant 2 3 Received Power Factor Display Method 2 01 Lag G2 Lead 03 Lag 04 Lead gt Double click on any of the Designation Names The following screen appears Device Profile Labels Meter Designation PM 9800 V Aux Feller Power Direction Quadrant 1 4 Delivered and Quadrant 2 3 Received OEE Method 2 01 Lag Q2 Lead Q3 Lag O4 Lead X X Memo Field p 4 f gt Enter the labels in the appropriate fields Meter Designation MUST be set for Partial Log Retrieval gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter fi For Meter Designations you can use any character allowed by Windows Operating System 4 for a File Name since that Meter Designation will be used as the File Name
198. apu cident parable Under CE ves gt Double click on the GE Communicator EXT Setup exe icon and follow the on screen instructions The Read Me File provides Version Numbers and Dates for the GE Communicator EXT Setup and the component files i If necessary Setup will update your computer s Windows files to make them compatible with GE Communicator EXT After the Windows files have been updated GE m Communicator EXT may sometimes have to be installed a second time Screen messages will guide you through this process d GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BASIC SCREEN ELEMENTS 1 3 GE Communicator EXT Basic Screen Elements Start up Screen Displays the version number of the GE Communicator EXT software To view a similar screen at any time select Help About GE Communicator EXT An additonal button System Info can provide Microsoft system information Click OK to exit the screen Menu Bar Accesses all GE Communicator EXT commands and screens Computer Status Bar Displays communication information about the computer not the meter connected to it Enable or disable the Status Bar from the View menu FIGURE 1 1 GE Communicator EXT Start up Screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 3 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BASIC SCREEN ELEMENTS 1 4 1 3 1 Menu Bar Icons wo profile CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1
199. ar blank and GE Communicator EXT will ask you to name the log file and supply a destination See Chapter 3 9450 9650 chapter 4 9800 or chapter 5 7000 for how to give the meter a label GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 5 RETRIEVING LOGS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS gt Click Start GE Communicator EXT begins to retrieve the log The following screen appears Retrieving Historical Log 1 Reading Block After GE Communicator EXT has retrieved the log it converts the data The Log Converter application runs automatically GE Communicator EXT then runs Log Viewer See sections 8 4 8 18 for information on using Log Viewer J Retrieve logs as often as you want Each time you retrieve a log file GE Communicator EXT W appends only the newest records and captures to the existing database These partial downloads are listed in Log Viewer s Database Status screen see section 8 13 Snapshots or partial downloads must be a time frame within the database dates Otherwise there is no data from which to retrieve the snapshot NOTE 8 6 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING LOGS WITH GE COMMUNICATOR EXT S LOG VIEWER 8 4 Viewing Logs with GE Communicator EXT s Log Viewer GE Communicator EXT s Log Viewer displays retrieved logs in a variety of formats To access Log Viewer either gt Retrieve logs from a connected meter as in section 8 3 OR gt Click the Open Log bu
200. ass Assignments on the Object 22 screen are used to configure Counter Change Event Points In order to create Event Data Object 22 must be assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Each point can have a different Class Assignment The Delta value defines the boundary value for that point Example Suppose VA hour is programmed and the Delta is 5 That represents 5 increments from the returned 32 bit Binary Counter value Every second new Static Data is scanned for VA hour If new data is different from the previous standard value by the Delta value the Counter Change Event Data will be created That means if the previous standard polled value is 50000 VA hour and if the VA hour reading increases to 50005 it will create a Counter Change Event Point for VA hour and 50005 VA hour will become the previous standard value for the next Static Data The Scaling setting for a point also applies to the Delta value If Delta is 5 and Scaling is 2 this indicates a 500 count change in the internal representation Object 23 Frozen Analog Event Object 23 will be created if Object 23 is assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Line Point Description gt Double click on the box under Description A window will appear gt Choose a type of data and a channel gt Click OK The corresponding numbers for the selected data and channel will appear in the Line and Point columns Line and Point Numbers for a Binary Input value can also be found in the DNP Object Mappin
201. at file before deleting it wae For a list of all the component files of the GE Script amp Scheduler Program and their default locations see Appendix A Default locations can be changed but you must also change the associated programs so they know where to find the files To change default locations GE Communicator EXT View gt Options Scheduler Auto Run and Hide on Windows Start up The Scheduler runs automatically whenever Windows starts up if desired The program will hide the main screen and add an icon to the system tray lower right hand corner of your screen and will run unattended To open the main screen click on the icon in the system tray The following are the procedures to set up Auto Run and or Hide gt Create a shortcut for this program and place it in the Windows Startup folder gt Add the following to the command line auto hide After the Windows operating system has restarted this program will automatically start GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 5 SCRIPTS 14 3 Scripts 14 6 v NOTE CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM This application will enable you to set up as many as 300 independent scripts Each script tells the software to make a connection to a particular GE device and retrieve data from that device By making selections from the windows on the script screens you can easily create scripts that automatically retrieve the data you need This screen is
202. at is appropriate for the Frequency of the selected script Refer to section 14 13 to see a sampling of Add Edit Script to Scheduler screens Below is a screen for the selected script in the illustration above Scheduler Available Scripts for Scheduler 002 New script 2 bd Schedule Frequency Day of week Time GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 23 EDIT SCHEDULER SCRIPTS CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM gt To change the frequency click the pull down menu for Frequency and make a selection If you change the frequency the screen will change to offer the appropriate selections Refer to section 14 13 to see a sampling of Add Edit Script to Scheduler screens gt Using the available pull down menus make selection s V Type in the time if you want it to change gt Click OK to add to the Scheduler Or click Cancel 14 24 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM DELETE SCHEDULER SCRIPTS 14 15 Delete Scheduler Scripts Schedule Sent Nome Frequency _ _ text Bun Time Lan Run Time ____N Newscript Weekly Day of week Sunday Time 20439 PM 5 5 2001 34 39 PM AOM P16 SHRM MYT 21SS9RM tOM 35053 5 952001 42259Fa4 AYOO 42309 New script Weebly Day ot week Sunday Time 34153 PM 9 9 2001 34153 PM New ecript6 Dody Time 40025 PM WSO 460 25Pa4 84 2001 401 14 Mew script Daily Time 41526 PM NS2001 41526Fe 947001 415 29FM pened 400 45
203. ation The CT and PT Compensation feature allows users to remove the error caused by the CTs external to unit and PTs that are connected to the unit Enable CT and PT Compensation The steps gt From the Device Profile Revnue and Energy Settings click CT amp PT Compensation gt State gt Enable CT amp PT Compensation CT amp PT Compensation gt To send the new profile to the meter click OK and click Update Device Profile gt Exit Device Profile gt Click Tools gt CT amp PT Compensation gt Calibration Table Status alibration Table Status Calibration Using Factory Table CT amp PT Enabled 7 Compensation CT and PT Compensation First Time CT amp PT Comp Selection Preload CT amp PT Comp with intial values OK Help gt Click the First Time CT amp PT Comp Selection gt Click Preload CT amp PT Comp with Initial Values gt Click OK 4 64 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER CT AND PT COMPENSATION gt Click Tools gt CT amp PT Compensation gt View Callibration Tables Cahbration T able actory Table B LOTO 730 2004 09 38 40 22 Jamna T7 30 2004 09 38 39 14 actory Table Ca ea a eT EE T emmi0 20 2004 15 50 52 00 EPM Factory Table CT amp PT Compensation Table et ramen row r Aar Pare r 40065 39976 40043 2070 36059 35978 36039 2070 38173 38228 1586466935 8 38173 38228 1586466935 2 38150 38219
204. ator EXT User Guide for how to view and retrieve logs GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Trending Log Time Intervals or double click on the Trending Log Time Intervals line The following submenu appears EXE Trending Log Time Intervals Log 1 Interval Oh 15m 0s Log 2 Interval Oh 15m 0s This screen displays the current Device Profile s Trending Log Time Intervals The values shown are for example only gt Double click on either Log 1 Interval or Log 2 Interval The Interval Log Setting screen appears Device Profile Interval Log Setting Log 1 Interval _ D Hours ns GINGS p Seconds Log 2 Interval o Hours ns CONG p Seconds EE es gt Enter the hours minutes and seconds for each log The logs will be time stamped based on the meter s time which is set using the Tools menu See section3 2 5 gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter gt Reset Logs 3 5 9 Programming the Trending Setup for Historical Logs 1 and 2 The Trending Setup controls the channel assignments for Historical Logs 1 and 2 To set the Time Intervals
205. aud rate of the remote modem and the meter port In the Flow Control field select the remote meter modem s configuration Leave the Data Bits field at 8 for Modbus ASCII Other protocols may require a different setting Leave the Parity field at None for Modbus ASCII Other protocols may require a different setting Click the Use Modem box Enter the Phone Number of the remote modem Enter a setup string in the Setup String field if this originate modem has been used for another program and needs to be reset Use the Data Switch section to send any Data Switch strings to the remote modem The typical Data Switch string from a meter to the Substation Multiplexor to a PC PTnn gt Check the manual for the device you are using in order to create the Data Switch String appropriate for this device Typical characters used include pause one second escape sequence or switch to command mode PTnn command number 01 16 Enter lt CR gt ASCII character 13 2 3 6 Adding New Devices Meters to a Location gt Click on the Add button in the Devices at Location section to add meters to this location gt Select the new device and click on the Edit button to edit its location information The Location Device Editor screen appears displaying the meter s communications settings GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 9 SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 MODEM CONNECTIONS 2 3 7 If the Connection Fa
206. ble A single DNP Over TCP connection and a single DNP Over UDP connection will be available when it is enabled While DNP Over TCP connections may be closed at the decision of the network card the main meter might also determine that the current DNP Over TCP connection should be closed Since INP 100 102 has several built in servers the DNP LAN WAN TCP and UDP Listen on Ports defined by the user cannot be one of the following Example of setting up validation for IP Addresses 1 Set Validate Source IPs to 1 IP Address 2 Set Validate Source ports to Yes 3 Enter IP address such as 10 0 0 101 4 Enter mask such as 255 255 255 128 5 Enter TCP ports range such as 20000 20000 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION 6 Enter UDP ports range such as 20000 20000 As a result a valid DNP 3 0 LAN WAN request must come from a device with IP address of 10 0 0 1 to 10 0 0 127 with TCP and UDP ports set at 20000 If a DNP Over TCP connection was established and Validation was also enabled any new incoming DNP Over UDP connection has the same IP Address as the TCP connection If they are different the UDP connection will be closed The DNP address in the DNP LAN WAN request should always be 1 All incoming communication for DNP LAN WAN will go to the main meter and no DNP communication will go to the INP 100 102 s gateway port Name Port Nu
207. cator_Ext Device Profiles Browse_ Scripts C Program Fies GE Appications Communicator Ew Scipts Browse Polled Data C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_ExtPoled Data Browse _ Exported Data C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext Exported Data Browse Script Logs C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext Script Logs Browse Connection DB C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext Browse COMTRADE Data C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext COMTRADE Files Browse l 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 OPTIONS Data Scan Mode Select Normal Scan Rate or create Custom Scan Rate between 0 and 65535 scans per millisecond GE Options x Paths Data Scan Mode Tech Mode Settings Log Retrieval Energy Biling Module Miscellaneous Normal Scan Rate Custom Scan Rate fo milliseconds Valid Scan Rate Range 0 65535ms Scan Rate of 0 will perform one scan only Due to the time it takes to transmit and receive data scan values less than 200 ms will make no difference Tech Mode Settings gt Enter Password to enable Tech Mode If a Password is not entered Tech Mode will remain disabled GE Options xi Paths Data Scan Mode Tech Made Settings Log Retrieval Energy Biling Module Miscellaneous Tech Mode Disabled Enter Password to Enable Tech Mode GE CO
208. ce with the EPM 9450 9650 EPM 9800 does NOT support I O Modules a power supply such as the PSIO is required See section 11 5 1 To temporarily reset an I O module to address 247 and 57600 baud program defaults press and hold the reset button for 3 seconds The module will remain in reset mode for 30 seconds 1 O MODULES FACTORY SETTINGS AND VA RATINGS MODEL MODULE ADDRESS VA RATING NUMBER ImAON4 0 1mA 4 Analog Outputs 128 2 7 VA ImAON8 0 1mA 8 Analog Outputs 128 3 2 VA 20MAON4 4 20mA 4 Analog Outputs 132 5 0 VA 20mMAON8 4 20mA 8 Analog Outputs 132 8 5 VA 8Al1 0 1mA 8 Analog Inputs 136 2 3 VA 8Al2 0 20mA 8 Analog Inputs 140 2 3 VA BAIS 0 5 VDC 8 Analog Inputs 144 2 5 VA 8Al4 0 10 VDC 8 Analog Inputs 148 2 3 VA 4RO1 4 Latching Relay Outputs 156 2 7 VA 4PO1 4 KYZ Pulse Outputs 160 2 7 VA 8DI1 8 Status Inputs Wet Dry 164 1 0 VA DISPLAYS VA RATINGS P4ON LED Display 8 VA P60N Touch Screen Display 5 VA 10 5 1 Additional Power Source for I O Modules Available power for All Ports of the EPM 9450 9650 is 12 VA The EPM 9800 Power Supply will NOT SUPPLY POWER TO THE I O MODULES You must use a power source such as the PSIO 12V for additonal I Os connected to the EPM 9450 9650 and for ANY I Os connected to the EPM 9800 RS 485 communication is viable for up to 4000 feet 1219 meters GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 5 I O MODULES FACTORY SE
209. computer You may only connect to one location at a time gt To change to a different location you must first disconnect from the current location by clicking on the Disconnect button or by selecting Disconnect from the Connection menu gt Click Connect The computer connects to the meter via the network When GE Communicator EXT has located the device s at that location the Device Status screen appears confirming the connection see section 2 9 for details The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters 2 5 4 Adding New Devices Meters at one Location gt To add or remove devices to the network click on the Add button gt To remove a device select and click Remove 2 18 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION gt Ifyou are adding a device click on Edit to change the device Name Address and or Description The following screen will appear Connection Manager Location Device Editor Device Properties Address Name Device 1 Description Protocol Modbus RTU Device Type EPM 6450 Comm Port Ss i Ethernet Gateway Port 2 EPM 9450 9650 Port 3 EPM 9800 of the Internal Network Option meter is used to add multiple additional units Additional units must be configured to speak Modbus RTU and set to the same Baud Rate up to 115200 as the Internal Network Option meter set in sec
210. converts all response Modbus RTU messages into Modbus ASCII protocol and send out to the modem Some of the fixed parameters for the Ethernet Modem gateway port are 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit The Ethernet Modem gateway port s baud rate and delay time are configurable The modem has three operational modes 1 Modem Command Mode Invisible to users Modem is idle waiting for incoming call User Command Mode Visible to users If modem password protection is enabled the user can enter the password in this mode so that the modem can grant him access In addition the user can query the modem for its boot and runtime firmware version modem identification information Passthrough Mode Normal Operation mode Modbus requests and responses are passed through the modem GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION Table 6 1 INP102 Settings Setting Description Inactivity Timeout Limits Minutes In Passthrough Mode if the user does not send anything to the modem the modem will disconnect when this Inactivity Timeout Limit has been reached Rings to Answer Rings The modem will answer the call after a certain number of rings Identification User defined modem ID up to 32 characters Password User defined modem password up to 16 characters Enable Password Option to enable or disable modem password feature
211. creen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Energy Scaling line The following set of screens appears Energy Scale Settings Set Re gt Using the EPM 9800 Energy Scale Setting screens the user can select the Number of Digits Decimal Point Placement and Energy Unit for displayed readings gt Click on the tabs to navigate between screens except for Global Settings Click on Global Settings to access that screen e Energy Watt Hour Above VA Hour VAR Hour e Uncompensated Energy VA Watt and VAR readings not adjusted by Transformer Loss Compensation GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 25 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER Ene rgy Scale Se Scale Settings Quadrant 1 4 Wh Quadrant 2 3 Wh Quadrant 1 2 3 4 VAh Quadrant 1 2 VARh Quadrant 3 4 VARh e Test Mode Energy Energy Readings while in Test Mode Energy Scale Settings St Re Quadrant 1 4 Wh Quadrant 2 3 Wh Quadrant 1 2 3 4VAh Quadrant 1 2 VARh Quadrant 3 4 VARh e Pulse Accumulation Accumulators Aggregators GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS Energy Scale Settings Pa tion e land V Squared T Readings I T Data will not accumulate until Current reaches programmed level V T Data stops accumulating when Voltage falls below
212. creen above be sure to read the text file accompanying the firmware files The following screen appears Enter Flash File File 1 CAWANDOWS De sktop 320eun_vI6E 107 4 7 File 2 es gt Click Next The following screen appears Flash Me Communications Parameters Address EUN RTCA 600 ES aa Ea gt Ifyou are already connected to the GE Meter disregard this screen click Next and skip to Click Start to begin the upgrade process below If you are not connected to the GE Meter gt Inthe Address field enter the Address of the GE Meter to which your computer is connected and that you want to flash upgrade GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 13 FLASH UPGRADING THE GE EXTERNAL DISPLAY 12 14 CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING gt Inthe Baud Rate field enter the baud rate of the GE Meter port to which your computer is connected and that you want to flash upgrade gt Inthe Serial Port field enter the computer s comm port you are using gt Click Next Flashing Status arming you are about to begin the Flash Process Press Start to Continue Sequence Number gt Click Start to begin the upgrade process A final warning screen appears gt Click Yes The following screen appears Display Location Through EPM 9650 x Connected to Port gt From the pull down menus select Through Meter and the port to which the External Display is connected GE COMM
213. cript Report select a script from the pull down menu GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM SCRIPTS gt Click the Report button An example of a Script Report appears in the next section GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 7 SCRIPT REPORT CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM 14 4 Script Report The Script Report provides a detail of a particular script For scripts that have many devices and or many commands the report may be quite lengthy 14 4 1 Features Print To print all or part of the report type the page numbers and click on Print e Save To save the report to a particular file click on Save Cancel To exit the report and return to the main screen click Cancel e Scroll Bar To move from page to page in the report click the Back or Forward Arrows e Zoom Use the pull down menu to select from a variety of magnifications from Thumbnail to 400 The screen capture above shows a Zoom of 100 14 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM SET UP A SCRIPT 14 5 Set Up a Script gt Inthe Script Name window type in a name for the script Each script must have a unique name If the script is not named a default name is assigned by the software Most users assign the name of the substation where the device is located as the name is not a valid character for a script gt To select a Co
214. csemnsonnns 10 18 CONFIGURING TRE RELAY COUT PLUS 5 ccsssacscpsscaciessn aea nai aA TAEA iE 10 19 USING THE DIGITAL INPUT MODULE errain i RNA 10 20 I O DEVICE STATUS QUERY I O LOCATING AN UNKNOWN ADDRESS AND BAUD RATE cceeeeeseee 10 23 LOCATOR UTILITY THROUGH METER METHOD vrisani 10 25 LOCATOR UTILITY STAND ALONE METHOD STANDALONE PROGRAMMER sinkis a a iE EE a CERVEN apauni An ferret erpreeeny tages ere tereeyreveer eeenrrerfCT Tr ENABLING PASSWORDS EEA E dL Ste cece EN E E E NN EEEN N A DEALING PAS SWARDE entenia e ERE T1 6 LOGGING ON AND OFF CRANGING FASS WORDS kiari n N A terererrrtT ret Tre 11 8 ER VIEN aa a E AN FLASH UPGRADING TRE EPM UNIT sisascsccumsiiemasicis iiaea i A FLASH UPGRADING THE GE COMM AND GE DSP FIRMWARE FLASH UPGRADING THE GE EXTERNAL DISPLAY ornmssoniniiniecironirennainiiiia GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS FLASH UPGRADING THE INFERNAL MODEM CARD scicisssscncsaiemenaannomencieas 12 16 FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION siistisi i229 13 ENERGY BILLING OVERENN sce EARD MODULE MANAGING YOUR LOAD PROFILE BASIC ENERGY MANAGEMENT 0000 BASIC ENERGY TERMS cx see leticen NEERA EO NUNE COST ALLOCATION gruan aR E LRE Cost ALLOCATIO Cost ALLOCATIO SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SETUP REQUIREMENTS FOR EPM 9450 9650 AND 9800 0 ccesssesssesssessseessesseeesee 13 7 SETUP REQUIREMENTS FOR EPM SERIES 7000 METERS c ss
215. cssssveuetescrsaccussesedeas ucecevy ava dssbsbsadeledeardosvlecctogesse PROGRAMMING TRANSFORMER LOSS COMPENSATION csssssssssssesesescsescsescsssesssenssenseens TRANSFORMER LOSS COMPENSATION FOR ENHANCED UNITS COLD LOAD PICKUP setessscicte sans tavtitettvacecsssatebdbasdesuectaavesetaeeelvaseenee CUMULATIVE DEMAND TYPE ssccsscssssssssesssesssessecsssesseesseesseess ENERGY PULSES AND ACCUMULATIONS IN THE INTERVAL ccssssesssssssseescsseessssesssncesseses P P UESEACCUMULATMONS issenensis a CENG RIMARY HOUR READINGS ROLLOVER u eeesssssesssssssessceessecsssecssesssssssessssssnsnsssssesnseeesseeseeses POWER QUALI ANDALARM SETTINGS agissant L ELECTROLOGIC RELAY CONTROL PQ THRESHOLDS WAVEFORM RECORDING ee ENS OMG OF FUCKER co ess nei ON TE E Pin tec bectveer T ER SQUARED T AND V SQUARED T THRESHOLDS scscsssesssssssesssssssesesesesssesssesssesssenssenssens HIGH SPEED INPUTS innuens nn ana TRENDING PROFILE SETTINGS AND LOAD PROFILE RECORDING sssesssssessssesssseesseees PROGRAMMING THE TRENDING LOG TIME INTERVALS scssssesscssessssecssseeeseeee PROGRAMMING THE TRENDING SETUP FOR HISTORICAL LOGS 1 AND 2 PAD MISSING RECORDS FOR HISTORICAL LOGS ssssssssssessssesssssesssssessneeeseeees ETERNAL DEVE ES epee ner operate rosette tees ANAE SET ANO RETRIEVE METER TIME sereni dauacian bdo labsiseebetsshsbawiesideaciteoe RESET METER INFORMATION sarien RE MANUAL WAVEFORM CAPT
216. ction Xiliax DSP Xili 121683 EPM 9650 60 oe 600 620 Healthy Healthy IRSNRIG 10943415 00121639 4B Ful Access Password Protection Disebled 0 3 GE Communicator EXT will find a group of I Os if they have been added together on the LA Connection Manager screen NOTE gt Click OK to to close the status screen 10 32 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES STAND ALONE PROGRAMMER gt From the I O Devices menu select Stand Alone Programmer GE Communicator EXT retrieves the current settings from the specified I O and displays them in the Module Programmer screen The contents of this screen will vary depending on the type of module in use The example below shows the Digital Output Module Programmer screen See sections 11 8 11 12 for details on the specific programming functions of each module Yigital Output External Module Programmer Module Type Digital Output Module Version 0020 Build 117 a Baud Rate Transmit Delay gt Make changes to this screen according to the needs of your application gt When you have finished configuring the address baud rate and other programmable settings click Send to send the new settings to the I O module gt Ifyou have connected a group of I O modules to the computer click Retrieve e Atthe prompt enter the address of the next module you wish to program e Click OK GE Communicator EXT will retrieve the programmable settings of t
217. ction and communication should resume about 10 seconds after the receiver was hung up The modem can still drop the connection if the noise level is too high such as with repeated pick up and hang up or noise at the receiver The performance of this mode is not guaranteed There will be no valid communication if the receiver is picked up for any substantial length of time No dial out support User cannot flash upgrade the Ethernet modem s firmware from a modem connection Modem and Ethernet connections will close if either detects a change in device profile or are forced to reset by the user from a web interface If the firmware does not detect the modem hardware the modem task will be stopped A modem status diagnostic web page can be found at diag_modem htm GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 5 8 DNP for LAN WAN SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION The original DNP 3 0 was designed for serial point to point communication e g RS 232 with limited support for half duplex serial networks e g RS 485 In order for devices to exchange DNP messages in a local LAN or wide area network WAN one must either augment the protocol to support a network environment or use an existing network transport mechanism DNP 3 0 LAN WAN was specifically defined to transport DNP traffic on the Internet Protocol Suite GE s DNP 3 0 LAN WAN implementation was based on the specifications described in
218. cumulator Primary Energy Accumulator Wor Hour Quedrent 1 4 Wot Hour Quadrant 2 3 VAR Hour Quadrants 1 2 VAR Hour Quadrants 3 4 VA Hour Quadrants 1 2 3 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER TEST MODE PRESET ACCUMULATORS t Mode Pieset Primary Energy Secondary Energy Uncompensated Energy 18 V Squared T Accumulators Cumulative Demand Secondary Primary Energy Quadrants KYZ Output Accumulators linter rs Secondary Energy Quadrants Accumulator Current Value New Value Internal Input 1 Internal Input 2 Internal Input 3 Internal Input 4 Internal Input 5 Intemal Input 6 Internal Input 7 Internal Input 8 r r r r r r r r Each screen has a Current Value New Value and Preset Box for each accumulator A new meter will have zeros for Current Values Click Tabs at the top of the screens to access the individual screens Settings can be preset for the following sets of values GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Primary Energy Secondary Energy Primary Energy Quadrants Secondary Energy Quadrants Internal Input Accumulators KYZ Output Accumulators amp V Squared T Accumulators Cumulative Demand Secondary Uncompensated Energy and Q Hours Click the Preset Boxes for the values you want to set gt Click Set or Cancel CT AND PT COMPENSATION CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 12 CT and PT Compens
219. d I x Writing the calendar to the EPM was successful Communicator will send the calendar to the meter The above pop up window will tell you that the calendar was received Click OK The meter will use the calendar for the designated year based on the date settings of your computer iy Do not enter more than one calendar for the same year lie do not store two calendars for 2005 If this occurs the meter will use the first calendar entered NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 41 UPDATE A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE 9 3 Update a TOU Calendar Profile gt From the Time of Use menu select Calendar Settings The following screen appears Select Calendar New Year Selection E ea gt Click Edit Calendar The following screen appears Load Calendar Load From Meter Load From File Cleans perry E se upcaacenseat i Cancel gt To edit a calendar saved on the computer s hard drive click Load From File Communicator EXT will ask you to locate the calendar After the calendar has loaded see section 10 2 for details on programming the calendar 5 12 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL UPDATE A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE gt To edit one of the calendars stored in the meter click Load From Meter The following screen appears EPM Time of Use Please Select a Calendar to Retrieve from EPM 9650
220. d Point columns Line and Point Numbers can also be found in the DNP Object Mapping Ch 7 of DNP V3 00 Level 2 Protocol Assignments for EPM 9650 and 9800 Rev 1 8 Example VA hour has Line Number 133 and Point Number 0 in the DNP Object Mapping gt Write those numbers into the Object 20 Binary Counter window of GE Communicator EXT When the Line and Point Numbers are written the software fills in the description on the screen gt Repeat for each desired Binary Counter Point gt Update the device The meter scans those points every second GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL lo 7 BINARY COUNTER OBJECT 20 16 8 CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT Scaling A meter can measure its Binary Counter value using up to a 16 digit number 0 to 9 999 999 999 999 999 DNP Binary Counter Points use up to 32 bits That means that the range is 0 to 4 294 967 295 OxOFFFFFFFF This maximum number is only a 10 digit number In order to deal with a 16 digit number Scaling is necessary Scaling is used to select a unit in powers of 10 1 x10 2 x100 and so on The Scaling value can be 0 to 15 Example If the value inside the meter is 3 000 000 and a Scaling value of 2 x100 is used the Binary Counter value will be reported as 30000 The actual value is 30000x100 3 000 000 Delta Object 22 Any DNP Static Point can be configured to create DNP Event Points Delta and Cl
221. d Rate Port Protocol Flow Control Network 9600 x Modbus RTU em a a gt Enter settings for Serial Port Connection GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL In the Device Address field enter the address of the device s port to which the computer is connected Meters are programmed for your specific applications Some EPM 9800 units are shipped programmed with the following preset addresses and baud rates 2 3 DIRECT SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER Port 1 Address 1 57600 baud first time connection leave Address set at 1 Port 2 Address 1 57600 baud fixed Optical Port on EPM 9800 Port 3 Address 1 9600 baud EPM 9450 9650 Only for External Display or I O Modules Port 4 Address 1 57600 baud Master Slave for External I O Modules J You may use a connected External Display to view each port s baud rate address and 4 communication protocol See the meter s Installation and Operation Manuals for details sai See Chapter 3 EPM 9450 9650 Chapter 4 EPM 9800 and Chapter 5 EPM 4000 5000 6000 7000 Series Meters for details of how to configure the meter s communication ports gt Inthe Baud Rate field enter a baud rate that matches the baud rate of the device s port to which your computer is connected The port s baud rate address and protocol must always match the baud rate address and protocol of the computer gt Inthe Ser
222. d Ve since the last reset and the time of the last reset GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 7 SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE CHAPTER 15 FLICKER e Current Pet Min values for Vg Vp and Ve since the last reset and the time of the last reset The following screen is displayed EN 50160 Ficker Ai Santanu StarV Reset Stop p a ae A Volts Current Volts Next PST Next PLT Volts Max Volts Status Manx Volts Max Volts C Frequency Base Min Volts Current j Min Volts Min Volts C Base Voltage Flicker Monitoring So EF EJ Eo Long Term Readings gt Click on the Long Term tab to access the Py readings The screen below displays three groups of P values Pit Readings Displayed e Current Py values for Va Vp and Ve and the time of computation e Current Py Max values for Va Vp and Ve since the last reset and the time of the last reset 15 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 FLICKER SOFTWARE USER INTERFACE e Current P Min values for Va Vp and V since the last reset and the time of the last reset EN 50160 Flicker OO S nstantaneous Short Tern StarVReset Stop ae as Lae Volts Current on EP a Next PST Next PLT Volts Max Volts Status _ Mnx Volts Volts B Mox Volts F requency Base Min Volts Current Min Volts Min Volts C Base Voltage Flicker Monitoring GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 9 L
223. d a unique address to each module see section 11 6 Each module s address must be unique otherwise communication will not function properly GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES ENTERING I O MODULES IN THE EPM METER S DEVICE PROFILE You may now configure the modules using the Edit buttons See the following sections 11 8 11 12 for details on how to configure each type of module gt Check the Table of Contents for the type of module you want to configure and read the corresponding section gt After you have configured all modules click OK iy Log Limit ID is an internal identification based on the order in which the modules are entered into the profile NOTE Verifying Module Existence Searching for Module at address 132 Please Wait The EPM Meter will begin to look for the modules at the addresses listed If all are present the main Device Profile screen will appear If an incorrect address is given a screen appears and the changes are rejected Determine the correct address of any missing I O using the Query I O function section 11 14 Port 4 Only or the Locator Utility section 11 15 11 16 and enter the correct information in the External Devices section of the meter s Device Profile You MUST now Update the EPM Meter s Device Profile to enter the Modules gt Click on Update Device This sends the new Device Profile with the I O information to the EPM Met
224. d is calculated User configurable visual indication of data in a meter A robust non proprietary protocol based on existing open standards DNP 3 0 is used to operate between various systems in electric and other utility industries and SCADA networks EPM 9450 supports Level 1 EPM 9650 amp 9800 support Level 2 Nonvolatile memory Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory that retains its data during a power outage without need for a battery Also refers to meter s FLASH memory Programmable record that monitors any energy quantity Example Watthours VARhours VAhours A type of LAN network connection that connects two or more devices on a common communications backbone An Ethernet LAN consists of at least one hub device the network backbone with multiple devices connected to it in a star configuration The most common versions of Ethernet in use are 10BaseT GE Multilin Glossary 3 and 100BaseT as defined in IEEE 802 3 standards However several other versions of Ethernet are also available Error Code Modbus communication transmitted in a packet from the Slave to the Master if the Slave has encountered an invalid command or other problem GLOSSARY 3 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY 4 Flicker Form Harmonics Heartbeat Pulse l T Threshold Infrared Test Pulse Integer Internal Modem Invalid Register ITIC Curve Ke kWh KYZ Output LCD LED Master Device Maximum Demand
225. d to days only For example if you want to view data from January 1 2005 3 00pm to February 23 2005 6 00am enter 1 1 2005 in the Start Date field and 2 24 2005 in End Date field Make sure the dates are with the range of the Available Energy Data start and end dates Otherwise the graphs will not be correct Select Parameters A list of Energy Billing Module meters will be displayed in the pull down menu in this section Select a meter from which you want to retrieve data Refresh Graph gt Click on Refresh Graph to start retrieving graphs for the dates and parameters selected DO NOT click anywhere on the spreadsheet while the system is in Calculation Mode GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE DEMAND GRAPHS Demand Graph This graph shows the Demand History Demand data is collected every 15 minutes from the Energy Billing Module meter Energy Billing Module GE Multilin nergy data available from 5 14 2002 to 6 12 2002 Demand Graph oF ee F FO FF OF SF FS GH PELAR ALADEL LLE Date Profile by Day Graph upper right This graph shows the Daily Peak Demand for the period you selected kWh Usage by Day Graph lower right This graph shows the Aggregated Daily Usage kWh for the period you selected Generic load information is displayed at the bottom of the screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 13 DEMAND STATISTICS CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING
226. d using the following formulas P 1s P 7 P 1 P 1 5 3 EQ 15 2 P 3s P 2 2 P 3 P 4 3 EQ 15 3 P 10s P 6 P 8 P 10 P 13 P 17 5 EQ 15 4 P 5Os P 30 P 50 P 80 3 EQ 15 5 The 3 second memory time constant in the flicker meter ensures that P 0 1 cannot change abruptly and no smoothing is needed for this percentile 15 2 3 Long Term Flicker Evaluation The 10 minute period on which the short term flicker severity is based is suitable for short duty cycle disturbances For flicker sources with long and variable duty cycles e g arc furnaces it is necessary to provide criteria for long term assessment For this purpose the long term Plt is derived from the short term values over an appropriate period By definition this is 12 short term values of 10 minutes each over a period of 2 hours The following formula is used 3 ti C EQ 15 6 Where Pg i 1 2 3 are consecutive readings of the short term severity Pot Summary Flicker Changes in the illumination of light sources due to cyclical voltage variations Pinst Instantaneous flicker values in Perceptibility Units PU Ps Value based on 10 minute analysis Py Value based on 12 Pa values Measurement Procedure 1 Original Signal with amplitude variations 2 Square demodulator 3 Weighted filter 4 Low pass filter 1st order 5 Statistical computing GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 3 THEO
227. d values Refer to EPM DNP Manual Revision 1 4 for details gt Click Enable DNP Time Sychronization if you would like to set the time through DNP When Time Synchronization is Enabled a Sync Interval pull down menu appears The Sync Interval can be set from 1 Minute up to 1 Day in 1 minute intervals The Factory Initial Setting is 1 Day The EPM 9450 meter initiates the Time Synchronization sequence by sending the appropriate response to the Master connected to the meter The meter continues to synchronize time by sending the appropriate response to the Master every time the Selected Interval is reached gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter Example The DNP Level 1 screen shown here displays a selection of 1 Second Readings from Port 1 with No Class selected A Class can be assigned to certain readings Those readings will be collected by an RTU or similar device and displayed on your PC Other readings will be displayed in other classes at other frequencies or not at all 32g GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS 3 3 8 Custom Modbus Map The Custom Modbus Map for EPM 9650 can position up to 256 Registers or the equivalent of 2K whichever is lower to readily provide the functionality you wan
228. date time and an end date time the state being displayed is and out of normal state If a record does not show the start time date or the end date time this means that at the time of the log conversion by the Log Converter it could not find the start or end record This situation can be caused by log rollover and or other interruptions Without a start or end record this will not be a complete record and no duration will be calculated iy Module Index 0 refers to HSI Internal Meter Inputs NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 41 CONTROL OUTPUT LOG RELAYS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 18 Control Output Log Relays The Control Output Log Relay Log displays the relay change status for a selected meter file and time range To view the Control Output Log gt From the Log Viewer select a Meter Database File and set a Time Range gt Click on the Control Output Log button or View Data gt Control Output Relays This screen appears There are three stages in the relay process Stage 1 Trigger Stage 2 Command Stage 3 Acknowledgement Stage 1 The change relay state process starts Stage 2 A meter responds to the change relay request and sends out the change relay command to the relay device Stage 3 The meter gets a response back from the relay device A complete record should have all three stages date time stamp The Start State is the relay state at the time of the Trigger The End State is
229. dit a window will appear to remind you to select a command gt Click OK V Select a command gt Click Edit The command you choose will determine the screen that appears 14 11 1 Edit an Advanced script command If you selected an EPM 9450 9650 or 9800 script command to edit the following window will appear Edit Script Coca Device D002 EPM 9000 Series 1 Device_2 E Number of Retries o Primary Commands Secondary Commands o o o m m 0 o O o o When you edit an advanced device the Primary Command will be Retrieve and the Secondary Commands will be a selection of logs gt Using the windows available select or deselect the item s you would like to change gt Make the changes gt Click OK 14 18 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM EDIT A SCRIPT COMMAND 14 11 2 Editing a Data Switch or System Device command If you select a Data Switch or System Device Command to edit the following screen will appear EditScript Command Device D000 System Device _ Number of Retries jo Primary Commands Send switch string Secondary Commands If you edit a Data Switch or System Device Command the Primary Command will be Send Switch String and the Secondary Commands will request a System Data Switch String A tool tip screen will display special characters to be used in the Data Switch Strings amp line fe
230. dresses can be configured in the poll_profile xml file gt Access those settings from Device Profile gt Communication Ports gt Advanced Settings gt Click the Services tab The Services screen appears gt Enable Disable the sending of Email by clicking SMTP Client The Initial Setting is OFF GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 15 SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS gt Click on the Alarm Email tab The screen appears as it is shown here a Advanced Network Option Settings ae rAlarm Email Enter the settings below to configure Alarm Email service Alarm Email Settings e SMTP Server IP or Name Requires DNS Setup e Email Server Port Number 25 e Administrator Email Address To Address for user preferred address or any monitoring software receive address such as GE Multilin s Dial In Server e Return Reply From Address e Subject Text any 6 5 6 FTP Client This feature allows the user to substitute his own user defined polling profile web pages or graphics for the web server User should set up an FTP Server nearby with a user account and read only access for this purpose gt Access the Advanced Network Card Settings see above gt Click the Services tab The Services screen appears gt Enable Disable the sending of Email by clicking FTP Client The Initial Setting is OFF 6 16 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL
231. e generator and bus where the Vay is the generator Aux box and the Vaux phaser will be displayed The Vaux phasor is referenced to VA phase 7 24 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS gt From the buttons at the bottom of the screen click on Options A pop up window Phasor Diagram Options appears Phasor Diagram Options a Display Yoltage Phase To Phase Readings When In Wye Configuration Display Angles Increasing _ 9 Clockwise Counter Clockwise Phasor Rotation ___ Clockwise Counter Clockwise OK gt Check Display Voltage Phase to Phase Readings When In Wye Configuration if you want to include that reading in the graph gt Inthe Display Angles Increasing and Phasor Rotation boxes select either Clockwise or Counter Clockwise gt From the pull down menu at the bottom of the screen select Vectors Triangles or Vectors and Triangles to change the graphic representation of the data gt Click OK to save your selections and return to the main Phasors screen Use the Buttons at the bottom of the screen to complete the following tasks gt Click Copy to save a copy of the screen to the clipboard gt Click Print to send a copy of the graph to a printer gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS CHA
232. e RR Sm SIN my Help You must set up an address protocol device type and a unique name for each device Optional settings for each device are passwords for an EPM 9450 9650 or 9800 When GE Communicator EXT retrieves a log from a device and it does not have a predefined name it will use the device name assigned here as the file name for the retrieved log If you have a name already designated in the device the device name shown here will not be used Note The EPM7000 Series meters will use the name shown here GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt Add an EPM 9450 9650 or 9800 gt Type in a unique Device Name gt Under Device Information type in a unique Address gt To select a protocol use the pull down menu Select Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII or Modbus TCP El Protocol V To select a Type of device use the pull down menu V Click your selection Add Level 1 Password and or Level 2 Password if desired Not required 14 13 ADDING A SCRIPT DEVICE CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM The device you choose will determine what data is required for this screen When you add Ww a device passwords are not required Also Data Switch Strings will probably not be necesssary Data Switch Strings tell GE Communicator EXT how to connect to and disconnect when a data switch is present It already knows how to connect to a single device NOTE Add Edt Script Device Script Connection type Remote
233. e a connection make sure your communication settings match those shown here NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 1 EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 2 EPM 6000 Configuration The EPM 6000 meter can be configured using the meter Face Buttons Menu Enter Down and Right or the software GE Communicator EXT using the IrDA port Com 1 on the face of the meter or the RS 485 port Com 2 on the back panel of the meter Hardware installation and Face Button Configuration are detailed in the EPM 6000 Installation and Operation Manual Once a wired or wireless connection is established and the GE Communicator EXT 3 0 software is installed in your computer you can begin to communicate between your computer and the meter 5 2 1 Quick Connect Quick Connect is the easiest way to connect GE Communicator EXT to your meter gt From the GE Communicator EXT Menu click Quick Connect or click on the Connect Icon The Connect screen appears Serial Port Network Device Address a7 Baud Rate 9600 X Port COM1 v Protocol Modbus RTU None z Configure the Connect Screen gt Click on Serial Port or Network The Initial Settings for the meter appear on the screen If you have a Licensed version of GE Communicator EXT you can change any of the settings y If you have a demo version you cannot change the Device Address it must be 1 NOTE Settings Device Address 1
234. e and responds to the request A Slave Device cannot initiate communication A voltage quality event during which the RMS voltage is higher than normal for a period of time typically from 1 2 cycle to 1 minute Total Harmonic Distortion is the combined effect of all harmonics measured in a voltage or current The THD number is expressed as a percent of the fundamental For example a 3 THD indicates that the magnitude of all harmonic distortion measured equals 3 of the magnitude of the fundamental 60Hz quantity A stored representation of the time of an event Time Stamp can include year month day hour minute and second and Daylight Savings Time indication Time of Use VA Watt and VAR readings not adjusted by Transformer Loss Compensation Data will stop accumulating when voltage falls below programmed level The ratio of the voltage on a phase to the average voltage on all phases An instance of abnormal voltage on a phase The events the meter will track include sags swells interruptions and imbalances The Voltage Transformer Ratio is used to scale the value of the voltage to the primary side of an instrument transformer Also referred to as PT Ratio GLOSSARY 7 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Voltage Vab Vab Vbc Vca are all Phase to Phase voltage measurements These voltages are measured between the three phase voltage inputs to the meter Voltage Van Van Vbn Vcn are all Phase to Neutral voltages applied to
235. e to update the Runtime Boot firmware After the update is completed the message Update Completed will appear in the sub window gt To Change the Username and Password type in the Current Username and Password then the New Username and Password INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 47 UPDATE NETWORK CARD FIRMWARE FROM GE COMMUNICATOR EXT CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS The Initial Username and Password are GE Multilinnet and inp100 You will not be able to change the Username and Password unless you know the Current Username and Password A screen will ask Are you sure you want to change the Username and Password If you click Change Password a note in the sub window will confirm the Password changes gt To close the Network Card Runtime Update window click OK GE Communicator EXT will update the meter After approximately one minute the network will resume its normal functions fi It is VERY IMPORTANT to store the passwords in a safe place and to change them g frequently NOTE 6 48 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS WEBXML FLOW CHART 6 10 WebXML Flow Chart INP 100 CONFIGURATION 10 100BaseT Ethernet Card ACCESSING DATA I WebXML Setup your FTP server create an All polled data are stored in XML File poll_data xml FTP client programs Web browsers IE etc User software MS Excel etc user account with read only access for devices configure poll_profile xml 1
236. ecial circumstances the meter can be ordered with one amp current transformers This will give the meter a range of 0 1 amps with an additional over range of 1 amp This option is used where 1A IEC meters are required or extended low current performance is needed and higher current performance is not needed This option is not used for most 1A GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL s 8 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER installations The standard Meter has the capability of very accurability monitoring 1A loads and providing extended current overload This section shows how to change the CT Ratios in the Meter ONLY EPM 9450 Hardware Rev A to reflect the hardware change Standard 5 amp input one wind around internal meter toroid Modified 1 amp input 5 winds around internal meter toroid In order to maintain maximum accuracy with one 1 amp current inputs the wire is wound around the internal toroids five 5 times instead of the usual one time This effectively multiplies the current input by five 5 times to maintain maximum resolution Configuring CT Ratios with Modification Number M10 0 EPM 9450 Hardware Rev A EPM 9650 and other Hardware Revs adjust internally for the hardware change Because the GE Communicator EXT sees the one 1 amp input as five 5 amps it is necessary to configure the CT secondary to five 5 amps Example Normal One Amp
237. ect section 2 3 e RS 485 Modem Connect section 2 3 e RS 485 Internal Modem Option section 2 4 e RS 485 Internal Network Option section 2 6 Direct Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use either Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII protocol Modbus RTU is recommended Modem Connections Internal or External made through GE Communicator EXT must use Modbus ASCII only Network Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use Modbus TCP Section 2 5 details connecting to multiple meters on an RS 485 bus Consult the meter s Installation and Operation Manual for details of the hardware requirements for each configuration EPM 9650 and EPM 9800 include customizable DNP V3 00 Level 2 If you are using the Connection Manager to connect a PC to a meter you may want to copy the Connection Manager Settings to other PCs Simply copy the file Cnexcom mdb from Computer A to Computer B using the same directory for source and destination Use the following steps GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER gt Using the originate computer go to the drive where the file is installed For example C Program Files GE GE Communicator directory gt Copy the file Cnexcom mdb this is the database that contains the Connection Manager Settings gt Replace the Cnexcom mdb file on the destination computer with the copy from the previous step 5 Make sure GE Communicator EXT is not
238. ed carriage return Select or deselect to make changes Click OK 14 11 3 Editing a EPM Device command If you have an EPM7000 Series meter connected to the GE Script amp Scheduler the above screen will appear slightly different The editing process is the same as for an EPM 9450 9650 or 9800 device GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 19 DELETE A SCRIPT COMMAND CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM 14 12 Delete a Script Command gt Select a command you would like to delete by clicking on it gt Click the Delete button A window will appear Script Scheduler 3 0 15 E A Are you sure you want to delete this command Click Yes or No gt Click Close to return to the main script screen A nother warning window will appear gt Click Yes or No to return to the Set Up Script screen gt Click Close to return to the main Scheduler screen 14 20 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM ADD SCRIPTS TO THE SCHEDULER 14 13 Add Scripts to the Scheduler Once you have created the scripts they have to be added to the Scheduler From there the Scheduler sends the scripts to GE Communicator EXT to be executed It is at this stage that you set the time and interval for the automatic data retrieval GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt First Stop the Scheduler Weekly Day of week Sunday Time 30439 PM 5 9 2001 3 0
239. el gt Click Update EPM to send the calendar to the meter The following screen appears M TOU Setup Current EPM 9650 TOU Status Value s Passed 2008 Passed No date set Passed No billing dates set 4 Passed Daily profile sot after 8 1 2006 Register Names Warning Register name not set for RI A4 AS R6 R7 AB s Warning Schedule name not set for S4 S5 S6 57 S8 S9 S10 Passed Daily Setup _ Before updating the meter GE Communicator EXT checks that the data entered is valid It will warn you if any data is not correct If one of the Status Screens fails GE Communicator EXT not let you update the device A pop up screen will tell you that it is an Invalid Calendar Click OK You will return to the Edit Calendar screen to create another calendar gt Click Continue The following screen appears EPM 9650 Time of Use Please Select a Nexus Calendar Slot to Send to Calendar 1 2002 Calendar 2 0000 Calendar 3 0000 Calendar 4 0000 Calendar 5 0000 Calendar 6 0000 9 Calendar 7 0000 Calendar 8 0000 Calendar 9 0000 Calendar 10 0000 Calendar 11 2001 Calendar 12 0000 Calendar 13 0000 Calendar 14 0000 Calendar 15 0000 Calendar 16 0000 Calendar 17 0000 Calendar 18 0000 Calendar 19 0000 Calendar 20 0000 gt Select the slot you would like to use GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE gt Click Sen
240. elay to access the programming screen gt To select a different relay click on the pull down menu in the upper right corner of the screen gt Click on your selection GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 29 POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 4 6 Poll Internal Inputs To view Internal Input data for the currently connected device gt Select Poll Internal Inputs from the Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms menu The Internal Inputs screen appears U gA ei Ch By RP U Status 1 HSI Input 1 2 HSI Input 2 3 HSI Input 3 4 HSI Input 4 8 HSI Input 8 Polling 00121689 yon es gt To change this screen in any way Click OK to return to the GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click on Edit Profile See sections 3 5 6 and 4 5 6 for details 7 30 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS 7 4 7 Poll External Digital Inputs To view the polling screens for the External Digital Inputs gt Select Poll External Digital Inputs from the Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms menu The following screen appears External Digital Inputs _ Counters mi Polling 00121689 Information appearing on the screen will include e Input number e Name given to the device e State and Transitions With the buttons on the right side of the screen you can use the pull down menu to Reset Counters or Cop
241. en replacing New Location 2 3 4 Handling Multiple Locations If you already have several locations on your List of Locations gt To add additional locations click on the Add Button gt To sort locations use the pull down menu to select a sort method A to Z Z to A Newest gt Oldest or Oldest gt Newest and click Sort By gt To remove locations select and click Remove gt Click once on the location to which you would like to connect your computer You may only connect to one location at a time gt To change to a different location you must first disconnect from the current location by clicking on the Disconnect button or by selecting Disconnect from the Connection menu gt Choose your new location gt Click Connect The computer begins dialing When GE Communicator EXT has located the GE meter s at the selected location the Device Status screen appears confirming the connection see section 2 8 for details The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters 2 8 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 MODEM CONNECTIONS 2 3 5 Setting Up the Originate Computer Modem gt Inthe Com Port field enter the computer s communication port connected to the computer s modem the originate modem gt Inthe Baud Rate field enter a baud rate for the computer s modem that will match the b
242. en Label Closed Label Normal State La lt lt a Ca a CL cc a Cc cc a CL lt a a lt lt a Ca SC gt Enter Channel Label Open Label Closed Label and Normal State for each input gt Click OK when done gt Click on the Module Settings button The following screen will appear reflecting the settings for Address Baud Rate and Transmission Delay fi If you are using a Digital Input module with a EPM Meter you only need to enter the module in the EPM Meter s Device Profile section 11 7 and configure the screen e above you do not need to configure the module further unless you want to change the roll over The module s Roll Over should always match the Roll Over of the device to which the module is connected The Digital Input s default Roll Over parameters are set for use with a EPM Meter therefore they do not need to be changed 10 20 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES USING THE DIGITAL INPUT MODULE Digital Input External Module Programmer Module Type Digital Input Module J Version 0014 Build 106 Address Transmit Delay ooms Zf Digital Input LIII 99999999 Ee 99999999 III 39999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 To change the I O s Transmit Delay you must use the Stand Alone Programmer section 11 17 gt Assign a Roll Over to each relay based on the needs of your application If the module is connected to a EPM Meter you do no
243. en appears internal CTZ Output Accensulation Accumalator Channel Hour Reading Wh per pulse HO LED Juvad 1 4 Volhou j fnn This screen is read only It displays the readings from the KYZ Output Relays Internal KYZ Outputs are configured in sections 3 4 3 and 4 4 3 gt To change any of the settings that effect the readings click OK You will return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click Edit Profile gt Double click on the appropriate screen to access settings and make adjustments gt Click OK to exit this screen and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 7 20 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REVENUE ENERGY AND DEMAND READINGS 7 3 6 Total Average Power Factor To view Total Average Power Factor from the device connected to your computer gt Select Total Average Power Factor from the Real Time Poll gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings menu The following screen appears Quadrant 1 4 Quadrant 2 3 a Equation used to compute the Total Average Power Factor Quadrant 1 4 Oeodramt 2 OK cai This is a read only screen Readings are based on Power Factor settings from the Device Profile of the connected device gt To make changes on this screen click OK and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Inthe Device Profile make changes to Maximum and Minimum Power settings gt Click OK to return to the main GE
244. ents Pee e 3 lt Fesda Hex Fie hex z Cancel My Network P I bnadi amp 12 17 FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL MODEM CARD CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING fi In this example the hex file is in a file on the desktop The hex file may be stored anywhere LA in your system on disk or CD This screen browses your system to find the file NOTE gt Locate the firmware file on your computer You will need only one file hex file for the Internal Modem Upgrade File names and formats may vary from the example screen above Be sure to read the text accompanying the firmware files gt Select the file name and click Open Internal Modem Flash Programmer SUE Uploading Programming Line 18 Checksum OK Program Flash The program automatically uploads the data Lines 1 and 2 of the Status window display the progress of the upgrade When the Flash Upgrade is complete the Status window will say Flash has been Programmed and the Checksum verification window appears Vernty Checksum Checksum 9D27 Is this Correct gt Click Yes If you click No the Flash will fail gt Click Exit to exit the program and return to the Main screen 12 18 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION 12 6 Flash Upgrading the Internal Network Option Flash upgrading the Internal Network Ethernet Option takes approximately 30 minutes gt Contact GE to recei
245. ependent out of limit information creating a sequence of events for any occurrence Event Triggered Waveform Log EPM 7000 Series The Event Triggered Waveform log records a waveform when a user programmable value goes out of limit and when the value returns to normal All information is time stamped to the nearest 1 msec A new feature for interharmonic analysis observes further frequencies GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 1 OVERVIEW 8 2 CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS Power Quality CBEMA Log This log records magnitude and duration of voltage and current surges and sags for every power quality PQ event The associated waveform is also recorded Status Change Input Log Included in EPM 7000 Series Event I O Log This log displays the input change status for a selected meter file and time range Control Output Relay Log Included in EPM 7000 Series Event I O Log This log displays the relay change status for a selected meter file and time range AiReports AiReports 2 0 is an optional power quality analysis software package used in conjunction with meter Logs It provides a comprehensive report on the status of the equipment being monitored it uses artificial intelligence to diagnose PQ events and provide the possible cause of the event System Events Log The log records system events for security and anti tampering The following is the general sequence for working with all logs 1 Program parameters
246. er gt Click Report to print out a copy of the I O information V Click Save to save these parameters to your computer gt Click Load to enter a previously saved set of parameters GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 11 CONFIGURING THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 8 Configuring the Analog Output Module gt Be sure each module has a unique address and is connected to the EPM 9450 9650 Meter s port 3 or 4 or the EPM 9800 Meter s Port 4 at the same baud rate as the port 57600 recommended see section 11 6 gt Retrieve the External I O Modules section of the Device Profile from the EPM Meter see Chapter 3 9450 9650 or Chapter 4 EPM 9800 for more detail on the Device Profile and section 11 7 gt After you have entered the type of Analog Output Module in the Type column and its address in the assigned address column click on the Edit button in the EPM Meter Settings column The following screen appears Device Profile Analog Output Output Assigned item Click Item to Change eee hase Angles Phase AN Voltage lot Assigned lot Assigned lot Assigned lot Assigned at Assigned lot Assigned lot Assigned Channel Update z For Pulse Accumulators and Aggregator Block Window Average 8 Byte data only please choose 4 of the 8 bytes you want to map to the Analog outputs EE EI Es gt From the pull down menus select the type of reading and the channel to which it w
247. er steps can be taken using Cost Allocation By submetering one of your primary fixed costs electricity becomes a variable cost that can be accurately allocated 13 3 1 Cost Allocation Steps e Determine cost centers e Use submeters to monitor usage at each cost center e Assign accountability and offer incentives for departments within a facility to reduce their own energy usage e Determine equipment and system efficiency within cost centers e Make sure Tenant Billing accurately reflects usage 13 3 2 Cost Allocation System e One computer at primary facility e Anumber of low cost high quality meters to monitor usage at each cost center e A simple network connecting the meters to the computer e Energy Billing Module 13 6 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 13 4 System Configuration The basic Energy Billing Module System consists of the following components Hardware A dedicated Energy Billing Module PC or Laptop A Unicom RS 232 485 Converter At least one Energy Billing Module meter Software GE Communicator EXT Software meter programming and communication Energy Billing Module with MS Excel Macros iy MS Excel 97 or later must be installed in the computer NOTE 13 4 1 Setup Requirements for EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 1 GE Communicator EXT Software 2 GE Log Converter Software 3 GE_Multilin_EBM EBM DB template database file 4 EPM 9450
248. erall energy cost The Energy Billing Module is a Visual Basic macro that runs inside MS Excel The module contains three worksheets e Demand Graphs Graphical presentations of demand and energy usage information e Demand Statistics Statistical data and analysis on demand and energy e Bill Verification Calculate and verify your electrical utility cost based on a utility rate structure Start up First make sure that your meter is connected to the PC To start the Energy Billing Module simply go to the bottom left corner of your Windows main screen and click through the following gt Start gt Programs gt GE Applications gt Log Viewer The Log Viewer screen appears gt Click Bill button MS Excel will start automatically A message box will appear to ask if you want to enable the macros gt Click on Enable Macros Your screen will display the Demand Graphs screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 11 DEMAND GRAPHS CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE 13 8 Demand Graphs 13 12 v NOTE v NOTE First make sure that the CAM Logger is running at the bottom of your screen Available Energy Data will be shown above the Demand Graph indicating the start and end dates of the data If you just installed the system No Data Available will appear in this section Select Date Range To view the graphs enter your start and end dates in the Start Date and End Date fields Ranges are limite
249. ers g P e fl Feces FlashFie in Coel My Neiwo P T a eden 4 In this example the ini file is in a file on the desktop The ini file may be stored in your y system on disk or on CD Use the Look In window at the top of the screen to browse your system Locate the firmware file on your computer You will need two files ini and hex files for the Internal Network Upgrade Both files must be in the same directory File names and formats may vary from the example screen above Be sure to read the text accompanying the firmware files 12 20 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION gt Select the file name and click Open A screen will appear Flashing Nexus Option Is this what you want to Flash Release E126 9 2 2 2 hex gt Click Yes The program automatically uploads the data Lines 2 and 3 of the Status window and the Status Bar below them display the progress of the upgrade It will automatically retrieve the Checksum from the device Again flash uploading takes about 30 minutes niemal lietwork Option Flash Programmes status Uploading Programming Writing Line 7678 of 14368 Time to Completion 15 min 06 sec Enter Command Mode Program Flash Boot Version Firmware Version Current Mode When the Flash Upgrade is complete the Status window will say The
250. erter is required to create an RS 232 serial connection gt For EPM 9450 9650 move the switch beneath Port 1 to select RS 232 no converter is required Make sure that the meter is connected to your network and is operating properly This screen is not supported by meters with the INP10 Option gt Close the Device Status window gt Select from the menu bar Tools Network Card Settings The Network Card Run Time Update screen appears see below gt Make sure there is a check mark in the checkbox at the top of the window for Communicate through Meter If there is no check click on the box gt Click Connect at the top left of the window Progress is shown in a sub window at the bottom of the screen When connected the Boot Version window lists data about the Network board A blinking red bar at the bottom of the window and a pinging sound will remind the user that the meter is now in Boot Mode and the meter is not available to other users via the Internet GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS UPDATE NETWORK CARD FIRMWARE FROM GE COMMUNICATOR EXT GE COMMUNICATOR EXT Connect F Communicate through Nexus Boot Version Copynght 2002 Electro Indunines Baugel ech BIG Al yo Reseved 100 ColF re MCF5272 E18 10 100 Base T Netwerk uriese Femume ve 1 Br d 20 Check sean 0753 Cenc Oeste oot Fame v1 0 Build 38 Checkoum Ox 144 Length 028418 lash Memory Soe
251. erview GE Script amp Scheduler software program serves as a stand alone module for the GE Communicator EXT software package The GE Script amp Scheduler program is Automated Data Retrieving and Processing software which automatically retrieves data from GE Power Meters With this easy to use application you can set up multiple scripts and schedules that command an GE device to automatically execute scheduled scripts retrieve stored data files from installed devices and manage batch log conversions The data retrieved and converted by the Scheduler as well as other retrieved data is in Access format and can be viewed in the device Log Viewer t Sohedsler Ache Scrip WYTOOT PIESOPM PYT ISSI PM tOO 35053 AARONI 42259Pa4 94200 AROA PM Newscript Weekly Day otweek Sunday Time 2S1 53 PM 1 9200 34153 PM New script6 Oniy Time 40025 PM 8 4 2001 401 14 PM 44 2001 41519 PM 942001 401S9FM ATUTO 43050 PM Scheduler running IWIN 43175 PM Scheduler stopped AUTON 431 27 PM Scheduler a prag GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 1 OVERVIEW 14 2 14 1 1 Features CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM This is the main screen for the Scheduler This one screen gives you an overview of the program by displaying the current active scripts and the current status and it provides the links to all the programming features in the sections at the bottom of the screen There are two supporting programs GE Communicator EX
252. es Harmonic Phases External Analog Inputs Time of Use Binary States Action Block Time Stamps Energy and Pulses in the Interval Flicker Miscellaneous GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL E l AVAILABLE DNP CLASS MAP READINGS FOR EPM9450Q CHAPTER E DNP CUSTOM CLASS MAP READINGS E 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Appendix F Application Notes 010101110010 011 1 Application Notes are designed to help you with various applications of GE Communicator EXT software GE Communicator EXT has expansive capabilities that can make your Monitoring and Power Control tasks much easier once the software is set up to do what you need it to do F 1 Total Web Solutions MEGA PAGE Displaying Data from Multiple INP100 102 Units on One Web Page With Total Web Solutions WebExplorer and WebReacher features it s possible to design a single web page that displays data from multiple EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 meters that have INP100 102 Network Options To achieve this goal the user should have a basic understanding of Total Web Solutions Refer to Chapter 6 of this manual for setup and utililization In addition the user should modify the Java Script Code on the web pages in use and also make a change to the Internet Explorer browser settings as detailed below GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Fai MOD
253. escccssesssssessessssecesssesssssseccessstessssnsecssnecsessstecsessecessuesssssnsecssneess G 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin GE Communicator EXT 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 m bd EPEN Chapter 1 Installing GE 010101110010 011 Communicator EXT i 1 1 1 1 System Requirements e IBM PC Compatible Pentium 200MHz or better e Windows 98 with Service Pack 1 or Release 2 NT 4 with Service Pack 5 Windows 2000 with at least Service Pack 1 e 32MB RAM e XVGA Card and Monitor with 1024x768 and 65k colors e Available RS 232 Serial Port 1 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 1 2 Installing GE Communicator EXT Software GE Communicator EXT can be used with the following GE meters All EPM 4000 5000 6000 7000 and 9000 Series Meters 2 Welcome xj Welcome to GE Communicator Unicode Setup p2 program This program will install GE Communicator 7 EE ae EE te It is strongly recommended that you ext all Windows programs before running this Setup Program Click Cancel to quit Setup and close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program ee mn eee D7 ore ar Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program ot any criminal penalties portion of it may result in severe civil and ard fal be proseoiited to the ma
254. etrieve its Device Profile gt Under Communications gt Advanced Settings for network card gt Services amp Security check the box for Block password protected access to device with address 1 gt Press OK gt OK to return to the main screen and press the Update Device button gt Goto menu bar Tools gt Password gt Enable Disable to enable password protection for the meter In the meter s diag_modbus_tcp_server htm web page you should see Block set password to meter Enabled 6 5 3 Computer Name DNS gt Click the Computer Name DNS tab a Advanced Network Option Settings Computer Nome eDomain Name Server DNS gt Enter the Computer Name gt Enter the IP Addresses for Domain Name Servers 1 and 2 gt Click OK to save settings 6 14 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION 6 5 4 Auto TFTP Download gt Click the Auto TFTP Download tab a Advanced Network Option Settings gt Enable Auto TFTP Download the port is 69 gt Enter the TFTP Server IP Address Client IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway and the Download Filename gt Click OK to Save Once that data is saved it is downloaded automatically until you change it 6 5 5 WebAlarm Email This feature sends out email when an alarm condition occurs The settings are configured in the Advanced Network Card Settings An additional 8 email ad
255. etwork EPM Comm Only EPM DSP Only LED Display GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 5 FLASH UPGRADING THE EPM UNIT CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING gt Choose the type of upgrade you want to perform GE Unit GE Comm or GE DSP See section 13 3 to Flash Upgrade GE Comm Only or GE DSP Only See section 13 4 to Flash Upgrade the GE External Display section 13 5 to Flash Upgrade the Internal Modem Card and section 13 6 to Flash Upgrade the Internal Network Option gt Click Next The screen below appears If your meter has the Internal Network Option that option will appear instead of Internal LA Modem see example above Your meter cannot have both of those options NOTE gt Click the Browse button beside File 1 ax Look in S ERE J See Ry E E 107 9 7 96 2 1a 96 hex 3 prene meu History E Desktop Files of type GE Flash Info File ini x I Open as read only gt Locate the firmware file on your computer You will need only one file ini file for the GE Unit upgrade File names and formats may vary from the example screen above Be sure to read the text file accompanying the firmware files gt Select the file 12 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE EPM UNIT gt Click Open Enter Flash File File 1 CIWINDOWS Deshiop 3201un_vI6 E 107 9 7 gt When the files have been entered click Next The f
256. evices screen see Chapter 7 for details To change the Primary Device gt Select Connection gt Change Primary Device The following screen appears Chenge Device gt Enter the unique address of the device you would like to designate as the Primary Device gt Click OK The Device Status screen reached by clicking on the Device Status button or by selecting Tools gt Retrieve Device Status will now list the new Primary Device first See section 2 9 for details on the Device Status screen 2 22 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER DISCONNECTING FROM A GE METER 2 7 Disconnecting from a GE Meter To disconnect from a GE meter or to disconnect from a location do one of the following gt Click on the Disconnect icon or from the menu bar select Connection gt Disconnect gt Click on the Connection Manager icon or from the menu bar select Connection gt Connection Manager gt Select the Location from the List of Locations and click the Disconnect button z When using a modem it is important to disconnect from communicating so that the A remote modem receives a hang up command Some modems may freeze when eae improperly disconnected GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 23 DEVICE STATUS CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 8 Device Status The Device Status screen displays information about the GE devices connected to your computer
257. ewall in your system you must ask your network administrator to grant communication access on TCP IP Port 502 Modbus TCP Format 6 byte Header Modbus RTU message without checksum Header detail 2 Bytes Sequences Transactions ID 2 Bytes Os 2 Bytes Length Number of Bytes following Example Request 01 03 00 00 00 06 01 03 00 00 00 02 Transaction 259 6 Bytes long Modbus RTU Request for Address 01 Function Code 03 read holding registers Start at Register 0 for 2 registers Response 01 03 00 00 00 07 01 03 04 xx xx xx xx Transaction 259 7 Bytes long Modbus RTU Response for Address 01 Function Code 03 4 Bytes long data GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS This will not support multiple Modbus requests and responses in a single Modbus TCP packet For INP10 and INP100 Options all requests with Modbus Address 01 will transmit to the meter itself All other requests with Modbus Addresses other than 01 will transmit to the RS 485 Gateway Port 6 6 5 Configuring WebAlarm The user must Enable this feature gt From the Device Profile click Communication Ports gt Click the Advanced Settings button The following tabbed screens will appear gt Click the Services tab gt On that screen click the SMTP Client box a Advanced Network Option Settings gt Click the Alarm Email tab The screen shown here allows you to config
258. file screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Primary Hour Readings Rollover or double click on the Primary Hour Readings Rollover line This window appears Accumulations Rollover Enter the Number at which roll over will occur 10000000000000000 Example Entering 10000 the displays will show 0000 9999 gt Set the number at which the Rollover will occur gt Click OK to close the window and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 5 Power Quality and Alarm Settings This is the third group of settings in the Device Profile gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button or double click on the Power Quality and Alarm Settings line Power Quality and Alarm Settings amp F Limits g EX5 ElectroLogic Relay Control 5 PQ Thresholds Waveform Recording EXF Squared T and Y Squared T Thresholds ee High Speed Inputs gt Click on the Programmable Setting you would like to configure The settings are detailed in the order they appear in the Device Profile 3 5 1 Limits Limit settings are based on a percentage of the Full Scales of FS which are set in the Limit and Waveform Full Scales section of the Device Profile Full Scales are based on CT and PT ratios set in the CT PT Ratios and System Hookup section of the Device Profile section 3 3 1
259. for the logs see section 4 6 2 See Chapter 8 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide for how to view and retrieve logs gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Trending Log Time Intervals or doubleclick on the Trending Log Time Intervals line This submenu appears 45 Trending Profile Settings baga Trending Log Time Intervals Log 1 Interval Oh 1m Os Log 2 Interval Oh 1m 0s This screen displays the current Device Profile s Trending Log Timelintervals The values shown are for example only GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 53 TRENDING PROFILE SETTINGS AND LOAD PROFILE RECORDING CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt Double click on either Log 1 Interval or Log 2 Interval The Interval Log Setting screen appears gt Enter the hours minutes and seconds for each log The logs will be time stamped based on the meter s time which is set using the Tools menu See section 4 10 gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter gt Itis recommended that you Reset Logs see section 4 11 when changing settings that effect the logs 4 6 2 Trending Setup The Trending Setup controls the channel assignments for Historical Logs 1 and 2 To set the Time Intervals for these
260. ftware version number and Microsoft systems information It is similar to the Start Up screen discussed in section 1 3 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 7 SOFTWARE LICENSE CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 1 5 Software License GE Communicator EXT V3 0 is shipped to the user in DEMO MODE While the software is in DEMO MODE it can be installed into your computer and used with a GE meter However while in DEMO MODE some features are disabled or limited A list of those features appears below Installation is easy An installation screen will walk you through the simple process Once installation is complete you will have to restart your computer to finish the installation Enter Registration Number for Full Access gt To access all the features of the software you must enter a Registration Number see below The Registration Number is a 20 digit number supplied to the licensee by GE at the time software is purchased How to purchase software gt Contact your Regional Sales Representative How to Enter the Registration Number gt From the Help Menu click Software License gt Type in the 20 digit Registration Number After Registration Number is entered a small screen appears validating registration 3 Software License Information Status Registration Valid Registration 01200509124050 License Type Single User License Expires on Friday October 01 2055 Enter Registration Number Ao
261. g gi Reset Digital Output Log i Reset Flicker Log i Reset Waveform Log i Reset PQ Log i Reset Max Min and Demand M Reset Hour Squared T and V Squared T Counters i Reset Internal Input Accumulations and Aggregations E Reset Internal KYZ Out Accumulations i Reset Total Average Power Factor gj Reset Cumulative Demand Registers i Reset Time of Use Current Month Registers i Reset Time of Use Active Registers RESET METER INFORMATION gt From the menu bar select Tools gt Reset Meter Information RESET METER INFORMATION CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt Click on the tabs to navigate between screens gt Click on the box beside the value s you would like to reset gt Click OK fi If you click Reset Logs a Warning will appear asking you if you want to Save Connected Vv Device Settings Click on the settings you would like to save then proceed with the Update If you do not save the settings they will be overwritten For each box you select a window will appear which states that the Reset is Completed gt Click OK The reset is completed You can password protect this feature by enabling the Password feature of the meter See Chapter 12 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide for details 4 60 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER MANUAL WAVEFORM CAPTURE 4 10 Manual Waveform Capture gt From the Menu bar click on Tools gt Manual
262. g Chapter 7 of this manual GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BINARY COUNTER OBJECT 20 Example 1 Cycle High Speed Input Delta and Current State has Line Number 16 and Point Number 0 in the DNP Object Mapping Write those numbers into the Object 1 Binary Input window of the GE Communicator EXT When the Line and Point Numbers are written the software fills in the description on the screen Repeat for each desired Binary Input Point Update the device The meter will scan those points every second Object 2 Any DNP Static Point can be configured to create a DNP Event Points Class Assignments on the Object 2 screen are used to configure Binary Input Change Event Points In order to create Event Data Object 2 Points must be assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Each point can have a different Class Assignment The Clear All button clears all assigned items on all the tabs The Clear button clears only the items on the current tab view GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 16 9 BINARY OUTPUT OBJECT 10 CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 16 5 Binary Output Object 10 Class 0 is used when polling Binary Output Object 10 Data External Relay Output Modules can be attached to the meter Up to 4 Relay Output Modules can be attached and each Relay Module has 4 Relay Outputs 8 9 10 m 1314 15 s w n o 19 14
263. g on the icon then double clicking on the selected parameter See sections 3 3 to 3 7 for details on editing each setting GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Sa3 RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER After you have finished configuring any or all of the programmable settings use the BUTTONS at the bottom of the screen to execute the following tasks gt Implement the changes by clicking on the Update Device button This sends the new edited Device Profile to the meter YOU MUST UPDATE THE METER DEVICE PROFILE FOR ANY OF THE PROGRAMMABLE SETTINGS TO TAKE EFFECT A warning will appear asking you if you want to Save Connected Device Settings Click on the settings you would like to save then proceed with the Update gt Store the profile for later use by clicking on the Save button A dialogue box will ask where you would like to save the profile gt Open a previously saved profile by clicking on the Load button A dialogue box will ask for the location of the saved profile gt Print a copy of the profile by clicking on the Report button The Report screen will appear Commext 3 0 20 Document Device Profile Report bel Sern ALTIAN TPIT ETTA EY R ET T Page 1 of 21 06 14 2005 11 22 24 Pogetot2i Zoom WhotePage m BF e C PantPeg en 3 2 1 Using the Report Page Page Arrows Select a page to view Zoom Adjust the Viewing
264. given month accumulations will continue until the next monthly billing date is reached or December 31 if there is no next year spanning calendar gt When you have entered all Monthly Bill Dates click OK to return to the main Edit Calendar screen gt Click Period Selection The following screen appears Adjustable Self Period Selection Freeze Period Season 1 Start Season 2 Start Season 3 Start Season 4 Start gt Use the pull down menus to program a Freeze Period and Hour of Day to Freeze GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 5 CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE gt Double click one of the Season Start windows The Season Start screen appears Season Start TOU Year Start Date Season 1 Season 2 4 01 06 Stele Sil 7 011 06 SGLETUE E 0 01 06 ra Cancel Help fj gt Assign a Start Date for up to four seasons per year Enter a date in each window or double click to retrieve a calendar from which you can choose a Month and a Day All Start Dates also act as the End Date of the prior season or month A season ends at midnight of the day before the start of the next season gt Click OK to return to the Adjustable Self Period Selection screen fi The date format you use here should be the same the date format set for your v computer To change or view your computer s date settings click on the Windows E Start Menu and select Settings Control Panel Region
265. gnal from the power network has to be processed while conforming with Figure 16 1 below e Block 1 consists of scaling circuitry and an automatic gain control function that normalizes input voltages to Blocks 2 3 and 4 For the specified 50 Hz operation the voltage standard is 230 V RMS e Block 2 recovers the voltage fluctuation by squaring the input voltage scaled to the reference level This simulates the behavior of a lamp e Block 3 is composed of a cascade of two filters and a measuring range selector In this implementation a log classifier covers the full scale in use so the gain selection is automatic and not shown here The first filter eliminates the DC component and the double mains frequency components of the demodulated output The configuration consists of a 05 Hz Low High Pass filter and a 6 Pole Butterworth Low Pass filter located at 35 Hz The second filter is a weighting filter that simulates the response of the human visual system to sinusoidal voltage fluctuations of a coiled filament gas filled lamp 60 W 230 V The filter implementation of this function is as specified in IEC 61000 4 15 e Block 4 is composed of a squaring multiplier and a Low Pass filter The Human Flicker Sensation via lamp eye and brain is simulated by the combined non linear response of Blocks 2 3 and 4 e Block 5 performs an online statistical cumulative probability analysis of the flicker level Block 5 allows direct calculation of the eva
266. gt Fie Connection Real Time Poll Tools I O Devices TOU Calendar Logs View Help Real Time Readings gt Revenue Energy and Demand Readings gt p Phasors posie iis GE Communicator EXT receives data from one connected device at a time by default the Primary Device To view polling data from multiple devices either select Poll Multiple Devices section 7 2 4 or change the Primary Device select Connection Change Primary Device see section 2 7 y Clicking the Polling button on the Tool Bar is the same as selecting Instantaneous Polling from the Menu Bar Clicking the Phasors button on the Tool Bar is the same as selecting Phasors from the Menu Bar fe GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REAL TIME READINGS 7 2 Real Time Readings 7 2 1 Instantaneous Polling To view instantaneous polling data for the primary device either gt Select Instantaneous Polling from the Real Time Polling menu OR gt Click the Polling button on the Tool Bar The Instantaneous Polling screen appears Apparent Power VAs O 1 Second g 01 Second The graphic representation on the right side of the screen displays the options listed in the pull down menu beneath it Volts A B C Current A B C Select either spectrum or waveform view by clicking on the Spectrum Waveform button gt Click the radio button in the lower right corner to select either 1 Second or
267. gt Click on DNP Level 2 A set of programming screens appears the DNP Custom Mapping screens Each screen has a tab at the top gt Click on any tab to move from screen to screen 16 2 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BINARY INPUT 16 2 Binary Input Object 1 A meter can use up to 64 Binary Input Points Values available for Binary Input use can be found in the DNP Object Mapping Only Class 0 is used when polling Binary Input Object 1 Data Class 1 2 or 3 is used when polling Binary Input Change Object 2 Data Line Point Description gt Double click on the box under Description to Add Delete or Modify DNP Points to the screen above A pull down window will appear gt Choose a Type of reading and a Channel gt Click OK The corresponding numbers for the selected reading and channel will appear in the Line and Point columns Line and Point Numbers for a Binary Input value can also be found in the DNP Object Mapping Ch 7 of the DNP V3 00 Level 2 Protocol Assignments for EPM 9650 and 9800 Rev 1 8 Example 1 Cycle High Speed Input Delta and Current State has Line Number 16 and Point Number 0 in the DNP Object Mapping gt Write those numbers into the Object 1 Binary Input window of the GE Communicator EXT gt When the Line and Point Numbers are written the software fills in the description on the screen gt
268. gth of the Predictive Demand Window increases the accuracy of the prediction by including more of the current Demand Window up to 100 Decreasing the length of the Prediction Window gives earlier warnings of High Demands gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button to send the new profile to the meter REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 4 2 Internal KYZ Outputs and Test LED Settings The EPM 9450 9650 has no Internal KYZ Outputs The Internal KYZ Outputs settings allow you to assign a channel and determine other settings for the Heartbeat LED The EPM 9800 is available with the KYZ Output Option gt From the Device Profile screen section 3 2 click on the button beside Internal KYZ Settings or double click on the Internal KYZ Settings line This screen appears Internal KYZ Outputs KYZ Assigned Channel Watt Hour Pulse Mode Form Output Per Pulse Width ms HBLED Quad 1 4 Watthour 1 8000 ho gt Enable z Pulse FomA me A gt Using the pull down menu next to HB LED assign a channel to the Heartbeat LED gt Make changes to Watt Hour per Pulse Pulse Width and Mode for the Heartbeat LED There may also be a Form column on your screen Form A Transition Form C Pulse gt When all changes are entered click OK to ret
269. h speed NVRAM is used in the EPM 9450 9650 amp 9800 to gather measured information and to insure that no information is lost A port that facilitates infrared communication with an EPM 9800 meter Using an ANSI C12 13 Type II magnetic optical communications coupler and an RS 232 cable from the coupler to a PC the meter can be programmed with GE Communicator EXT software A short fixed length section of data that is transmitted as a unit Example a serial string of 8 bit bytes Percent Total Harmonic Distortion See THD A language that will be spoken between two or more devices connected on a network Potential Transformer Ratio used to scale the value of the voltage to the primary side of an instrument transformer Also referred to as VT Ratio The closing and opening of the circuit of a two wire pulse system or the alternate closing and opening of one side and then the other of a three wire system which is equal to two pulses Q is the quantity obtained by lagging the applied voltage to a wattmeter by 60 degrees Values are displayed on the Uncompensated Power and Q Readings screen GLOSSARY 5 GLOSSARY Quadrant Programmable Values and Factors on the EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 Register Register Rollover Reset Rolling Window Average Power RS 232 GLOSSARY 6 GLOSSARY Watt and VAR flow is typically represented using an x Y coordinate system The four corners of the X Y plane are referred t
270. hart on the left shows an expanded portion of the channel s rms time plot during which the event occurred The chart on the nght shows a more detailed presentation of the event o o Oct 30 2000 07 05 05 16 Sens Oct 30 2000 07 05 05 1 7uitnecons Corot Goro Event severity factor 20 Equipment affected Computers Possible cause Local upstream load communications and network equipment switching Typical solution Apply filter surge arrestor AiReports 2 0 must be installed on your computer for the view button to be enabled otherwise the button will be disabled To view the AiReport gt From the GE Multilin Log Viewer select a Meter Database File for Meter 1 and set a Time Range gt Click on the AiReports button and the report will be generated Once the detailed report is generated you can transmit it to a colleague modify the report with your favorite word processing software print it and or export the file using PDF format Reasons for Incomplete Analysis AiReports for GE Communicator EXT analyzes the voltage waveform records in the meter database file If the file does not contain any voltage waveform records AiReports will not run AiReports will not perform a valid analysis on a waveform record if it was converted by the Log Converter program with a version of v1 0 11 June 26 2000 or older GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 37 PQDIF CONVERTER CHAPTER 8 VIEWING
271. hat device gt When you have finished with all programming click Exit Be sure to enter any I Os in the External Devices section of the meter s Device Profile when you connect them See section 11 7 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 33 STAND ALONE PROGRAMMER CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 34 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 11 1 Overview v NOTE GE Communicator EXT Chapter 11 Passwords The use of the Password feature is recommended ONLY if there are security issues and ONLY if you have a secure place in which to save the password If you have forgotten your meter password you cannot call the factory for help There is no back door If you lose or forget your password you must send the unit back to the factory to have the Flash RAM thot stores the password replaced If you are not using this meter for primary revenue metering or for protective functions you do not need to put a password protection scheme in the unit If you do make sure you archive the meter location and associated passwords carefully GE Communicator EXT s password feature protects the following from unauthorized use e Changes to an GE Meter s Device Profile e Setting Meter Time e Resetting Meter Information Max Min Demand Hour Counters Logs and Time of Use e Test Mode Entry
272. he GE Script amp Scheduler program will delete this file Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext Scripts EPMSchedulerLog Main Html Software generated top layer file with frame set linked to EPM Scheduler Log Detail Html and EPM Scheduler Run Time Log Html EPMSchedulerLog Detail Html Software generated blank frame file EPMSchedulerRun TimeLog Html Software generated schedule process log with hypertext link to detailed script logs and detailed Log Converter logs GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin al 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 B 1 011 1 Introduction GE Communicator EXT Appendix B Transformer Line Loss Compensation Calcn Worksheets The Edison Electric Institute s Handbook for Electricity Metering Ninth Edition defines Loss Compensation as Ameans for correcting the reading of a meter when the metering point and point of service are physically separated resulting in measurable losses including I2R losses in conductors and transformers and iron core losses These losses may be added to or subtracted from the meter registration Loss compensation may be used in any instance where the physical location of the meter does not match the electrical location where change of ownership occurs Most often this appears when meters are connected on the low voltage side of power transforme
273. he Scheduler window e Set Up Script Create a new script open an existing script or delete a script sections 14 3 14 5 Set up Script Devices and Script Commands with buttons on the Set Up Script screen e Set Up Script Devices Add edit or delete script devices sections 14 6 14 8 e Set Up Script Commands Add edit or delete script commands sections 14 9 14 12 e Set Up Scheduler Once a script is created you must add it to the Scheduler Add a script to the Scheduler edit a script or delete a script from the Scheduler sections 14 13 14 15 e Status View the Scheduler Log and clear Current status section 14 16 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM OVERVIEW e Exit Exit from the program section 14 17 Help Files appear on each page Appendix A lists the Component Files of the GE Script amp Scheduler program with each file s location in your system GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 3 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM 14 2 Operational Overview 14 4 NOTE v NOTE The user creates the scripts with the software adding devices and commands and sets up the Scheduler Once this is accomplished the Scheduler runs automatically executing the script with the oldest scheduled run time first When the script is run by the Scheduler small windows appear on your PC to advise you that the script is run
274. he calculations for you once the required data is entered A copy of the Excel Spreadsheet is in Appendix B of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide Warning GE Communicator will automatically launch the Excel Spreadsheet as part of its software package But for the TLC Button to work you must have the Excel program in SEEN your system If you do not have Excel software or if the spreadsheet file is not in the Communicator directory a Warning will be displayed instead of the worksheet You can do your own calculations using the hardcopy Transformer Loss Compensation Worksheet in Appendix B See NOTE in section 3 4 4 regarding Excel gt Enter the Percent Loss of Watts and Vars for copper and iron in the appropriate fields gt Enable or Disable Transformer Loss Compensation with the top pull down menu gt Click Disable or to Enable click one of the following Fe only Cu only or Both Fe and Cu gt gt With the second pull down menu select from the following 3 34 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS e Add to Watts and Subtract from VAR e Subtract from Watts and Add to VAR e Add to Watts and VAR e Subtract from Watts and VAR The Enhanced 9650 has a third pull down menu to apply the loss based on the power flow direction gt From the menu select one of the following e Both Watts and Watts e Watts only e Watts o
275. he selected relay and or relay modules select from the drop down menu at the upper right hand corner of the screen gt To change the relay Set Delay select from the drop down menu to the right of the Set Delay Label gt To change the Relay Reset Delay select from the drop down menu to the right of the Reset Delay Label gt To clear an item from the Relay Tree click on that item then click the Clear button gt To clear ALL ITEMS from the Relay Tree click the Clear Assigned Items button fi In order to use this screen you must have purchased at least one External Relay Out LA module For more details on External Modules see Chapter 11 of the GE Communicator Ei EXT Guide 4 5 3 PQ Thresholds Waveform Recording The Power Quality PQ and Waveform Thresholds setting determines at what point the Meter will execute a waveform capture and or record a power quality event See Chapter 8 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide for how to view logs PQ and waveform thresholds are given as a percentage of the Full Scales of FS Set the Full Scales in the Limits and Waveform Full Scales section of the Device Profile section 4 4 Full Scales are based on the CT and PT ratios set in the CT PT Ratios and System Hookup fi Before programming the PQ and Waveform Thresholds set the CT and PT ratios A Then set the Limits and Waveform Full Scales NOTE CAUTION Changing the CT and PT Ratios will Reset the meter and clear all logs
276. ial Port field enter the computer s communication port into which the RS 232 cable is inserted Most computers use Com 1 or Com 2 for the serial port gt Inthe Protocol field enter the type of communication the GE Meter port is using Direct Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use either Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII Modbus RTU is recommended All meter port defaults are Modbus RTU and the meters are shipped set to Modbus RTU gt Inthe Flow Control field enter None or Hardware EPM setting should be None PM 6000 IrDA setting is Hardware Example in the sample screen above the computer s Com Port 2 has been set to operate at 57600 baud using Modbus RTU to communicate with a meter port located at address 1 The baud rate address and protocol set for the computer s Com Port 2 match those of the meter port If the connection fails make sure an approved Category 5 Cable is connected to the Network Jack and that the Link Light on the GE Device is illuminated 2 2 2 Network Connections At the Remote Meter Location gt Insert an RJ 45 line into the RJ 45 port on the face of an EPM 9450 9650 Meter that has an Internal Network Option A connection for an EPM 9800 Meter with the Ethernet Option is made by inserting an RJ 45 line into the RJ 45 Network port Make an RJ 45 connection for other GE meters 2 4 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER DIRECT SERIAL RS 232 R
277. icator EXT screen 10 30 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES STAND ALONE PROGRAMMER 10 18 Stand Alone Programmer The Stand Alone programmer allows you to configure all parameters of an I O module or group of I O modules by connecting the I Os directly to the computer If you plan to connect the module s to a EPM Meter in the future you must still enter them y in the External Devices section of the EPM Meter s Device Profile See section 11 7 NOTE To use the Stand Alone Programmer you will need the following RS 232 Cable e RS 232 RS 485 Converter An RS 485 cable with power wires separated from communication wires see diagram below e A 15 20V DC at 50 200 mA power source for the I O module such as PSIO you may also use any port on a EPM 9450 9650 Meter as a power source gt Wire the RS232 485 Converter I O module s and computer as shown EPM 9450 9650 High Speed Inputs Sess SSB Bire SSEBWSs ooaooooooo oo l To run the I O take power from the Use RS 232 to connect to computer Meter or any other source supplying 15 20V DC at 50 200mA use any port on the EPM 9450 9650 The W O is 2 wire RS 485 Be sure to wire minus to minus and positive to positive Ld z gt VO Module Ory 2 4 T Female e o BI RS 485 Port JE 3 oe f ea8 j Connect RS 485 wires from the display to the RS232 485 Converter p otoo ae
278. ices or any pulse generating device Pulse Accumulation is a very flexible way to accumulate information from external devices Pulses from other meters can be algebraically combined with the host meter s pulse accumulations to generate one reading for a set of meters in a complex arrangement Source This is the particular input on the meter which will be accumulated Units Pulse This is the scale factor which normalizes the pulses so that they can be aggregated if desired Pulses are stored in primary values Accumulator This allows you to place the pulse register into a separate accumulation register which can aggregate or net values User assigned label This window allows a user to enter a label designation so that when reading the Aggregator the meter will display the source gt To add or subtract data use pull down menu in each window of Accumulator column s EPM 9450 does not support Averaging for Total Values that are NEGATIVE EPM 9650 DOES support that type of Averaging gt When all data has been entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS 3 4 10 Primary Hour Readings Rollover GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL gt From the Device Pro
279. ignate the limit as either Above or Below a percentage of the Full Scale click once in each Settings column and select the desired setting from the pull down menu GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 43 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 44 gt To set the percentage of the Full Scale at which the limit will trip enter the value in the of FS column GE Communicator EXT automatically calculates the Primary value The Combination Limit 3 is the logical combination of Limit 1 s state and Limit 2 s state Example 1 Limit D Type 1 Second Readings Channel Volts AN Limit 1 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is below 12V Limit 2 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is above 132V Combination Limit 3 Setting AND If Limit 1 AND Limit 2 are exceeded then Limit 3 is exceeded Example 2 Limit D Type 1 Second Readings Channel Volts AN Limit 1 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is below 12V Limit 2 Setting Limit exceeded if Volts AN is above 132V Combination Limit 3 Setting OR If Limit 1 OR Limit 2 are exceeded then Limit 3 is exceeded To combine Limits of different Limit IDs use the Relay Logic Diagrams Full Scale settings are shown in the lower left of the screen These values are set in the Limits and Waveform Full Scales section of the Device Profile section 4 4 gt To set the Power Factor Limits double click on any of the Power Factor setting
280. ilessedssdd cist rested cuatraceeisentnedens Sento nae a DISCONNECT FROM AGE METER CHANGE THE PRIMARY DEVICE MERGE CONNECTION DATABASES CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE scaiciciamssaiancsaienni nana nannies 5 11 CONFIGURE SETTINGS ce cececctsSaseliecte ANANKA OARA CONFIGURE COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURE ENERGY AND DISPLAY sscsssssssssssssssssssssesssessssssscssssssnsssssssnsssscssnessscsssesseeesse 5 16 CONFIGURE SCALING s scscicoisceeiisscesticsiaesssetaccencate RN A a R 5 17 USING EPM 6000 POLLING AND TOOLS MENUS ccc ccsccnscccsstbscnnssnuadcesstssnnnsenccccessssacnnssined 5 19 USING EPM 6000 POLLING MENU wou cseccccsscssssssssssssscssscsssssescsesssescsesssesssesssesssessessesess 5 19 USING EPM 6000 TooLs MENU REAL TIME PORU ciis ananin R NRO P a E ete eager eaeca eaedationid SET DEVICE TIME sinye RETRIEVE DEVICE TIME RESET DEVICE INFORMATION SUERI CSS 20 CELE SIAT gee aa LOW LEVELAC CESS os cxcazesctassovsctna EAER STS S a a a a a E E SYSTEM COMPONENTS RAROWARE CONNECTION cccssce sss cosoceunce E saaraconsssssoivaean 6 4 SOFTWARE CONNECTION sicas aaa N eee 6 5 SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION zusiecirrirennssiniceuisieniioncernnnnnin ioien 6 11 DHCP SETUP creiinneoiiianin a aa ATARA 6 11 SERVICES St SECURITY vaerinrnniiecuenmsai intinti OAAR 6 13 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 REAL TIME POLLING 8 VIEWING LOGS TABLE OF CONTENTS COM
281. ill be applied gt The module reads a 4 byte value per channel So you must select 4 of the 8 bytes to be read by the module Use the pull down menu to choose 4 of the 8 bytes gt gt Click OK when all channels are set The Device Profile I O Modules screen appears 19 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES CONFIGURING THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE gt Click on the Edit button in the Scale Settings GE Communicator EXT retrieves the settings from the I O module The following screen appears Analog Output 4 to 70 m External Module Programmer Module Type nalog Output Module 8 Channel Version 0017 Build 112 Soole Settings should be entered in secondary tor Baud Rate iva Se Volts Current and Power All other readings should be entered in primory Transmit Delay bom Scale High Value 20mA Scale Low Value 4mA 120 000 0 000 120 000 0 000 Oooo For each channel enter the scale setting according to the needs of your application The scale High Value refers to the high end of the module the scale Low Value refers to the low end of the module For example if you have a 4 20mA module the scale High Value determines what 20mA equals The scale Low Value determines what 4mA equals See note below on How to Set Scale Values To change the I O s Transmit Delay you must use the Stand Alone Programmer section 11 17 gt To enter the scale settings click on the Module Settings button
282. ils CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER Connection Manager Location Device Editor V Device Properties Address Name Device 3 Description Device 3 Protocol Modbus RTU Device Type Comm Port In the Device Address field enter the address assigned to the meter port you will use for this connection If you are connecting to multiple meters each one should have a unique address See section 2 5 In the Name field enter a unique name for the device at the location In the Protocol field select MODBUS ASCII Be sure the port has been previously set to Modbus ASCII as detailed in Step 1 Leave the Device Type field set to type of meter Set the Com Port Click on the Close button when all information is entered Check that all cables are secure Check that the RS 232 cable is connected to the correct Com Port on the computer Check that the computer and the GE device s are set at 9600 baud using Modbus ASCII GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER RS 485 INTERNAL MODEM OPTION CONNECTION 2 4 RS 485 Internal Modem Option Connection Internal Modem Option Connection Requires Modbus ASCII Protocol Some meter models offer an Internal Modem Option which eliminates all the modem hardware and cable that used to be required for a modem connection A modem connection to the meter is now as simple as plugging in a phone line At the originate end simply install a modem
283. in and Energy Accumulations GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REAL TIME POLL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 5 Real Time Poll After connecting to the meter on the menu bar select Real Time Poll button A menu of screens allows the user to select one of the following polling screens e Instantaneous Polling Poll Max and Min Readings Poll Power Readings e Poll Harmonics Poll Internal Inputs Poll Limit Status The individual screens are readings that result from the settings in the Device Profile which were discussed in the earlier sections of this chapter The screens are very similar to the EPM 9450 0650 and 9800 screens Occasionally the meter screens will have slightly fewer readings For details on how to utilize the data on the screens see sections 6 3 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 and 6 11 of this manual 5 20 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER TOOLS 5 6 Tools After connecting to the meter on the menu bar select Tools A menu of the following tools will appear Edit Current Device Profile covered in earlier sections of this chapter Set Meter Time Retrieve Meter Time Reset El Device Information Retrieve Device Status Low Level Access Analog Output Programmer Each of these Tools will be described in the following sections with the exception of Edit Current Device Profile which was described in detail in sections 5 1 t
284. in the Graph Items column gt To select multiple points hold down the Ctrl key while clicking gt To select a sequence of points hold down the Shift key while clicking iy Only a total of six pens may be used at one time If there are two log files open you will be allowed to select only three data points from the left column NOTE gt To view the graph press either the Advanced Circular or XY Graph button Wstart Erb Meron owt J aratat Outer Mf Aiba Framed L Booman Gaitari ck Como Horus JEPM Log Viewer ESO ssm 8 14 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING TRENDING AND DEMAND GRAPHS XY AND CIRCULAR Starting Date Time to View Number of Days to View Maximum Value 0 64 Fx comet Morus SEPM Log Viewer ESE a start Eirto mrosot oxtl J Acrobat Detter Bite rramemtaher L Booman rite Fhoteshoo The following pertain to either type of graph To change the starting point of the graph gt Choose a new date time segment from the Starting Date Time to view pull down menu To change the amount of time represented on the graph gt Enter a value in the Number of Days to View field gt Press Enter or click on the Redraw button To change the scale of the graph gt Enter a value in the Minimum Value and Maximum Value fields gt gt Press Enter or the Redraw button To view one sample at a time gt Click in the
285. inFS If CalMinFS lt MinSetFS then CalMinFS MinSetFS If CalMinFS lt THDFS then OK If CalMinFS gt THDFS then Need More Space on your HD GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 3 PROGRAMMING AND RUNNING LOGS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 2 Programming and Running Logs Program the following parameters specific to each type of log in the meter s Device Profile See Chapter 3 9450 9650 Chapter 4 9800 or Chapter 5 7000 for details fi Any time you update the Device Profile a pop up screen will announce that the logs are A not being reset and asks if you would like to reset them Resetting the logs is NOTE recommended if you make changes to CT amp PT Ratios Limits or Limit Full Scales Limit and Waveform Full Scales Limits Trending Setup Trending Log Time Intervals Power Quality and Waveform Thresholds Labels YOU MUST LABEL THE METER You do not need to start the logs the meter is always recording To confirm the parameters and track the progress of the logs Log Statistics gt Select Statistics from the Logs menu or click on the Log Status icon on the Tool Bar The Log Statistics screen appears Logging Statistics 8 4 Records Memory Used Newest Record Time Oldest Record Time Record Size Max Records Memory 26624 100 07 24 2006 14 19 00 00 07 03 2006 23 38 00 00 26624 100 6400 0 07 24 2006 14 19 00 00 07 20 2006 03 36 00 00 6400 1024 1024 512 512 256 07 24
286. ine This window appears Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval Energy Interval Ph Minutes cs gt Set the number of minutes for the Energy Interval This the Demand and Accumulation Interval Duration gt Click OK to close the window and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 4 4 10 Pulse Accumulations This section of the Device Profile displays a series of eight running totals available on Meter Each total can be added to or subtracted from other totals This allows you to set the high speed inputs located directly on the meter to pulse accumulate GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 39 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER fi If you use these inputs for pulse accumulations do not set them to record waveforms If L you do endless waveforms record NOTE gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Pulse Accumulations line The following screen will appear fe internal Input Pulse Accunmndaters Setup Units Count Aggregator ABE aa HE pd pa a a EE a EE a ee J EE E ee EE a a EE Oe 2 H i OUNO Hour Roading Aqqregator nce a Aggregator Assigned Label Purpose of Pulse Accumulations Pulse Accumulators are used to accumulate pulse information from external devices These devices may be gas water or electricity meters energy management systems SCADA device
287. inside the computer the originate modem and connect a phone line At the remote meter end the meter must be configured to speak Modbus ASCII Modbus RTU does not support modem communication If you use Modbus RTU to communicate with a modem it will fail or be unreliable The meter s Internal Modem Option may operate at a programmable baud rate up to 57600 We recommend this baud rate To set the overall configuration you must gt Install the computer s modem the originate modem See the Installation and Operation Manual for the meter in use for details of computer s hardware requirements gt Set the originate modem to operate at 57600 baud gt Enable Hardware Flow Control See Note about Baud Rate in Step 5 below 2 4 1 Atthe Remote Meter site gt Plug a phone line into the meter The address will be 1 If you are connecting to multiple units on a bus you must also assign a unique address other than 1 to each additional unit See section 2 5 Because a GE meter s four ports operate independently you need only configure the P A address and baud rate of the port that will be connected to the bus NOTE 2 4 2 On the Originating Computer gt Click on the Connection Manager icon or select Connection gt Connection Manager The following screen appears To copy the Connection Manager Settings to other PCs see Note on page 2 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 91 RS 4
288. ints hold down the Ctrl key while clicking gt To select a complete sequence of points hold down the Shift key while clicking 8 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING LOGS WITH GE COMMUNICATOR EXT S LOG VIEWER gt Click on the Add button to move the Data Points to the Selected Data Points column gt Click on the Restore button to return the selection to its previous setting gt When you have made your selection click OK to return to Log Viewer s main screen The pull down menu above the Data Points button lists the points you have selected You can select what portion of the log s you wish to view by specifying a time range Log Viewer bases its time date format on your computer s Regional Settings Windows Control Panel gt Click on the Time Range button in the Select Time section The following screen appears Select a Time Range current system date is July 24 2006 Time Range Selection Options Between and During the previous hour s During the previous day s During the previous week s g During the previous year s To select a specific time range click the Between radio button and enter a date and time in each field gt Double click either date time field to bring up the following calendar 1 00 AM GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 9 VIEWING LOGS WITH GE COMMUNICATOR EXT S LOG VIEWER CHAPTER 8 VIEW
289. ion 11 15 16 locates an I O s address and baud rate without using the reset button Stand Alone Programmer section 11 17 allows you to configure all I O parameters directly from a computer not through a EPM Meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES USING MULTIPLE I O MODULES 10 3 Using Multiple I O Modules Each type of I O module is shipped with a factory set address see section 11 5 If you plan to use more than one O module of the same type such as three KYZ modules you must change the address of each module individually before connecting the group to the EPM Meter See section 11 6 for how to change a module s address and baud rate Each I O module in a group must have its own unique address Each module must be set to operate at the same baud rate as the EPM 9450 9650 Meter s Port 3 or Port 4 Port 4 ONLY for EPM 9800 57600 is recommended If you do not know an I O module s address or baud rate use the Query I O function detailed in section 11 14 This function works only on Port 4 To connect multiple I Os together attach the male RS 485 port of one module to the female RS 485 port of another Secure by tightening built in fasteners Attach mounting brackets to the outside modules Use the steps below section 11 4 to determine if you must use a separate power source for example GE Multilin PSIO to supply added power to the group To connect a group of I Os to the EPM
290. ion 4 9 e Setting and Retrieving Meter Time section 4 10 e Test Mode Preset Accumulators section 4 14 and Options section 4 15 Actual programming screens may vary depending on the options ordered with your meter The settings shown are for the EPM 9800 which supports DNP Level 2 For a Feature Comparison of GE models refer to section 1 6 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide For details on DNP Level 2 see Chapter 17 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide The External Devices section of the Device Profile is covered in Chapter 11 of this same guide GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES 4 2 Retrieve and Send Device Profiles gt Click on the Profile button or select Tools gt Edit Current Device Profile GE Communicator EXT retrieves the programmable settings from the currently connected meter The following screen appears Retrieving Programmable Settings from Device When the settings have been retrieved successfully the Device Profile screen appears This screen contains all the programmable settings currently stored in the connected meter gt Configure each of the programmable settings by clicking on the icon and then double clicking on the selected parameter See sections 4 3 4 25 for details on editing each setting EPM 9800 E General Setings Se SXF Revenue and Energy Settings E ERF Power Quality end Alarm Setings Se EXT Trendi
291. it the items gt Click OK GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 15 SCRIPT COMMANDS CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM 14 9 Script Commands This screen lists all the current commands for a particular script You can enter up to 1000 commands for each script and each command is assigned to a selected device for that script Each device is listed by Index Number Type Name and Address and the Command Description follows the device information You cannot set up multiple retrieve commands for a single device But you can have up to 256 devices for each script The sequence of the commands listed on the screen must be valid To move a command record to a different sequence gt Click on the command gt Click the Up or Down buttons to move it The new sequence will be saved to the database when the window is closed E If the sequence is not correct you may clear the device s log before retrieving it NOTE gt To add a command click Add The Edit Script Command screen will appear gt To edit a command select a command by clicking on it gt Click Edit The Edit Script Command screen will appear gt To delete a command select a command by clicking on it gt Click Delete A window will appear which asks Are you sure you want to delete this command gt Click Yes or No gt To exit the screen click Close 14 16 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT a
292. item D_UID 2_1 D_LABEL Inst Watt D VALUE 0 08 k gt lt item gt lt DEVICE_2 gt lt GE_Multilin DATA gt Displaying a value in an HTML file Use JavaScript in the web browser Define a unique name for a value to be displayed such as data_name Insert CODE in the HTML file where it will be displayed Create JavaScript code inside the HTML file Auto Screen Refresh is set at 5000ms in the Set Timeout Function see Example below Example lt Script language Javascript gt lt var disp value var timerID var tmp_name var xmlDoc new ActiveXObject MSXML DomDocument xmlDoc async true xmlDoc onreadyststechange do_get_data function do_get_xml xmlDoc load poll_ data xml function do get _data if xmlDoc readyState 4 if xmlDoc documentElement null timerID setTimeout do_get_xml 5000 else disp value xmlDoc documentElement selectSingleNode item D_UID 1_1 getAttribute D VALUE data_name innerHTML disp value timerID setTimeout do_get_xml 5000 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 25 CUSTOMIZING SCREENS v NOTE gt lt SCRIPT gt CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Inside the lt body gt of the HTML file add on the following Load do_get_xml1 Server Side Include Functions These functions will send data directly to the browser as part of
293. itional electrical burden when performing Loss Compensation Loss Compensation is applied to 1 second per phase Watt VAR readings and because of that affects all subsequent readings based on 1 second per phase Watt VAR readings This method results in loss compensation be applied to the following quantities Total Power Demands per phase and Total Thermal Block Fixed Window Rolling Sliding Window and Predictive Window Maximum and Minimum Demands Energy Accumulations KYZ Output of Energy Accumulations y Loss Compensation is disabled when the meter is placed in Test Mode NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 3 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS B 2 Transformer Line Loss Compensation B 4 The meter provides compensation for active and reactive power quantities by performing the numerical calculations using factors derived in two ways using the TLC Calculator button on the Transformer Loss screen of the Meter s Device Profile or using the worksheet found in section B 2 1 Calculating Transformer Loss Compensation Percentages Work Sheet Enter the derived values in the Device Profile screen of the GE Communicator EXT software The GE Communicator EXT software allows you to enable Transformer Loss Compensation for Losses due to Copper and Iron individually or simultaneously Losses can either be added to or subtracted from measured
294. k on the input you would like to label gt Enter text in each field gt Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt gt Click Update Device Profile to send the new profile to the meter 3 5 7 Trending Profile Settings and Load Profile Recording This section of the Device Profile enables you to set the Trending Profiles for historical logs gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Trending Profile Settings or double click on the Trending Profile Settings line The following submenu appears EE EX5 Trending Log Time Intervals ES Trending Setup gt Double click on one of the Trending topics to access the programming screens Load Profile Recording Definition Load Profile Recording is a subset of the meter s more general Logging and Trending capability The same screens are used for setup but Load Profile Recording deals only with Accumulated Values Energy Wh Reactive Energy VARh and Apparent Power VAh Historically Load Profile Recording referred to recording of Quadrant 1 Energy Wh because electromechanical meters only measured energy and were detented to prevent reverse rotation outside of Quadrant 1 3 5 8 Programming the Trending Log Time Intervals Trending Log Time Intervals determine the interval at which Historical Logs 1 and 2 will take a snapshot To set the parameters for the logs see section 3 12 See Chapter 8 of the GE Communic
295. lation 1 Quad 1 Watthour X 2 Quad 2 Watthour X 3 jQuad 3 VAhour E ok E cece gt Assign an accumulation to each relay based on the needs of your application Click OK to return to the main I O Device Profile screen gt Click on the Edit button in the Scale Settings GE Communicator EXT retrieves the settings from the I O module The following screen appears KY2 Leternal Module Pro Module Type Vernon Address Houd finte Tronsmit Deloy Roll Over 72000 9999998995989999 gt For each output enter the Watt per Pulse and the Minimum Pulse Width in milliseconds Leave the Roll Over at the default value of sixteen 9s This value matches the Roll Over of the EPM Meter It is important that the Roll Over of the module match the Roll Over of the device 10 16 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES CONFIGURING THE KYZ OUTPUT MODULE to which it is connected Change the Roll Over only if you are using the module with a device other than an EPM Meter or if you are using the module as a stand alone unit To change the I O s Transmit Delay you must use the Stand Alone Programmer section 11 17 gt When you have entered the scale settings click Update GE Communicator EXT will send the new scale settings to the module and then reset it gt Be sure to send the updated Device Profile to the EPM Meter after you have finished configuring all I Os gt Click o
296. ld cause malfunction or damage in microprocessor devices The curve is characterized by voltage magnitude and the duration which the voltage is outside of tolerance See ITIC Curve The storage of a single value in each interval in a load profile This value is the delay from the time control power is restored to the time when the user wants to resume demand accumulation GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GLOSSARY CRC Field CT Current Ratio Cumulative Demand Demand Demand Interval Display DNP 3 0 EEPROM Energy Register Ethernet Exception Response GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GLOSSARY Cyclic Redundancy Check Field Modbus communication is an error checksum calculation that enables a Slave device to determine if a request packet from a Master device has been corrupted during transmission If the calculated value does not match the value in the request packet the Slave ignores the request A Current Transformer Ratio is used to scale the value of the current from a secondary value up to the primary side of an instrument tranformer The sum of the previous billing period maximum demand readings at the time of billing period reset The maximum demand for the most recent billing period is added to the previously accumulated total of the maximum demands The average value of power or a similar quantity over a specified period of time A specified time over which deman
297. ld like to apply to this day gt Click OK to return to the calendar gt To apply a Schedule to a Range of Dates or to selected days of the week select and click Multi Date The following screen appears Assign a schedule to a date Available Srhadaise S01 Weekday ssi Weekday bd Day of Week gi Sunday i Monday i Tuesday Mi Wednesday gi Thursday i Friday i Saturday With the Multi Date button you can quickly program a whole year For Example 2005 by selecting for instance all the weekdays Mon Fri and in the Date Range type 01 03 05 to 12 30 05 Do the same for the weekend days Fill in holidays and vacations for each month gt Enter a Date Range select the type of Schedule and if desired choose a Day of the Week gt Click OK gt Use the color coded key below the calendar to review which Schedules have been applied to the month gt Click Next Month and repeat the process for the year gt When the calendar settings are complete click OK to return to the main Edit Calendar screen You may now gt Click Save to File to send the calendar to the computer for future use See section 10 3 for how to edit a previously saved calendar 9 CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE gt Click on Save to File to store the file in your computer Your computer screen will ask you the File Name Save In and Save as Type information Enter data gt Click Save or Canc
298. le component allows you to customize your own SCADA quality web pages graphics and configurations via FTP Server and or FTP Client The Main Default Page is shown below This is just an example the web pages for your data may be changed or created to your own needs and specifications The URL address for this page is http www myEPMmeter com GE Power Leader Web Solutions Meter Name 00121689 Volts Amps Power Energy Date Time 2007 04 17 16 22 18 450 Power Quality Voltage Frequency Pulse Accumulation Maximum f Minimum Instantaneous Inputs Volts AN 0 00 275 68 0 00 Mater Volts BN 0 00 276 87 0 00 Information Volts CN 0 00 275 90 0 00 Emails Volts A B 0 00 479 64 0 00 Volts B C 0 00 479 65 0 00 Diagnostic 0 00 479 40 0 00 Tools 0 00 60 03 0 00 Current Minimum Instantaneous Maximum Amps A 0 00 23 49 0 00 Amps B 0 00 l 19 79 0 00 Amps C 0 00 19 78 0 00 Ar 0 00 0 89 0 00 Last Max Reset 2007 02 01 13 25 37 110 WebXML A very versatile component for configuring data to your specifications The data is polled then stored in an XML file for later access by any client on the network The data can be viewed via a host of applications including Internet Explorer and Microsoft Excel PowerPoint and Word WebReacher With this component you can access meters anywhere in the world WebReacher has a built in Modbus data concentrator that allows you to po
299. lect Tools gt Retrieve Meter Time The following screen appears Date and Running Time are displayed in LEDs If the IRIG B signal is present on the IRIG B Input of the Device a green IRIG B appears next to the time gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen Current EPM 9650 Device Time GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 55 RESET METER INFORMATION CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 8 Reset Meter Information gt From the menu bar select Tools gt Reset Meter Information The following set of screens appears 650 Parameters i Reset All Logs Revenue Power Quality Etc if Reset Historical Log 1 Revenue Log gf Reset Historical Log 2 Revenue Log Reset Sequence of Events Log M Reset Digital Input Log i Reset Digital Output Log i Reset Flicker Log i Reset Waveform Log i Reset PQ Log gt Click in the tabs to navigate between screens Reset EPM 9650 Parameters Accumulators i i Reset Max Min and Demand M Reset Hour Squared T and V Squared T Counters M Reset Internal Input Accumulations and Aqgregations H Reset Internal KYZ Out Accumulations i Reset Total Average Power Factor M Reset Cumulative Demand Registers 3 56 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER RESET METER INFORMATION Reset EPM 9650 Parameters eS Accumulators mulator Max Minand Y aa ee fee i Reset Time of Use Current Month
300. lects the magnitude of a metered quantity Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode In Modbus communication a Master Device initiates and controls all information transfer in the form of a Request Packet to a Slave Device The Slave reponds to each request The largest demand calculated during any interval over a billing period GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GLOSSARY Modbus ASCII Modbus RTU Network NVRAM Optical Port Packet Percent THD Protocol PT Ratio Pulse Q Readings GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GLOSSARY Alternate version of the Modbus protocol that utilizes a different data transfer format This version is not dependent upon strict timing as is the RTU version This is the best choice for telecommunications applications via modems The most common form of Modbus protocol Modbus RTU is an open protocol spoken by many field devices to enable devices from multiple vendors to communicate in a common language Data is transmitted in a timed binary format providing increased throughput and therefore increased performance A communications connection between two or more devices to enable those devices to send and receive data to one another In most applications the network will be either a serial type or a LAN type Nonvolatile Random Access Memory is able to keep the stored values in memory even during the loss of circuit or control power Hig
301. ll place the selection in the appropriate window in the screen gt After you have assigned all the Relay Logic Inputs select the gates that will be used to combine the logic to trigger the relay gt To select a gate click on the gate or choose one from the pulldown menu below the gate 3 44 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS v NOTE To change items on the Relay Logic Tree use the following steps To change the selected relay and or relay modules select from the drop down menu at the upper right hand corner of the screen To change the relay Set Delay select from the drop down menu to the right of the Set Delay Label To change the Relay Reset Delay select from the drop down menu to the right of the Reset Delay Label To clear an item from the Relay Tree click on that item then click the Clear Button To clear ALL ITEMS from the Relay Tree click the Clear Assigned Items Button In order to use this screen you must have purchased at least one External Relay Out module For more details about External Modules see Chapter 11 of this manual 3 5 3 PQ Thresholds Waveform Recording NOTE The Power Quality PQ and Waveform Thresholds setting determines at what point the meter will execute a waveform capture and or record a power quality event See Chapter 8 for how to view logs PQ and waveform thresholds are given as
302. ll up to 8 devices or 512 unique polling items from any device that uses Modbus RTU and or Modbus TCP protocols WebReacher can retrieve the data and consolidate it into web pages without separate software WebMod6 The 10 100BaseT design allows the unit to communicate using Modbus TCP Once the programmable network card is placed inside the meter Port 2 becomes a gateway The gateway enables a high speed interface between the Network LAN and other Modbus based IED Intelligent Electronic Device equipment Modbus TCP is an industry proven open protocol that can be easily integrated with other software or hardware 6 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SYSTEM COMPONENTS WebAlarm Real Time Email alerts are sent via the Internet to up to 9 recipients simultaneously for any combination of event notifications You decide what message is sent and to whom Email format can be Short Format or Long Format Short Format is for cellphones with text messaging service Long Format provides detailed alarm conditions for any devices with full email support computers PDAs cellphones GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL o 35 HARDWARE CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 3 Hardware Connection The EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 meters with the 10 100BaseT Ethernet Option INP100 have all the components of the standard Meters PLUS the capability of connection to a network through an Ethernet LAN or to
303. ltilin gy data available from 5 14 2002 to 6 12 2002 es es XT 7 c La J Select Parameters gt Inthe Select Data Range field enter a Start Date and an End Date gt Inthe Select Parameters field select a meter from which to calculate data gt Inthe Peak Time Range fields enter the peak time structure or make changes gt In the Rate Structure Table enter your rate structure in the white spaces in the table Leave a space empty if it does not apply GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 15 BILL VERIFICATION CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE Rate Structure Table This generic rate structure table is set up based on utility rates for small and medium industrial and commercial facilities This model has charges for Distribution Generation Transmission and some miscellaneous items It also allows 1 to 2 tiers in rate structure Example of tiered rate structures A company used 5 000 kWh with a 400 kW peak demand during a billing period Single Tier Rate Structure Utility charges a flat usage rate of 4 cents per kWh and a flat demand rate of 2 cents per kW Double Tier Rate Structure Utility charges a usage rate of 4 cents per kWh for the 1st 2000 kWh and a lower usage rate of 3 cents per kWh for the remaining 3000 kWh Demand rate is 2 cents per kW for the 1st 300kW and 1 cent per kW for the remaining 100kW gt Double check the data entered in the table and click on Calculate y DO
304. luation parameters Pst and Plt Flicker Evaluation occurs in the following forms Instantaneous Short Term or Long Term Each form is detailed below 15 2 1 Instantaneous Flicker Evaluation An output of 1 00 from Block 4 corresponds to the Reference Human Flicker Perceptibility Threshold for 50 of the population This value is measured in Perceptibility Units PU and is labeled Pinst This is a real time value and it is continuously updated 15 2 2 Short Term Flicker Evaluation An output of 1 00 from Block 5 corresponding to the Pst value corresponds to the conventional threshold of irritability per IEC 1000 3 3 In order to evaluate flicker severity two parameters have been defined one for the short term called Pst defined in this section and one for the long term called Plt defined in the next section The standard measurement time for Pst is 10 minutes Pst is derived from the time at level statistics obtained from the level classifier in Block 5 of the flicker meter The following formula is used 15 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 15 FLICKER THEORY OF OPERATION P 0 0314P9 0 0525P 0 0657P 3 0 28P 1 0 08P xy EQ 15 1 Where the percentiles P 0 1 P 1 P 3 P 10 P 50 are the flicker levels exceeded for 0 1 1 2 20 and 50 of the time during the observation period The suffix S in the formula indicates that the smoothed value should be used The smoothed values are obtaine
305. mber Echo 7 FTP Server Data 20 FTP Server Control 21 Web Server 80 Modbus TCP Server 502 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 23 CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS 6 6 Customizing Screens 6 6 1 Configuring WebExplorer All polled data is stored in an XML file poll_data xml Each polled item is located in its DEVICE_x section as it is programmed in the poll_profile xml file The standard data format for each device is up to 64 each with its D_UID D_LLABEL and D_VALUE This XML file can be viewed directly in your browser To display it on a customized web page you must set up your browser to run JavaScript Configuring XML is detailed in section 6 6 2 ced network Option Settings Security iy Auto Refresh Rate is set in the SetTimeout Function see Java Script example below NOTE Example of the data file lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt Embedded network server polled data gt lt GE_Multilin_DATA gt lt GE_Multilin_SYSTEM gt lt GE_Multilin_SYSTEM gt lt DEVICE_1 gt lt DEV_NAME gt Meter Demo 1 lt DEV_NAME gt DEV_TYPE gt Meter 1250 lt DEV_TYPE gt lt item D_UID 1 1 D_LABEL Inst Van D_VALUE 122 46 gt lt item gt lt DEVICE_1 gt lt DEVICE_2 gt lt DEV_NAME gt N A lt DEV_NAME gt 6 24 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS DEV_TYPE gt lt DEV_TYPE gt lt
306. mes When INP100 starts up it will check for all files in the server s directory EPM_meters feeder_12345 and download all files found GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 17 SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS If there is another subdirectory inside this directory that is not listed in the server s directory as above such as C Inetpub ftproot EPM_meters feeder_12345 info INP100 will not locate that subdirectory and no files will be downloaded from that subdirectory to INP100 That may cause an error during the file downloading process and the system may not enter its normal operation mode until the subdirectory is removed from the server The user should always check the FTP server to see if it s configured properly To do this open the IE browser window enter the correct address in the URL window The standard format is ftp username password ip_address Example ftp john 1a2b3c 192 168 1 1 where John is the user name and 1a2b3c is the password 6 5 7 INP 102 Ethernet Modem Combination INP 102 is an extension of INP 100 It has all the features of an INP 100 plus a built in modem The communication protocol supported by the modem is Modbus ASCII The communication protocol supported by the RS 485 Ethernet Modem gateway port is Modbus RTU The INP 102 converts all Modbus ASCII incoming modem requests to Modbus RTU for internal and gateway communication then it
307. mize the screen gt Click Maximize The graph will fill your screen GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS To add style and dimension to graphs use the Plot screen and follow these steps Advanced Waveform Analysis Customization r Axes K Axis 2 C Ayit3 C Avis 4 Ava 5 C Aves 6 30 _ IG OEC Shadow C A T Mark Data Points Choose one or more axes From the 3D buttons choose Shadow 3D or Off Choose to Mark Data Points or not VV VV Choose a style from Plot Style gt Choose a Comparison Plot Style To Add Subsets to the Graph gt Use the Subsets screen II x General Plot Subsets Ass Fort Cole Stylo gt Subsets to Graph Sao Ld gt From the Subsets screen choose Subsets to Graph gt Choose number of Scrolling Subsets to be graphed To Set the Configuration of the Y Axis and the X Axis GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 25 VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS gt Use the Axis screen Advanced Waveform Analysis Customization a xj General Plot Subsets Axis Font Color Style MY Axis ineaf C Log Auto C MinC Max C Min Max Min 95 16575 Max 45 3425 rX Axis Linear C Log C Auto C MinC Max Min Max Min fo Max 133 203 e Set Linear or Log Axis e Set Auto Min Max or Min Max e Set
308. mp SCHEDULER PROGRAM ADD A SCRIPT COMMAND 14 10 Add a Script Command This screen enables you to add or edit a script command This section will discuss adding a script Section 14 11 will discuss editing a script command _iAddScrint Corna loxi Y D000 System Device bd Number of Retries jos Primary Commands Send switch string Secondary Commands 14 10 1 Add a script command gt Use the pull down menu to select a Device The device you choose in this window will determine the choices available for the other screens gt Use the pull down menu to select the Number of Retries from 0 to 5 This is the number of times the software will attempt to connect V Use the pull down menu to select a Primary Command gt Type in or click to select the Secondary Command s When you add a Device the Primary Command will be Retrieve and the Secondary Commands will be a selection of logs gt Click OK 14 10 2 Add an EPM 7000 Series Device script command If you have an EPM 7000 Series Device connected to the GE Script amp Scheduler the above screen will appear slightly different The process is the same as for an EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 17 EDIT A SCRIPT COMMAND CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM 14 11 Edit a Script Command gt Select a command that you would like to edit by clicking on it If you click the Edit button before you select a command to e
309. municator Retrieve Logs The files produced by the Log Converter program can be accessed in Drive Program Files GE Communicator EXT in a default subdirectory GE Script and Scheduler has a new Process Log which is in HTML format and carries the HTML extension The Process Log consists of three top level files that work together to signal an error and provide links to detailed script logs and detailed log converter logs Following are the files that make up the Process Log EPMSchedulerLog Main Html Software generated top layer file with frame set linked to EPMSchedulerLog Detail Htm and EPMSchedulerRun TimeLog Html EPMSchedulerLog Detail Html Software generated blank frame file EPMSchedulerRun TimeLog Html Software generated schedule process log with hypertext link to detailed script logs and detailed Log Converter logs If any type of error occurs during the execution of a scheduled script EPMSchedulerRun Time Log Html will have an entry in red with the appropriate hypertext link to its detailed logs The Reset Alarm button will also create a visual alarm red background color and a continuous beep until the user clears it if an error occurs To clear the contents of a current EPMSchedulerRun TimeLog Html file the user deletes that file from its location GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW y It is strongly recommended that the user back up th
310. n Edit a Location gt Select a New Location listing in the List of Locations Field Your selection is highlighted gt Click the Edit button The Location Editor screen appears displaying the computer s communication settings gt Follow the above procedure to Edit Locations and or Devices Sort Locations gt Use the pull down menu to select a sort method A to Z Z to A Newest to Oldest or Oldest to Newest gt Click Sort By Remove a Location gt Select and click Remove Connect to a Location gt Click once on the location to which you would like to connect your computer You may only connect to one location at a time gt To change to a different location you MUST disconnect from the current location by selecting it and clicking Disconnect Click Connect When the connection is made the selected location appears in the Connected To Locations section GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 7 EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER gt Click Close The Device Status screen appears confirming the connection The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters If the Connection Fails A popup screen will alert you Check that all cables are secure that the RS 232 cable is connected to the correct Com Port on the computer and that the computer is set to use the same baud rate and protocol as the GE
311. n Calculation Example Three Element Meter with 3 VWWye connected PT s and 3 CT s ABC Power Compan Substation Big Station Name Joe Engineer Stn Trf Bank No Date 2 14 2002 Trf Manf THSIN AT4391 01 Loss Factors for GE Communicator Software Cale Used No Load Loss Watts LWFE 0 04314 0 043 XV Low 13090 we SS Y Tet f E Transformer Test Data Value 3 Phase__ _1 Phase_ Calculated Calc kVA No Load Loss Watts 15400 es 5133 33 Full Load Loss Watts 69200 23066 67 23 07 Exciting Current 083 Impedance PO S Phase Phase Calculated Self Cooled kVA Rating 16800 5600 Phase to Phase Phase to Grd Test Voltage 13080 7558 Full Load Current 741 Meter Installation Data nstrument Transformers Numerator ______ Denominator Multiplier __ otential Trf 7200 120 60l urrent Trf 1500 5 300 ower Multiplier Meter Secondary Voltage 120 120 volts for EPM 9650 Meter Secondary Current 5 5amps for EPM 9650 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS Line Loss Compensation Calculation Three Element Meter with 3 VWye connected PT s and 3 CT s Company Substation S Stn Trf Bank No ooo Metering Point Information ES See eee for GE Communicator Software Full Load Loss Watts LWCU DIV 0 DIV 0 Loss Factors Calc
312. n Editor screen appears ection Manager Location Editor eins Port Network ka vices Al Location On this screen you program the communication settings for each New Location gt Type a name for the New Location gt Click Serial Port or Network gt Enter settings Com Settings Com Port COM 1 99 Baud Rate 1200 115200 Flow Control None or Hardware Data Bits 8 or 7 Parity None Even Odd 5 4 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION Add a Device gt Click the Add Button in the Devices at Location box If at the top of the screen you clicked Serial Port a Serial Port Device Connection is added gt Click Network to add a Network Device Connection Here you can add up to 255 Devices Serial Port and or Network connections at one Location nection Manager Location Editor Location Name Senal Port Network ocation _Bemove Deen y All devices must have the same connection parameters Baud Parity and Flow Control NOTE y Multiple Devices slow down polling NOTE Edit Devices at Location gt Scroll down to find all devices gt Click on any Device Address Device Name or Description to edit Device Settings The Connection Manager Location Device Editor screen appears GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 5 EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION 5 6 CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER
313. n POLL DATA gt Polling Item Set up In each DEVICE_X DEV_DATA section you can have up to 64 items Any extra items will be ignored GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Set a unique ID D_UID so any program can easily access this item Set a data label D_LABEL optional Set Modbus register in decimal 1 based D_ADDR VV VV Set how many Modbus registers D_LENGTH Note Each register is 2 bytes long V Set data type D_TYPE See Modbus Protocol Mapping Manual V Set special operations such as multiplying PT or CT ratio D_USE_SPECIAL gt Set value mode D_VALUEMODE as primary secondary or raw value gt Set display units D SHOW_KM optional CUSTOMIZING SCREENS CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS gt Seta N A value D_NA_VAL optional Example lt GE Multilin_ POLL DATA gt lt DEVICE_1 gt lt DEV_DATA gt lt item D_UID 1_1 D LABEL Inst Van D_ADDR 180 D_ LENGTH 2 D TYPE 7 D USE SPECIAL 3 D VALUEMODE Primary gt lt item gt up to 64 items lt DEV_DATA gt lt DEVICE_1 gt lt GE Multilin POLL DATA gt 6 6 4 Configuring WebMod NOTE WebMOD allows the network to interface with Modbus based EIDs WebMOD supports 12 Modbus TCP sockets 12 simultaneous connections The Modbus Port Number is 502 The Modbus Port Number is set on the Location Editor screen and Devices are added to the Network on this screen If you have a fir
314. n the Update Device button GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 17 CONFIGURING THE DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 11 Configuring the Digital Output Module Be sure each module has a unique address and is connected to the meter s Port 3 or 4 at the same baud rate as the port 57600 recommended see section 11 6 gt Retrieve the External Devices section of the Device Profile from the meter see Chapter 3 gt gt After you have entered the Digital Output module in the Type column and its address in the Assigned Address column click on the Edit button in the EPM Meter Settings column The following screen appears gt Enter label and Common Shorted to N C or N O for each output Click Lock to Manual Control if desired gt Click OK when done gt Click on the Module Settings button The following screen will appear reflecting the settings for Address Baud Rate and Transmission Delay Digital Output Externa Module Type BATT Addrece Bovwd Rate Transmit Delay 10 18 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES CONFIGURING THE RELAY OUTPUTS 10 12 Configuring the Relay Outputs Be sure each module has a unique address is entered in the EPM Meter s Device Profile and connected to Port 3 or 4 at the same baud rate See section 11 7 gt From the I O Devices menu select Relay Control The following screen appears sternal Relay Co
315. nalog Input Input Channel Label High Value 20mA Low Value 4mA 100 0000 10000000 0000 pooom ioe LS C C C rrewoon Ca SC emp Sensor 2 K 0 0000 1800 0000 1800 0000 10 14 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES CONFIGURING THE ANALOG INPUT MODULE gt Enter label and scaling factor for each input The Value columns will appear in either milliamps or Volts depending on the type of input chosen in the Device Profile gt Click OK when done gt Click on the Module Settings button The following screen will appear reflecting the settings for Address Baud Rate and Transmission Delay Analog Input O to SY faternal Module ropramme Module lype hm wy yenn e Veron Address Raud Rate Tinnoma Delay GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 15 CONFIGURING THE KYZ OUTPUT MODULE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 10 Configuring the KYZ Output Module Be sure each module has a unique address and is connected to the EPM Meter s Port 3 or 4 at the same baud rate as the port 57600 recommended see section 11 6 gt Retrieve the External I O Modules section of the Device Profile from the EPM Meter see Chapter 3 gt After you have entered the KYZ module in the Type column and its address in the Assigned Address column click on the Edit button in the EPM Meter Settings column The following screen appears Device Profile KYZ Module Relay Accumu
316. ncies can be observed which are not an integer multiple of the fundamental They can appear as discrete frequencies or as a wide band spectrum To perform the analysis there must be a waveform record with a 200ms duration For a 50Hz system the waveform is 10 cycles for a 60Hz system the waveform is 12 cycles By default the starting point for Interharmonic Analysis of a Waveform is its first point But a user can set a starting point place the mark anywhere in the waveform assuming that there will be enough sample points available after the starting point If there are not enough points in this waveform capture the software will check the next waveform record s stored in the database If it is contiguous additional points up to 200ms will be retrieved for analysis For a waveform with sampling rate equal to or less than 64 the software will only check the next 1 contiguous record For a waveform with a sampling rate equal to or greater than 128 the software will check the next two contiguous records Resetting the mark will set the starting point back to the waveform s first point gt From the detailed view of the graph from the main Waveform screen click the Interharmonic Analysis button The following screen will appear Waveforms W_Meterl Waveform 81 4 16 2002 2 24 10 561 PM Waveform Vbr Sag Ven Sag Waveform for Interharmonic Analysis 50Hz Window W_Meter1 Vbn 4 16 2002 2 24 10 561 00 PM 72 66 30 89 1
317. nd Phase to Phase Volts Volts CA 40 0 One Second VA A B C VA A 40 1 One Second VA A B C VA B 40 2 One Second VA A B C VA C 41 0 One Second VA Total VA Total 42 0 One Second One Second VAR A B C VARA 42 1 One Second One Second VAR A B C VARA 42 2 One Second One Second VAR A B C VARA 43 0 One Second VAR Total VAR Total 44 0 One Second One Second Watts A B C Watts A 44 1 One Second One Second Watts A B C Watts B 44 2 One Second One Second Watts A B C Watts C 45 0 One Second Watts Total Watts Tota 46 0 One Second Frequency Frequency 47 0 One Second Power Factor A B C PF A 47 1 One Second Power Factor A B C PF B 47 2 One Second Power Factor A B C PF C 48 0 One Second Power Factor Total PF Total 49 0 One Second Imbalance Voltage 49 1 One Second Imbalance Current 216 2 Block Window Average Watt 217 3 Maximum Block Window Positive Watt 217 4 Maximum Block Window Negative Watt 218 3 Minimum Block Window Positive Watt 218 4 Minimum Block Window Negative Watt 194 4 Phase A N Phase A B Voltage THD 195 0 Phase B N Phase B C Voltage THD 196 0 Phase C Phase C A Voltage THD 4 22 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Table 4 2 Custom Modbus Readings 197 0 Phase A Current THD 198 0 Phase B Current THD 199 0 Phase C Current THD gt Use the buttons at the bottom of
318. nects only two points Distance between devices is typically limited to fairly short runs Current standards recommend a maximum of 50 feet but some users have had success with runs up to 100 feet Communications speed is typically in the range of 1200 bits per second to 57 600 bits per second RS 232 connection can be accomplished using Port 1 of the EPM 9450 9650 or the Optical Port on the face of the EPM 9800 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GLOSSARY RS 485 Sag Secondary Rated Serial Port Slave Device Swell THD Time Stamp TOU Uncompensated Power VT Threshold Voltage Imbalance Voltage Quality Event VT Ratio GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GLOSSARY A type of serial network connection that connects two or more devices to enable communication between the devices An RS 485 connection will allow multi drop communication from one to many points Distance between devices is typically limited to around 2 000 to 3 000 wire feet Communications speed is typically in the range of 120 bits per second to 115 000 bits per second A voltage quality event during which the RMS voltage is lower than normal for a period of time typically from 1 2 cycle to 1 minute Any Register or pulse output that does not use any CT or VT Ratio The type of port used to directly interface with a PC In Modbus communication a Slave Device only receives a Request Packet from a Master Devic
319. new color by moving the red green and blue sliders gt Create black by moving all sliders down white by moving all sliders up The large square on the right shows the color you have created gt Click OK to return to the graph Log Viewer will redraw using the new color scheme gt Click the Restore button to return all color schemes to default values To create a label for the graph 8 16 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING TRENDING AND DEMAND GRAPHS XY AND CIRCULAR gt Select User Labels from the Options menu The following screen appears Graph Labels GE Power Graphs 1998 2004 anced Tools for Reporting and Analysis gt Enter a label in each line and click OK The two line label will appear on the right side of the graph gt Click Restore to enter the previous label To view a summary of data for any point on the graph gt Position the curser on the graph and hold down the mouse button GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 17 VIEWING THE LIMITS LOG CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 8 Viewing the Limits Log gt From Log Viewer s main screen click on the Out of Limit button or View Data gt Limits Log Viewer displays limit information for the selected log file s based on the time range specified in the Select Time Range section of its main screen see section 8 4 Rat Date Time End Date Time Durston Sj Device Set index Lent iD State
320. ng Profile Settings Etena vo modes After you have finished configuring any or all of the programmable settings use the BUTTONS at the bottom of the screen as follows gt Click on the settings you would like to save then proceed with the Update GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 3 RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER gt Implement the changes by clicking on the Update Device button This sends the new edited Device Profile to the meter iy You must update the Meter Device profile for any of the programmable settings to take effect NOTE A Warning will appear asking you if you want to Save Connected Device Settings gt Store the profile for later use by clicking on the Save button A dialogue box will ask where you would like to save the profile gt Open a previously saved profile by clicking on the Load button A dialogue box will ask for the location of the saved profile gt Print a copy of the profile by clicking on the Report button The Report screen will appear as shown here Device Profile Report VoRage Back v sis Pawar Duacian quadrani 1 v Deiane ond Ouadrant2 3 Recaved Pwr Factor Display od 20 g d 03 Q Using the Report Page Page Arrows Select a page to view Zoom Adjusts the Viewing Magnification Print Range Adjusts the Range of Pages to be printed at 100 4 4 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGU
321. nges to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter 3 3 7 DNP Custom Class Map The DNP Custom Class Map is a useful tool for prioritizing the readings in your system and the frequency of the readings The DNP Custom Classes Map also keeps your system free from thousands of unwanted readings For a list of available readings see Appendix E in the GE Communicator EXT User Manual gt From the Device Profile screen section 3 2 click on the button beside General Settings gt Click on the DNP Custom Classes Map button gt Double click on the DNP line GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 21 GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER The EPM 9650 supports DNP V3 00 Level 2 and this screen appears For details on programming the DNP Level 2 screens see Chapter 17 of this manual The EPM 9450 supports DNP V3 00 Level 1 The lower screen shown here appears if the connected device is an EPM 9450 gt Click on the arrow to the right of the Edit View window gt Select the type of reading you want to edit or view gt Select a Port and a Class 0 1 2 or 3 for that reading A Compressed Map creates a number sequence starting with 0 for only those points selected for a Class A Non Compressed Map like the one shown follows exactly the original DNP Mapping The Compressed Map is a more efficient way to search for assigne
322. ning and data switch strings if needed and commands are being sent A new scheduled run time is calculated If the Frequency Type is Once this script will be removed from the Scheduler immediately Any failures to connect or complete commands will be noted in the Scheduler log see Process Log below A multiple page Script Report will be generated when a user selects a script from the list box and clicks the Report button After GE Communicator EXT finishes the script the Scheduler starts the Log Converter Manager to convert the binary logs to Microsoft Access format The Scheduler automatically launches the Log Converter program which converts the log files one at a time to a database file after a download has succeeded After the Log Converter Manager finishes its conversion the Scheduler can resume its process and run the next script with the oldest run time If there are no files to convert the screen will appear as above Log Converter The log converter s purpose is to convert the binary data accumulated from the GE device into the ODBC compliant Access database for later retrieval This is done automatically within the software Devices The GE Script amp Scheduler can be used with many GE devices including EPM9450 9650 EPM9800 and Series 7000 meters The Scheduler Log can be viewed by clicking View Log on the main Scheduler screen The script logs produced by the Scheduler can be found in Drive Program Files GE Com
323. nly Warning Do NOT use the last settings if you do not have the appropriate firmware Check with Technical Support if you have a question WARNING gt When all settings are complete click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter 3 4 6 Cold Load Pickup gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Cold Load Pickup or double click on the Cold Load Pickup line The following submenu appears 5 Cold Load Pickup Time after control power is restored to startdemand Disabled Minimum time control power must be off before using Cold Load Pickup 0 Second s On this screen the user sets the Cold Load Pickup Delay in minutes This value is the delay from the time control power is restored to the time at which the user wants to resume demand accumulation GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 35 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt Double click on one of the parameters The following screen appears Cold Load Pickup Time after control poweris os Retai i minutes restored to start demand Minimum time control power must be off before using ES seconds Cold Load Pickup e Cold Load Pickup Delay can be 1 to 60 minutes or Disabled e Minimum time control powe
324. nments for EPM 9650 and 9800 Rev 1 8 Example One Second Phase A N Voltage is Line Number 34 and Point Number 0 in the DNP Object Mapping gt Write these numbers into the Object 30 Analog Input window of GE Communicator EXT When the Line and Point Numbers are written the software will fill in the description gt Repeat for each desired Analog Input Point gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click Update Device to update the meter The meter scans those points every second except for Tenth Second Readings Tenth Second Readings Line 18 to 32 are scanned as soon as the meter detects a change as often as every 50 milliseconds 16 4 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 16 CUSTOMIZING DNP V3 0 CONFIGURATION USING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT Deadband Object 32 Any DNP Static Point can be configured to create DNP Event Points Deadband and Class Assignments on the Object 32 screen are used to configure Analog Change Event Points In order to create Event Data Object 32 Points must be assigned to Class 1 2 or 3 Each point can have a different Class assignment Deadband defines the boundary value for that point For example suppose One ANALOG INPUT OBJECT 30 Second Phase to Neutral Volts AN is programmed and the Voltage Full Scale is 120 00V for the meter Entering 10 for Deadband will define the boundary value of 12V 10 of 120V Every second new Static Data is
325. nnection Manager Location Device Editor Device Properties Address a7 Name Description v Device Type EPM 9000 Series IP Address Network Port GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 7 SOFTWARE CONNECTION v NOTE 6 8 CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Ethernet Gateway Port 2 of the Internal Network Option Meter is used to add multiple additional units Additional meters must be configured to speak Modbus RTU and set to the same Baud Rate up to 115200 as the Internal Network Option Meter A computer talks to the Internal Network Option Meter via Modbus TCP This meter receives data in Modbus TCP incoming message format and communicates with other devices via Modbus RTU They do not have to be Internal Network Option units If additional devices are required gt gt gt gt In the Device Address field enter the address assigned to the additional meter Again each unit MUST have a unique address other than 1 1 is reserved as the address of the meter connected to the network In the Name field enter a name for the device one that is different from any others at that location In the Protocol field select Modbus TCP Leave the Device Type field set to Meter Click on the Close button when all information is entered If you are connecting to multiple meters at this location gt gt gt Repeat the above process for all meters Each device MUST have
326. nnection Type use the pull down menu to select either Remote Dial Up or Direct Single COM Port The Script Connection Properties are disabled until you enter this selection If the Connection Type is not set GE Communicator EXT program will treat it as an empty script gt From the pull down menu select the Number of Retries the number of times the software will try to connect from 0 to 5 In some situations connecting lines are shared by other programs or telephones The retries enable the software to try to connect more than once over a period of a few seconds If the retries fail the log will automatically note the date time and script name for which the connection was not completed The script will fail Setup Script Connecton lType Please select your connection type Number ol Rolness Ei Start Loy Converter alter thit tcript it finiched Script Connection Propertiet Ditabled coms 9600 bd Connection Type Direct Single COM Port gt Using the pull down menus enter the following selections e Comm Port Select from Com 1 to Com 99 See note below e Baud Rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 e Flow Control Select None or Hardware e Data Bits Select 7 or 8 e Parity Select None Even or Odd Connection Type Remote Dial Up Two additional screens will appear GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 9 SET UP A SCRIPT CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCH
327. nto Name Change Not Installed Not Installed Not installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Solect New Stato Untock Each module has four relays that can be configured using this screen gt To change the state of one or more relays click the box next to the relay s you want to change gt Use the pull down menu next to Select New State to assign a Lock Common to N C Lock Common to N O or an Unlock state to the relay s gt Click on the Apply button to send the new setting to one or more relays of one or more modules gt Click OK when you have finished configuring all Relay Outputs GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 19 USING THE DIGITAL INPUT MODULE CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 13 Using the Digital Input Module Be sure each module has a unique address and is connected to the meter s Port 3 or 4 at the same baud rate as the port 57600 recommended see section 11 6 gt Retrieve the External Devices section of the Device Profile from the meter see Chapter 3 gt After you have entered the Digital Input module in the Type column and its address in the Assigned Address column click on the Edit button in the EPM Meter Settings column The following screen appears Device Profile Digtal Inout input Channel Lobel Op
328. o _Concel_ DEMO MODE Disabled and Limited Features 1 No Device Address greater than 1 can be used and no I O Modules can be used If you change the address to anything but 1 you will not be able to communicate with the meter 2 Some Log Viewer Features are disabled e Cannot view data from multiple devices Cannot run multiple instances Cannot print pages to a printer 1 8 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 3 Script amp Scheduler Features disabled Cannot print pages to a printer 4 Script amp Scheduler Features Limited GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Scheduler only runs one script Each Script only allows one device at Address 1 SOFTWARE LICENSE 1 9 FEATURE COMPARISON FOR ADVANCED MODELS CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 1 6 Feature Comparison for Advanced Models Advanced Meters are available in three models each with an array of features The Table below shows the Advanced Models with possible features for each model Table 1 1 Advanced Meter Models with Features Feature scence I eee een Waveform Full Scales Yes Yes Yes Transformer Loss Compensation Yes Yes Yes Trending Setup for Historical Yes Yes Yes Logs PQ amp Waveform Thresholds Yes Yes Yes Pulse Accumulations Yes Yes Yes Program External I O Modules Yes Yes Ye
329. o 5 15 of this chapter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL SET DEVICE TIME CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 7 Set Device Time gt gt After connecting to the meter on the menu bar select Tools gt Click Set Device Time Set Device On Board Clock Month Day Year Date ZE Hour Minute Second Time El Cm Comm d Use PC Time gt Set the Month Day Year Hour Minute and Second or click Use PC Time gt Click Send to send the new settings to the meter or click Cancel S 22 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER RETRIEVE DEVICE TIME 5 8 Retrieve Device Time gt After connecting to the Meter on the menu bar select Tools gt Click Retrieve Device Time The following screen will appear gt Click OK to return to the main screen To adjust Meter Time see section 5 18 Current Device Time i Date Time Polling 121689 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL RESET DEVICE INFORMATION CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 9 Reset Device Information gt After connecting to the meter on the menu bar select Tools gt Click Reset Device Information The following screen will appear Reset Device Parameters E Reset All Logs Revenue Power Quality Etc Reset Historical Log 1 Revenue Log E Reset Historical Log 2 Revenue Log E Reset Sequence of Events Log Bf Reset Digital Input L
330. o as quadrants Most power applications label the right hand corner as the first quadrant and number the remaining quadrants in a counter clockwise rotation Following are the positions of the quadrants 1st upper right 2nd upper left 3rd lower left and 4th lower right Power flow is generally positive in quadrants 1 and 4 VAR flow is positive in quadrants 1 and 2 The most common load conditions are Quadrant 1 power flow positive VAR flow positive inductive load lagging or positive power factor Quadrant 2 power flow negative VAR flow positive capacitive load leading or negative power factor An entry or record that stores a small amount of data A point at which a Register reaches its maximum value and rolls over to zero Logs are cleared or new or default values are sent to counters or timers The Rolling Sliding Window Average is the average power calculated over a user set time interval that is derived from a specified number of sub intervals each of a specified time For example the average is calculated over a 15 minute interval by calculating the sum of the average of three consecutive 5 minute intervals This demand calculation methodology has been adopted by several utilities to prevent customer manipulation of kW demand by simply spreading peak demand across two intervals A type of serial network connection that connects two devices to enable communication between devices An RS 232 connection con
331. o your new document gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen To reset the Max Min and Demand Readings see Chapters 3 4 5 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING REAL TIME READINGS 7 2 3 Poll Reading Grid To view all available polling data of the currently connected device gt gt Select Poll Reading Grid from the Real Time Polling menu The following screen appears 56 Polling Grid E 5 0 1 second 1 second Average Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum 1 Cycle Frequency Pwr Factor A Pwr Factor B Pwr Factor C Pwr Factor Total Imbalance V Imbalance I THD Volts AN AB THD Volts BN BC THD Volts CN CA THDIA THDIB THD IC KFactor A KFactor B KFactor I C Ph Angle Volts AN Ph Angle Volts BN Dh Annlan Wanlin AAI Coincident Channel P Max Watt N Max Watt P Min Watt N Min Watt Thermal Average VAR Block Window Average VAR Rolling Window Average VAR Scroll left right and up down to access all data The first two columns are Instantaneous values Column 3 is the Thermal Average Columns 4 to 7 are the Thermal Max and Mins and Column 8 is a Single Cycle value captured during the last screen update To adjust the column widths position the cursor on a line between columns at the top of the screen When the cursor changes to a left right arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the column border left or right Release the
332. odbus RTU Modbus ASCII or DNP 3 0 See Chapter 2 for details Mode Port 3 or Port 4 only If you are using I O modules set one of these ports in Master mode Set the port to operate at 57600 baud To change the setting use the pull down menu to select Slave or Master Make other changes for your application Internal Network Option If your meter has the Internal Network Option see your Network Administrator for the correct settings Settings will vary from network to network If your meter has the INP100 Option 10 100BaseT and you click on the Advanced Settings button this set of screens will appear Advanced Network Option Settings Ao TFTP Dowlod _Alam Emod Services amp Sacuriy OBP Y GE Protocol EGO Security The meter is shipped with initial settings or you can fully configure the settings using these screens and FTP Client The process is detailed in Chapter 6 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GENERAL SETTINGS kA NOTE v NOTE CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER These screens are not supported by meters with the INP10 Option gt Internal Modem Option If your meter has this option set the number of Rings to Answer from the pull down menu Set the Baud Rate to 57600 or to match your system baud rate gt Dial Out Profile Click the Dial Out Profile button and the following screen appears Details on programming this screen and on
333. og E Reset Digitol Output Log E Reset Flicker Log E Reset Wavetorm Log mi Rosot PO Log gt Select the parameters that you want to reset gt Click OK A screen will appear that confirms the reset gt Click OK to return to the main screen 5 24 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER RETRIEVE DEVICE STATUS 5 10 Retrieve Device Status gt After connecting to the meter on the menu bar select Tools gt Click Retrieve Device Status The following screen will appear List of Currently Connected Devices DSP Siae On Kan Devic ame Comm State OSP Time Gee u Prorecion A COM KEL ANTAIT 11125807 OM Full Acces Password Protecton Daatind g GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 25 LOW LEVEL ACCESS CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 11 Low Level Access gt After connecting to the meter on the menu bar select Tools gt GE Multilin Programmer gt Click Low Level Access 16 04 00 OO AA 13 61 63 10 ON NNA Of ANO NS OO AN 00 00 03 66 00 00 00 00 00 Low Level Access is not required for normal operation Low Level Access is a diagnostic tool for third party software and devices It is designed to be used ONLY by appropriate level Programming Personnel in conjunction with the Modbus Map The latest version of the Modbus Map can be downloaded from the Free Downloads section of our website www GEmultilin com 5 26 GE CO
334. oints are used to record voltage type events such as voltage surges sags and transients The current settings are used to record faults on the line or in rush currents from devices such as motors Typically to catch these events set the limit to above 200 of full scale GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS Waveform Clipping Threshold e EPM 9450 9650 5 Amp Standard Hardware 61 9437A Peak before clipping e EPM 9450 9650 1 Amp Hardware 12 09A Peak before clipping Hardware Triggers To enable a waveform or PQ recording for any of the 8 High Speed Inputs click in the appropriate box This will trigger a recording based on a contact trigger This is useful to monitor an open device and to capture the waveform during that operation Samples per Cycle To choose the Samples per Cycle to be recorded at 60 Hz click on the Sampling Rate pull down menu Choose from 16 32 64 128 256 and 512 samples per cycle The number of samples per cycle you choose will inversely effect the number of cycles per capture e If you select 256 a Capture Only pop up screen will ask you to select Volts A B C or 1A B C e Ifyou select 512 a Capture Only pop up screen will ask you to select one of the individual channels As you increase the number of samples you will record more detailed information The table below illustrates the Effects of Sampling Rate
335. ollowing screen appears Flash Me Communications Parameters Address Baud Rate 0600 Serial Port gt Ifyou are already connected to the GE Meter you want to upgrade disregard this screen click Next and skip to Click Start to begin the upgrade below gt If you are not connected to the GE Meter and or you have a series of GE Meters to upgrade this screen avoids the reloading of files gt Inthe Address field enter the Address of the GE Meter to which your computer is connected that you want to 11Flash upgrade gt Inthe Baud Rate field enter the baud rate of the GE Meter port to which your computer is connected that you want to Flash upgrade gt Inthe Serial Port field enter the computer s comm port you are using gt Click Next GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 5 FLASH UPGRADING THE EPM UNIT CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING fi If you want to Flash upgrade using a modem connect with a modem connection first y then enter the Flash sequence mode NOTE Flashing Status aming you are about to begin the Flash Process Press Start to Continue Sequence Number ae Brevious il Stor conce gt Click Start to begin the upgrade A final warning screen appears gt Click Yes Flash upgrading begins The following screen displays the progress of the upgrade Flashing Status Requesting Current Operations Mode D The D Unit is Running in Normal Mode Flash Programming Complete
336. om the new calendar GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 1 GENERAL PROCEDURE 9 2 NOTE CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE To use Daylight Savings Time you must enable it in the meter s Device Profile see Chapter 3 EPM 9450 9650 or 4 EPM 9800 and enter the associated dates Or you can use Auto DST which sets Daylight Savings Time automatically for the United States only If GPS Time IRIG B is connected you must set the appropriate time zone Date and time settings except year are overridden by GPS Time An IRIG B signal generating device connected to the GPS satellite system will synchronize meters located at different geographic locations See the meter s Installation and Operation Manuals for installation instructions GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE 9 2 Creating a TOU Calendar Profile The TOU calendar profile sets the parameters for TOU data accumulation You may store up to twenty calendars in the meter and an unlimited amount on your computer To create a new calendar follow the steps below To edit an existing calendar see section 10 3 gt From the Time of Use menu select Calendar Settings The following screen appears Select Calendar New Year Selection 005 ca gt From the pull down menu choose the year for which you would like to create a TOU usage structure gt Click on New Calendar The following screen appea
337. omatic adjustment for daylight savings Disable Disables an automatic adjustment for daylight savings Auto DST Sets Daylight Savings Time automatically for the United States only Time changes automatically occur at 2 00 AM your local time on the first Sunday in April and the last Sunday in October User Defined Allows you to set the Daylight Savings Time manually Start Set the Month Day and Hour when the adjustment for Daylight Savings will commence End Set the month day and hour when the adjustment for Daylight Savings will conclude Line Synchronization Set Enable or Disable and Frequency The basic function of Line Synchronization is to adjust the real time clock to track the time based on the power line frequency For this purpose Phase A voltage ONLY is used Line Sync is disabled if a GPS signal is present How Time is Adjusted After the clock is synchronized to the line the meter periodically checks the cumulative difference between the real time clock in cycles and the line cycle count If the absolute difference is greater that 50 60 cycles the clock is adjusted 1 second accordingly To set the meter on board clock use Set Meter Time from the Tools menu see section 4 26 When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the Meter To Reset Logs
338. on the left side of the screen To view the PQ Waveform Settings gt Click on the record s gt Click the PQ Waveform Settings box To view a waveform gt Double click on the waveform record See section 8 10 for details on viewing waveforms To adjust the column widths gt Position the cursor between columns at the top of the screen gt When the cursor changes to a left right arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the column border left or right gt Release the button when the column is at the desired width GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 33 VIEWING THE POWER QUALITY GRAPH CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 12 Viewing the Power Quality Graph To view a graph of any PQ record gt Click on the desired record gt Click the Graph button The following screen appears gt Use the pull down menu on the lower right of the screen to access a 3D graph and a Histogram of the record Power Quality 7 25 2006 11 59 59 PM to 7 14 2006 9 43 23 252 AM j Ven Vab t a o f So 2 5 8 250 u 5 x ps a 10 Duration Seconds 8 34 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING THE POWER QUALITY GRAPH PQ Counts Magnitude and Duration 7 25 2006 11 59 59 PM to 7 14 2006 9 43 23 252 AM iy Use Scroll Bars on the side and bottom of the screens to adjust the view NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339. ond Power Factor A B C PF B 47 2 One Second Power Factor A B C PF C 48 0 One Second Power Factor Total PF Total 49 0 One Second Imbalance Voltage 49 1 One Second Imbalance Current 216 2 Block Window Average Watt 217 3 Maximum Block Window Positive Watt 217 4 Maximum Block Window Negative Watt 218 3 Minimum Block Window Positive Watt 218 4 Minimum Block Window Negative Watt 194 4 Phase A N Phase A B Voltage THD 195 0 Phase B N Phase B C Voltage THD GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Table 3 2 Most Frequently Used Custom Modbus Readings 196 0 Phase C Phase C A Voltage THD 197 0 Phase A Current THD 198 0 Phase B Current THD 199 0 Phase C Current THD GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 4 Revenue and Energy Settings 3 4 1 Demand Integration Intervals gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Revenue and Energy Settings gt Double click on the Demand Integration Intervals line The following submenu appears Thermal Averaging Time Interval Window Oh 15m Os Block Averaging Time Interval Window Uh 16m Ds Rolling Averaging Sub intervel Window Oh 5m 0s Rolling Sub intervals 3 Precketrve Rolling Window Average 100 00 gt Double click on any of the settings
340. op Bits for Modbus RTU and ASCII leave the Stop Bits at 1 Other protocols may require a different setting Use the pull down menu to select from 1 1 5 or 2 TxDelay Transmit Delay leave the TxDelay at Oms unless you are using equipment that requires a delay in the response time such as a radio modem Use the pull down menu to select from Oms 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 50ms 60ms 60ms or 70ms Protocol Direct Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use either Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII protocol Modbus RTU is recommended Modem Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use Modbus ASCII only Use the pull down menu to select from Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII or DNP 3 0 See Chapter 2 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide for details Mode Port 4 only If you are using I O modules set this port to Master mode Set the port to operate at 57600 baud To change the setting use the pull down menu to select Slave or Master Make other changes for your application Internal Network Option If your Meter has the Internal Network Option see your Network Administrator for the correct settings Settings will vary from network to network If your meter has the INP100 Option 10 100BaseT and you click on the Advanced Settings button the following set of screens will appear The meter is shipped with initial settings or you can fully configure the settings using these screens and FTP Client The process is detailed in Chap
341. owatt hour kWh Kilovolt ampere reactive hour kVARh Megawatt hour MWh Energy Active and Reactive Interval Type Demand Load Factor Block Demand Rolling Sliding Demand Window GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Measurement for energy equal to the amount of work done by 1 000 watts for one hour Measurement similar to kWh that reflects current drawn by a customer that produces no useful work but takes up space on the electrical distribution system 1 000 kWh The total consumption that is measured in Kilowatt hours kWh and Kilovolt ampere reactive hours kVARh An interval is composed of N subintervals 1 lt N lt 10 The data collected in the previous N subintervals is used in the demand calculation Rate at which electric energy is delivered to a system usually expressed in kW or MW There are two methods for calculating demand 1 Block window and 2 Rolling or sliding window An indicator of the quality of the load profile 0 to 1 for a certain period in the electrical system Demand calculations performed over a fixed period interval of time When that time period lapses the next interval starts where the previous interval ended Demand calculations performed over a fixed period interval of time that is made up of n subintervals n gt 2 When one subinterval elapses the demand value is computed by adding the most recently completed subinterval data to the demand in
342. ower must be off before using oo l seconds Cold Load Pickup e Cold Load Pickup Delay can be 1 to 60 minutes or Disabled This value is the delay from the time control power is restored to the time when the user wants to resume demand accumulation e Minimum time control power must be off before using Cold Load Pickup Value is set from 0 to 255 seconds gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen y For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button to send the new profile to the Meter NOTE 4 38 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS 4 4 8 Cumulative Demand Type gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Cumulative Demand Type or double click on the Cumulative Demand Type line This window appears Cumulative Demand Type Rolling Window 9 Block Window ss gt Click the radio button in front of Rolling sliding Window or Block fixed Window to select Cumulative Demand Type gt Click OK to exit the screen and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 4 4 9 Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval or double click on the Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval l
343. ower Quality and Alarm Settings This is the third group of settings in the Device Profile gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Power Quality and Alarm Settings line All of the settings in this group are listed pl 5 Limits EXT ElectroLogic Relay Control EXF PO Thresholds Waveform Recording EN50160 Flicker EXF Squared T and V Squared T Thresholds pl 5 High Speed Inputs gt Click on the particular Programmable Setting you would like to configure The settings will be detailed in the order they appear on the Device Profile screen 4 5 1 Limits Limit settings are based on a percentage of the Full Scales of FS which are set in the Limit and Waveform Full Scales section of the Device Profile section 4 3 2 Full Scales are based on CT and PT ratios set in the CT PT Ratios and System Hookup section of the Device Profile section 4 3 1 120V L N 208V L L and 5A gt Before programming Limits set the CT and PT ratios first gt Then set the Limit and Waveform Full Scales The software automatically updates the Full Scale However you can set it separately from the CT and PT Ratios 4 42 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside Limits or double click on the Limits line
344. pear gt Scroll down to find a particular date time or action gt To clear the Current Status window click the Clear Status button The screen will be cleared as follows Act sent Scheduler ae Frequency tet an Time Last Run Tima Ner saiat Weebly Day i weeh Sonday Tume 3043 PM 5 9 2001 30439 PM AUNOU P1658 PM WTI ISSI PM ranean I50S3 PM 3 S200 A2259 Pu AyD 4220 PM Newscript Weebty Day otweek Sunday Time 25153 PM 3 9200 25153 PM New script Day Time 40025 PM W5A001 A0025PM 8 4 2001 40 MPM Newscipt Da s Tine 41526 PM S5200 4I526PM 42001 41519PM seen 401S9PM GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM STATUS fi Individual logs for each script can be found by the name of the script in Drive C Program 4 Files GE Applications Communicator EXT Script Logs NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 27 EXIT CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM 14 17 Exit The best way to Exit the GE Script amp Scheduler software program is to click the Exit button on the main Scheduler screen gt First you must Stop the Scheduler gt Ifyou are ona screen other than the main Scheduler screen click the Close button until you return to the main Scheduler screen gt Click Close gt Click Exit A window will appear Script Scheduler v3 0 15 xj A Are you sure you want to terminate the scheduler program gt Click Yes to Exit Click No to
345. percentages is converting the transformer loss values based on the transformer ratings to the base used by the meter Correct calculation of loss compensation also requires knowledge of the meter installation In order to calculate the loss compensation settings you will need the following information regarding the meter and the installation e Number of meter elements GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION e Potential Transformer Ratio PTR e Current Transformer Ratio CTR e Meter Base Voltage e Meter Base Current This section is limited to application of EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 meters to three element metering installations As a result we know that e Number of metering elements 3 e Meter Base Voltage 120 Volts e Meter Base Current 5 amps The loss compensation values can be calculated in two ways gt Click the TLC Calculator button on the Transformer Loss screen of the EPM Device Profile The TLC Calculator button activates an Excel Spreadsheet ONLY if you have MS Excel installed on your computer A copy of the Excel Spreadsheet with Example Numbers is included at the end of this Appendix gt Enter the required data into the Excel Spreadsheet The Excel program will calculate the values needed for the Transformer Loss screen of the Device Profile gt Enter the values into the Device Profile e Use the wo
346. plays the computer port currently in use for the connection e Baud Rate displays the baud rate of the computer s communication port e Device Address displays the address of the connected device e Device Name displays the name of the connected device e Communication Protocol displays the communication protocol currently in use e Date and Time displays the computer s current date and time e Protection Status displays whether the password protection feature is enabled or disabled GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 5 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BASIC SCREEN ELEMENTS 1 6 CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 Computer Status Bar Network When using Network Connection to the meter Connection Status Communication Port Network Protocol onnected Network TCPAP Addr 1 135 15 17312 Devcel Modbus TCP PW Disabled SS Disabled Low Bat Device Address el Device Name Communication Protocol Protection Status Low Battery Modem Battery Status Only if Battery is Required Connection Status displays either Connected Disconnected or Not Found Communication Port displays the computer port currently in use for the connection Network Protocol displays the protocol being used for communication to the network Device Address displays the network address of the connected device Device Name displays the name of the connected device Communication Protocol displays
347. programmed level Energy Scale Settings O m O emas rr Eavan ao Digits Decimal Piaces Units Exemple Squared T Phase A 2k Squared T Phase B Squared T Phase C V Squared T Phase A V Squared T Phase B V Squared T Phase C e Q Hours Q Hours are obtained by lagging the applied voltage to a wattmeter by 60 degrees GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER Energy Scale Settings a a Example 2k 99999 99 7 2k 99999 99 e Global Settings Settings configured on one screen apply to screens associated with filled in rows If a row is left blank the associated screen is not modified Energy Scale Settings Global ltem Digis DecimalPlaces Units Example Quadrantt 4Wwh f gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt Click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS 4 4 2 Program Demand Integration Intervals Demand Intervals See EPM 9800 Installation and Operation Manual for details on Demand Integration gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button or double click on the Demand Integration Intervals line The following submenu appears Thermal Averaging Time Inter
348. programming screen gt Click Print to send the data to a printer To adjust the column widths position the cursor on a line between columns at the top of WW the screen When the cursor changes to a left right arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the column border left or right Release the button when the column is at the NOTE desired width 7 28 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 56k 10 56k 10 56k 490 4 90 490 gt To change any of the settings click OK which will return you to the gt Double click on Limits and any of the settings to access the gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS 7 4 5 Poll Device Control Status To view the status of the currently connected device gt Select Poll Device Status from the Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms menu The Device Status screen appears This screen displays the Status of the Settings set in the Programming Relay section of the Device Profile sections 3 11 and 4 11 Up to 8 assignments can be set per relay If there are no relays installed a note Relay Module Not Installed will appear on the screen gt To print this screen click on the Print button This is a read only screen gt To change any of the settings click OK which will return you to the main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click Edit Profile gt Double click on R
349. programming the meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS INTRODUCTION The meter uses the combination of the add subtract setting and the directional definition of power flow also in the profile to determine how to handle the losses Losses will be added to or subtracted from depending on whether add or subtract is selected the Received Power flow Example If losses are set to Add to and received power equals 2000 kW and losses are equal to 20kW then the total metered value with loss compensation would be 2020 kW for these same settings if the meter measured 2000 kW of delivered power the total metered value with loss compensation would be 1980 kW Since transformer loss compensation is the more common loss compensation method the meter has been designed for this application Line loss compensation is calculated in the meter using the same terms but the percent values are calculated by a different methodology as described in a subsequent section below B 1 1 Transformer Line Loss Compensation Performs calculations on each phase of the meter for every measurement taken Unbalanced loads are accurately handled Calculates numerically eliminating the environmental affects that cause inaccuracies in electromechanical compensators Performs Bidirectional Loss Compensation Requires no additional wiring the compensation occurs internally Imposes no add
350. pture section 3 11 e Setting and Retrieving Meter Time section 3 9 and Options section 3 12 Actual programming screens may vary depending on the options ordered with your meter The settings shown are Initial Settings for the EPM 9650 meter unless otherwise noted Most 9450 Meter settings are similar to the 9650 meter settings The EPM 9650 Meter supports DNP Level 2 For details on DNP Level 2 see chapter 16 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER RETRIEVE AND SEND DEVICE PROFILES 3 2 Retrieve and Send Device Profiles gt Click on the Profile button or select Tools gt Edit Current Device Profile GE Communicator EXT retrieves the programmable settings from the currently connected meter The following screen appears Retneving Programmable Settings from Device lime Remaining Reading Block A dialogue box appears to confirm that the profile was retrieved successfully Then the Device Profile screen appears Device Profile EP se00 EX5 General Settings Revenue and Energy Settings EX5 Power Quality and Alarm Settings EX5 Trending Profile Settings od External I O Modules This screen contains all the programmable settings currently stored in the connected meter Double click on the in front of each group to view the settings in that group gt Configure each of the programmable settings by clickin
351. quently Used Custom Modbus Readings Line Point Description 34 0 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts AN 34 1 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts BN 34 2 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts CN 35 0 One Second Auxiliary Volts V Aux 36 0 One Second A B C 1A 36 1 One Second A B C 1B INSTRUCTION MANUAL GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER Table 3 2 Most Frequently Used Custom Modbus Readings 36 2 One Second A B C 1C 37 0 One Second Measured N Current 1Nm 38 0 One Second Calculated N Current 1Nc 39 0 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts AB 39 1 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts BC 39 2 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts CA 40 0 One Second VA A B C VA A 40 1 One Second VA A B C VA B 40 2 One Second VA A B C VA C 41 0 One Second VA Total VA Total 42 0 One Second One Second VAR A B C VARA 42 1 One Second One Second VAR A B C VARA 42 2 One Second One Second VAR A B C VARA 43 0 One Second VAR Total VAR Total 44 0 One Second One Second Watts A B C Watts A 44 1 One Second One Second Watts A B C Watts B 44 2 One Second One Second Watts A B C Watts C 45 0 One Second Watts Total Watts Tota 46 0 One Second Frequency Frequency 47 0 One Second Power Factor A B C PF A 47 1 One Sec
352. r Make sure you save Connected Device Settings A pop up screen will ask if you want to Reset Logs It is recommended that you reset logs when you change any settings that effect logs See sections 3 2 and 3 2 5 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 43 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 5 2 ElectroLogic Relay Control To edit a Device Profile s GE Relay settings gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button or double click on the GE Relay line sp 5 Limits 4 HAF Electrologic Relay Control EX5 PQ Thresholds Waveform Recording The following screen appears This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings Device Profile Electro Logic Relay Control 1S oaea es ee oe ee e Posa mn Pe m Pasa TEE B m Seconds POs Fasa jano z Set Delay NG jo z Reset Delay Seconds jano Limits Set Digital Inputs Tri a Bea 01 0 1 Second Volts AN flint f Clear PAO IH Internal Input 01 z Shoned ie e gt To assign an item to the Relay Logic Tree select an Input for the tree by clicking on a bullet next to numbers 1 through 8 gt Choose Limits or Digital Inputs by clicking on the bullet in front of the word gt Select the Limit or Input you want to assign to the Relay Logic Tree Input you selected gt Press Set to confirm your selection The software wi
353. r The password has to have at least one character and not more than ten Communicator x The New Password is too small gt Click OK gt Type in new password then retype it gt Click OK gt Click Yes You now have a new password 11 8 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 12 1 Overview v NOTE GE Communicator EXT Chapter 12 Flash Upgrading The Flash command allows you to upgrade the following firmware components GE Communication Processor GE Comm This processing chip performs all tasks related to communication and storing data GE Digital Signal Processor GE DSP This processing chip performs all tasks related to data calculation LED Display This processing chip is installed in the GE External LED Display Internal Modem Card This optional card is installed in the meter and enables the meter to act as meter and modem in one device This card must be upgraded in addition to upgrading the GE Comm and DSP Refer to section 13 5 Internal Network Option This meter option allows a meter to communicate with multiple PC s concurrently This card must be upgraded in addition to upgrading the GE Comm and DSP Refer to section 13 6 The new GE Unit button upgrades the GE Comm and GE DSP firmware files at the same time and provides the check
354. r EXT acts as a plug in for integrating with third party software If left out Normal is the View Mode am Answer Modem 0 No 1 Open Port Wait for Modem to ring and attempt to answer Modem if ringing If left out software does not answer Modem GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS V 1 11 APPLICATION COMMAND LINE METHODS dr Dial Out Receive Call 0 No 1 After Software successfully answers the call it looks for a reason of call code based on the code Perform Automated functions Upon completion of all functions GE Communicator EXT places the Remote Modem into command mode sends an acknowledgment hangs up closes the communications port and exits the program mp Modem Password Must use period as place holder for a space dt User Defined DDE Topic Name for Start Screen 16 Topic Name must contain no spaces If left out Meter Designation is used as Topic Ir Retrieve Log Number 1 Historical Log 1 2 Historical Log 2 3 Both land 2 See Table Below for Other Combinations GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL C5 APPLICATION COMMAND LINE METHODS C 6 CHAPTER C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT COMMAND LINE ARGUMENTS V 1 11 Log to Retrieve Bits 15 14 13 12 10 9 Historical Log 1 Historical Log 2 Limit Log PQ Waveform Log Digital Input Log Digital Output Log Reserved Max Min Log
355. r Trending Interval is set for Greater than 1 Hour the meter will always save a record on the hour in the Trending Logs GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER EXTERNAL DEVICES 4 7 External Devices This setting of the Device Profile configures the Meter s External Devices a variety of I O 5 Trending Profile Settings gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 double click on the External Devices line The following screen appears je 1 0 Modules Assigned Nexus Module Nexus ae ge Aches Settings Settings Port SNE de 20mAON4 Analog Out 4 20mA 4 ch 132 Edt Eck 4 AO Module 1 No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned _ No Device Assigned No Device Assigned ___ No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned _ No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned No Device Assigned 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 y Click in the Type column and use the pull down menu to select the specific I O you wish to add Enter a unique address for each Use the Edit buttons to configure each module further Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen VV VV For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INST
356. r and release date GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 13 9 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND SETUP CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE 13 6 Hardware and Software Installation and Setup 13 10 NOTE Hardware Installation The typical Hardware Installation for the Energy Billing Module System is an RS 485 loop However the network that connects the hardware can be simple or complicated See Setup Requirements in Section 14 4 Software Installation The software required for the system GE Communicator ExT enables the user to program the meter and to communicate to the computer GE Communicator EXT software is installed in the meter at the factory The Energy Billing Module is also installed at the factory The user may only be required to update the software at some time in the future when new features are added to the software The initial installation is done for you MS Excel 97 2000 with SP3 or 2002 Software must be installed on your computer for the Energy Billing Module to work GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE USING THE ENERGY BILLING MODULE 13 7 Using the Energy Billing Module The Energy Billing Module software is an MS Excel based graphical user interface for viewing tracking comparing and analyzing real time electrical energy data It is a productivity tool that provides the energy information you need so you can monitor and control your loads to reduce ov
357. r must be off before using Cold Load Pickup Value is set from 0 to 255 seconds gt gt 3 4 7 Cumulative Demand Type gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button to send the new profile to the meter From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Cumulative Demand Type or double click on the Cumulative Demand Type line The following submenu appears Cumulative Demand Type 9 Rolling Window Block Window ss eE Click the radio button in fron of Rolling sliding Window or Block fixed Window to select Cumulative Demand Type Click OK to exit the screen and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS 3 4 8 Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button beside Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval or double click on the Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval line This window appears Energy Pulses and Accumulations in the Interval Energy Interval fs Minutes es gt Set the number of minutes for the Energy Interval gt Click OK to close the window and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen 3 4 9 Pulse
358. ram is a stand alone module for the GE Communicator EXT software package There are two supporting programs the GE Communicator EXT program and the Log Converter program Below is a list of the component files that complete this software program with a brief description of each and their location in your system 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL EPM Script amp Scheduler Exe EPM script and scheduler software program Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext CommExt exe GE Communicator EXT software program Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext LogConverter exe GE s log converter program After GE Communicator EXT finishes retrieving a log or finishes executing a script the Log Converter program translates the binary log into a database file Access format Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Log Viewer EPM Scheduler Log EPM Script amp Scheduler program generated log file Text format It records all activities of the EPM Script amp Scheduler program Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext script name Html New format script name Log Old format Communicator EXT generated log file Text format It records all activities when GE Communicator EXT runs a script Each log file is for a specific script only Future activities for the same script will be appended to the same log file Location Drive C Program File
359. re Wye The Device Profile screen including the Form above the connection window will reflect your selection GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GENERAL SETTINGS 4 3 2 4 8 Ww NOTE A WARNING CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER Changes to the Operational Frequency Range do not change the Full Scale Value for Frequency Changes must be made in the Limits and Waveform Full Scale Settings screen Like Voltage and Current the nominal value should be used For example 50 for 50Hz circuits gt Click OK The following screen asks you to verify the Kh Ke Ratio for the Test Pulse Setting Kh Ke Ratio is Secondary Watthour Constant over kWh the energy Ke setting for EY2 test puise Do you want to use the following Kh Ke for the test pulse setting 1000 Kh kKe PT Ratio X CT Ratio KAIKE 9 090909 gt Click Yes or Click No and re enter values in the CT amp PT Ratio screen gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt Click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the Meter gt Reset Logs clearing logs and accumulations Be sure to capture needed meter information before updating the device Data will no longer be available after the Reset The meter will be prepared for new installation One Amp Current Input Addendum Modification Number M10 0 For special circumstances the Meter can be ordered with
360. re upgrade Be sure your version of GE Communicator EXT is compatible with the firmware upgrade you want to perform You can download the latest software version through the internet site at www GEmultilin com Click on the Free Downloads button gt Copy the new firmware upgrade files to a directory on your computer The GE Comm firmware upgrade is divided into two files The DSP upgrade is a single file The GE Unit button will upgrade all three files GE Comm and GE DSP at the same time Generally when you perform an update update all firmware at the same time gt Be sure to read the text file accompanying the firmware files for important information such as the Checksum Code Write down the Checksum Code If you are flashing GE Comm Only or GE DSP Only you will need it later in the Flash upgrade process Flash upgrading will fail if an incorrect Checksum Code is entered If you are flashing using GE Unit the checksum will be entered automatically i The Checksum Code consists only of the digits 0 9 and the letters A F The checksum will 4 never contain the letters O or which are often confused for zeros and ones NOTE Connect to the GE Meter gt From the Tools Menu select Flash Me The following screen appears If you have not upgraded your software you will not have a EPM Unit button To Flash Upgrade GE Comm Only or GE DSP Only see section 13 3 Select Device To Flash EPM Unit 9 Internal N
361. readings Loss compensation values must be calculated based on the meter installation As a result transformer loss values must be normalized to the meter by converting the base voltage and current and taking into account the number of elements used in the metering installation For three element meters the installation must be normalized to the phase to neutral voltage and the phase current in two element meters the installation must be normalized to the phase to phase voltage and the phase current This process is described in the following sections B 2 1 Loss Compensation in Three Element Installations Loss Compensation is based on the loss and impedance values provided on the Transformer Manufacturer s Test Report A typical test report will include at least the following information e Manufacturer e Unit Serial Number e Transformer MVA Rating Self Cooled e Test Voltage e No Load Loss Watts e Load Loss Watts or Full Load Loss Watts e Exciting Current 100 voltage e Impedance The transformer MVA rating is generally the lowest MVA rating the self cooled or OA rating of the transformer winding The test voltage is generally the nominal voltage of the secondary or low voltage winding For three phase transformers these values will typically be the three phase rating and the phase to phase voltage All of the test measurements are based on these two numbers Part of the process of calculating the loss compensation
362. remain on the screen J You can also Minimize the program if you want the Scheduler to continue to run but not A appear on your PC by clicking the Minimize button in the upper right hand corner of the ne screen The icon will appear at the bottom of your screen To restore the Scheduler to view on your screen click the icon at the bottom of your screen 14 28 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 3 00111010110110 Chapter 15 Flicker 010101110010 011 1 15 1 Overview Flicker is the sensation that is experienced by the human visual system when it is subjected to changes occurring in the illumination intensity of light sources The primary effects of flicker are headaches irritability and sometimes epilepsy IEC 61000 4 15 and former IEC 868 describe the methods used to determine flicker severity This phenomenon is strictly related to the sensitivity and the reaction of individuals It can only be studied on a statistical basis by setting up suitable experiments among people GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 15 1 THEORY OF OPERATION CHAPTER 15 FLICKER 15 2 Theory of Operation Flicker can be caused by voltage variations which are caused by variable loads such as arc furnaces laser printers and microwave ovens In order to model the eye brain change which is a complex physiological process the si
363. ribed in section 12 1 will still run Log Off to end your password session and renew password protection immediately rather than wait for the two minute timer to expire gt Select Tools gt Passwords gt Enable Disable Passwords to enable passwords gt Select Tools gt Passwords gt Log On Enter Password Password gt Enter a Level 1 or Level 2 password gt Click OK gt To Log Off select Tools gt Passwords gt Log Off The status screen returns to remind you that password protection is still enabled Protection Status gt Click OK GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL dis CHANGING PASSWORDS CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS 11 6 Changing Passwords If you are going to use Passwords it is a good idea to change them from time to time gt From the Tools menu select Passwords gt Change Change Password To Change a Password Fill In The Following Fields Current Password oa gt Enter the password you would like to change in the Current Password field You may enter either the Level 1 or the Level 2 password gt Type the new password in the New Password field then retype it below gt Click OK The following screen will appear Change Password xi Are you sure you want to change the Level 2 Password ce gt Click Yes J If you forget to type in a new password before you click OK in the Change Meter Password A screen the following screen will appea
364. rksheet found in section B 2 1 1 Three Element Loss Compensation Worksheet to calculate the values by hand Notes under each section will assist you gt Enter values based on the tranformer manufacturer s test report The worksheet is progressive and notes under each section will guide you to the next section gt Enter the values into the Device Profile y See Chapters 3 and 4 Transformer Loss sections for more details NOTE B 2 2 Three Element Loss Compensation Worksheet Use MS Excel Worksheet discussed in sections 3 8 and 4 8 if you have Excel installed on your PC Company Station Name Date Trf Bank Number Trf Manuf Trf Serial Number Calculation By GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 5 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION B 6 CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS Transformer Data from Transformer Manufacturer s Test Sheet Winding Voltage MVA Connection HV High Delta Y XV Low Delta Y YV Tertiary Delta Y Watts Loss Value 3 Phase 1 Phase 1 Phase kW No Load Loss Load Loss gt Enter 3 Phase or 1 Phase values If 3 Phase values are entered calculate 1 Phase values by dividing 3 Phase values by three Convert 1 Phase Loss Watts to 1 Phase kW by dividing 1 Phase Loss Watts by 1000 Value 3 Phase MVA 1 Phase MVA 1 Phase kVA Self Cooled Rating gt Enter 3
365. rorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri GetWSAErrorStri CHAPTER G ETHERNET NETWORK ERROR CODES Protocol family not supported Address family not supported by protocol family Address already in use Can t assign requested address Network is down Network is unreachable Network dropped connection Software caused connection abort Connection reset by peer No buffer space available Socket is already connected Socket is not connected Can t send after socket shutdown Too many references can t splice Connection timed out Connection refused Too many levels of symbolic links File name too long Host is down No route to host Directory not empty Too many processes Too many users Disk quota exceeded Stale NFS file handle Too many levels of remote in path Network subsystem is unusable Winsock DLL cannot support this application Winsock not initialized Disconnect Host not found Nonauthoritative host not found Nonrecoverable error Valid name no data record of requested type GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 Glossary 0 1 Second Values 1 Second Values Alarm Annunciator
366. rs Edit Calendar New CURRENT YEAR DAILY SETUP TOU Schedules STORE Cancel i p GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 9 3 CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE gt CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE Click on TOU Registers The following screen appears Assign Register Labels Register Label A register is a type of rate structure for example Peak Off Peak or Shoulder Peak You will assign one register to each fifteen minute interval of the day when you set up the TOU schedule see below gt gt gt 9 4 Enter a name for each different register up to eight Click OK to return to the main Edit Calendar screen Click Averaging The following screen appears Set Demand Window Demand Windows Block Window Rolling Window Ss oo Her Select the type of Demand Averaging to be applied to the TOU accumulations For a discussion on Demand see the meter s Installation and Operation Manuals Click OK to return to the main Edit Calendar screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 9 TIME OF USE CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE gt Click on Monthly Bill Date The following screen appears Monthly TOU Report Dates Current Year January July February August March September April October May November June Decamber To program a specific Bill Date for each month use the pull down menus If you do not select a specific billing date for a
367. rs at one Location gt Click on the Add button in the Devices at Location section if you want to add up to 31 GE units at that location gt To remove devices select and click Remove gt Use Port 2 EPM 9450 9650 or Port 3 EPM 9800 of the Internal Modem Option meter to add additional units gt Each unit must be configured to speak Modbus ASCII and set to the same baud rate as the primary unit y Additonal units DO NOT have to be Internal Modem units NOTE Select each new device and click on the Edit button to edit its location information The Location Device Editor screen appears displaying the GE unit s communication settings Connection Manager Location Device Editor Device Properties Address Name Device 1 Description Device 1 Protocol Modbus RTU Device Type EPM 9800 Comm Port s e gt Inthe Device Address field enter the address assigned to each additional GE unit Each meter MUST have a unique address other than 1 see section 2 5 gt Inthe Name field enter a name for the device that will differentiate it from any others at that location gt Inthe Protocol field select MODBUS ASCII gt Leave the Device Type field set to type of meter 2 14 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER RS 485 INTERNAL MODEM OPTION CONNECTION gt Set the Comm Port gt Click on the Close button when you have finished adding or removing devices
368. rs the EPM 6000 Profile screens CI PT Ratos and System Wirng CT Numerator Primary 123 OOOO CT Denominator Secondary Eaa ee a CT Fullscale 0 000 amps Recale in PT Numerator Primary 123 6s PT Denominator Secondary 123 6s PT Fullzcale T Recaicuiats System Weng Preenarte All screens have buttons across the bottom which do the following gt To Print a Report click Report A list of all settings on these screens is printed gt To Save current Profile settings to a file click Save V To Load Profile settings from a file click Load gt Click Update Device to send changes to the Device Input Password if Enabled gt Click OK iy To Update a Device you MUST be connected to that device NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5 91 CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER 5 3 1 Configure Settings The primary screen of the EPM 6000 Device Profile is the Settings screen Click tabs to move to the other screens EPM 6000 Profile Password Enable password for reset Enable password for configuration Change Password Change VSwitch Device Designation To change settings gt Check or uncheck box to Enable or Disable Password for Reset or Configuration gt Click Change Password or Change V Switch gt Change Device Designation by inputting a new designation on this screen See the next sections for details Pa
369. rs when the actual ownership change occurs on the high side of the transformer This condition is shown pictorially in Figure B 1 Ownership Change FIGURE B 1 Low Voltage Metering Installation Requiring Loss Compensation Ownership Change GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 1 INTRODUCTION B 2 CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS It is generally less expensive to install metering equipment on the low voltage side of a transformer and in some conditions other limitations may also impose the requirement of low side metering even though the actual ownership change occurs on the high voltage side The need for loss compensated metering may also exist when the ownership changes several miles along a transmission line where it is simply impractical to install metering equipment Ownership may change at the midway point of a transmission line where there are no substation facilities In this case power metering must again be compensated This condition is shown in Figure B 2 Point of Ownership Change FIGURE B 2 Joint Ownership Line Metering Requiring Loss Compensation M Point of Ownership Change Asingle meter cannot measure the losses in a transformer or transmission line directly It can however include computational corrections to calculate the losses and add or subtract those losses to the power flow measured at the meter location This is the method used for loss compensation in the EPM
370. rt that is connected to the bus Type in unique address gt Baud Rate The baud rate entered in this field must match the baud rate of the device that will be connected to the Primary Meter at this port Use 9600 for modem connections From the pull down menu select 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 gt Data Bits for Modbus RTU and ASCII leave the Data Bits at 8 Other protocols may require a different setting Use the pull down menu to select from 5 6 7 or 8 gt Parity for Modbus RTU and ASCII leave the Parity at None Other protocols may require a different setting Use the pull down menu to select from None Even Odd Mark or Space 3 18 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Stop Bits for Modbus RTU and ASCII leave the Stop Bits at 1 Other protocols may require a different setting Use the pull down menu to select from 1 1 5 or 2 TxDelay Transmit Delay leave the TxDelay at Oms unless you are using equipment that requires a delay in the response time such as a radio modem Use the pull down menu to select from Oms 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 50ms 60ms 60ms or 70ms Protocol Direct Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use either Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII protocol Modbus RTU is recommended Modem Connections made through GE Communicator EXT must use Modbus ASCII only Use the pull down menu to select from M
371. rts with or without energy accumulation Leave View Mode 2 or 3 After _ Minutes Reverts Automatically e Use Buttons for Functions below Update Display gt Must click to update the display After settings update View Mode 1 is displayed e Retrieve from Display gt Click to retrieve existing settings 4 34 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS Cancel gt Cancel any new settings and return to main GE Communicator EXT screen Save gt Save new settings to a file e Load gt Load saved settings from a file gt Click Update Display to send new display settings and return to main GE Communicator EXT screen See the EPM 9800 Installation and Operation Manual for further details 4 4 5 CT and PT Compensation gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside CT and PT Compensation or double click on the CT and PT Compensation line The following screen appears CT amp PT Compensation gt Check the Enable CT box to Enable CT and PT Compensation Leave unchecked to Disable gt Click OK to close the screen and return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen The term Potential Transformer was changed to Voltage Transformer by the IEEE in LA 1982 Most Instrument Transformers now use the term Voltage Transformer NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 35 REV
372. running on the destination computer when i A replacing the file NOTE 2 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 2 DIRECT SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 AND NETWORK CONNECTIONS Direct Serial RS 232 RS 485 and Network Connections This section details connecting directly to one GE device See sections 2 3 and 2 4 for modem connections To connect to multiple GE units on an RS 485 bus see sections 2 4 and 2 5 2 2 1 Serial Connections gt Insert an RS 232 or RS 485 cable into an available serial port on the computer RS 232 Insert the opposite end of the cable into the GE Meter s RS 232 port 9450 9650 Port 1 9800 Optical Port Set 9450 9650 selector switch See Chapter 6 of the EPM 9800 Installation and Operation Manual for details on the special Optical Port connection RS 485 Insert the opposite end of the RS 232 cable into the RS 232 port of an RS 232 RS 485 converter if required See the meter s Installation and Operation Manuals for details Use an RS 485 cable to connect the RS 485 converter output to any port on the EPM 9450 or 9650 If you use Port 1 set the selector switch to RS 485 For EPM 9800 use Port 1 or Port 4 gt Click the Connect button on the tool bar or select Connect gt Quick Connect The screen below appears v NOTE If you click the Network button the screen changes to the Network screen Serial Port Device Address Bau
373. s v e e o e e e o T e gt Click on the box next to the Device to be monitored A Device Address will appear next to the Enabled Device gt Change the Device Address if needed to any address except 1 The Number 1 is always reserved for the Primary Device gt Click OK to return to the Modem Programming screen gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt Click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the EPM 9800 Meter gt Reset Logs 4 18 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER GENERAL SETTINGS 4 3 7 DNP Custom Classes Map The DNP Custom Class Map is a useful tool for prioritizing the readings in your system and the frequency of the readings The DNP Custom Class Map also keeps your system free from thousands of unwanted readings gt From the Device Profile screen section 4 2 click on the button beside DNP Custom Class Map gt Double click on a DNP Custom Class Map parameter The following set of screens appears EPM 9800 meters support DNP V3 00 Level 2 See Chapter 16 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide for details 4 3 8 Custom Modbus Map EPM 9800 Custom Modbus Map You can select up to 256 Registers or the equivalent of 2K whichever is lower to provide the functionality you want from your Meter In addition you can customize selected values for Format Type
374. s Programmable Onboard Display Yes Test Mode Yes DNP Level 1 Custom Class Map Yes DNP Level 2 Custom Class Map Yes Yes Internal KYZ Output Option Yes Custom Modbus Map Level 1 2 2 Network Card Runtime Yes Yes Yes Update INP2 Modem with Dial Out Yes Yes Yes Option INP100 Total Web Solutions Yes Yes Yes INP102 Combo Card Yes V iew Logs Yes Yes Yes Flicker Yes Yes Energy Billing Module Yes Yes Yes Script amp Scheduler Yes Yes Yes 17V Internal Power for I O to 12VA to 12VA Modules to 12VA Scaled Energy Yes Programmable Rollover Yes Yes 1 10 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 FEATURE COMPARISON FOR ADVANCED MODELS With 512 K or higher memory With 2 MEG or higher memory INP10 INP100 and INP102 Only MUST use Licensed version of GE Communicator EXT to access this feature GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL OPTIONS CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 1 7 Options gt Select Options from the View menu gt Click tabs to show the following screens Paths gt View or change the paths Communicator ExT uses to store any copied exported or retrieved data Paths Data Scan Mode Tech Mode Settings Log Retrieval Energy Biling Module Miscellaneous Retrieved Logs C Program Fies GE Applcations Communicator_Ext RetievedLogs Browse _ Device Profiles C Program Fies GE Applications Communi
375. s see section 3 3 2 gt Using the pull down menu choose the hook up mode that matches the connection you have to the meter Choose from one of the following 4 Wire 3 Element Direct Voltage 4 CTs 4 Wire 2 5 or 3 Element Wye 3 or 4 CTs 3 Wire Delta 2 or 3 CTs 3 Wire Delta Direct Voltage 3 CTs or 4 Wire Grounded Delta 4 CTs See the EPM 9650 Installation and Operation Manual for diagrams fi Changes to the Operational Frequency Range do not change the Full Scale value for A Frequency Changes must be made in the Limits and Waveform Full Scales screen Like voltage and current the nominal value should be used For example 50 for 50Hz gt Click OK The following screen asks you to verify the Kh Ke Ratio for the Test Pulse Setting Kh Ke Ratio is Secondary watthour constant over kWh the energy NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL sof GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER y If the Ke screen does not appear go to View gt Options gt Misc Enable the Ke screen NOTE gt Click Yes Or Click No and re enter values in the CT amp PT Ratio screen gt Click OK on the CT amp PT Ratio screen y If changes have been made verify Full Scale values and click OK gt Select the G option ONLY if you have a G Option Meter Warning Only Select The 300 Volt Option If You Ordered The Meter With The G Option If you connect 300 volts to a meter that
376. s GE Applications Communicator_Ext Script Logs GE SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER COMPONENT FILES A 2 10 11 12 13 CHAPTER A GE SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER COMPONENT FILES Log_yyyy_mm Html New format Log_yyyy_mm Txt Old format Log Converter generated log It records the activity of the Log Converter program The yyyy and mm in the file name are for the year and month when the Log Converter runs Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications LogViewer Converter Activity Logs EPM_Script_Schedule Template Template database file for GE Script amp Scheduler program and GE Communicator EXT program in Access 97 format Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext EPM_Script_Schedule DB Run time database file for GE Script amp Scheduler program and GE Communicator EXT program Generated by GE Script amp Scheduler program it holds the scripts and scheduler information Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext Scripts EPMScriptDLFiles Template Template database file for GE Communicator EXT and GE Script amp Scheduler program in Access 97 format Location Drive C Program Files GE Applications Communicator_Ext EPMScriptDLFiles DB Run time database for GE Communicator EXT and GE Script amp Scheduler program Generated by GE Communicator EXT program it holds the retrieved log files locations and the addresses for the converted logs If all processes are done t
377. s entered The checksum code consists only of the digits 0 9 and the letters A F The checksum will E LA never contain the letters O or which are often confused for zeros and ones NOTE gt Make sure the External Display is connected to a GE Meter port operating at 9600 baud See Chapter 3 for details on configuring the GE Meter s communication ports Connect to the GE Meter gt From the Tools Menu select Flash Me The following screen appears Select Device To Flash EPM Unit internal Networt EPM Comm Only EPM DSP Only LED Display gt Click the LED Display radio button GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 11 FLASH UPGRADING THE GE EXTERNAL DISPLAY CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING gt Click Next The following screen appears Enter Flash File File 1 C WINDOWS Desktop 320run_v36 E 107 9 7 File 2 PE corse The GE External Display firmware upgrade requires only one File gt Click the Browse button beside File 1 x Look in A EE J Oe amp B E 107 9 7 96 2 1a 96 hex B E 107 9 7 96 2 1b 96 hex j Files of lype GE Flash Info File ini x7 Cancel My Network P I Open as sead only gt Locate the GE External Display file on your computer 12 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE GE EXTERNAL DISPLAY gt Select the file and click Open File names and formats may vary from the example s
378. s in the Limit 1 or Limit 2 column The Power Factor Programming Screen will appear Device Profile Power Factor ead Less hon Quadrant fo 000 Greeterthan 7 Power Factor is broken into four quadrants The screen lets you set a limit in two of the four quadrants GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS gt To set a limit from the pull down menus select a Quadrant and Less Than or Greater Than Full Scales gt Type in the Power Factor Number The graph will illustrate your selections by shading the Out of Limit bands The area of the graph not covered by shading is within Normal Operational Range Method 1 Quadrants Q1 Lag Q2 Lag Q3 Lead Q4 Lead gt To display a graph of Method 2 Quadrants Q1 Lag Q2 Lead Q3 Lag Q4 Lead go to the Programming Labels screen section 4 19 of the Device Profile In the lower drop down menu click on Method 2 gt Return to the Limits screen gt Click on any PF setting in the Limit 1 or Limit 2 column Device Profile Power Factor fi This meter is a real four quadrant meter Therefore limits can be set for capacitive and 4 inductive PF when generating or consuming power TE gt When all settings are complete click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to
379. s interharmonic groups These indices are the RMS values of the interharmonic components between adjacent harmonic components The frequency bins directly adjacent to the harmonic bins are omitted This relationship is defined by the following equation 8 Xue x Xion ai 50Hz Systems EQ 8 1 2 10 Xue x Xion a 60Hz Systems EQ 8 2 i 2 6 32 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING THE POWER QUALITY LOG 8 11 Viewing the Power Quality Log gt From Log Viewer s main screen click on the Power Quality button or View Data gt Power Quality Log Viewer will display power quality information for the selected log file s based on the time range specified in the Select Time Range section of its main screen see section 8 4 En Dete T mo Durston ms Dewce Conditor henr 0 00121639 0 00121689 o oorziess o omz1e39 0 00121699 0 00121649 o 00121639 INNRIE 21040377 PM 0 0021699 MARLE 151 55 382 PM 0 00121689 2 2006 1 5155 382 PM 0 00121689 TAR2006 12332464 PM o 00121689 INDIG 12 32 24 644 PM 0 00z1693 7 14 2006 1050 95 617 AM 0 00121689 7 14 2006 105635617 AM O oor2i68s 7 4 2006 8 44 16877 AM o 00121639 i i a 1 ef ERE RE a To save the data to your clipboard gt Right click with the cursor positioned anywhere in table To view waveform information associated with a record or a range of records gt Click on the record s gt Click the Show Waveform Settings box
380. s or any pulse generating device Pulse accumulation is a very flexible way to accumulate information from external devices Using the meter s pulse accumulator pulses from other meters can be algabraically combined with the host meter s accumulations to generate one reading for a set of meters in a complex arrangement e Source This is the particular input on the meter which will be accumulated Units Pulse This is the scale factor which normalizes the pulses so that they can be aggregated if desired Pulses are stored in primary values Accumulator This allows you to place the pulse register into a separate accumulation register which can aggregate or net values User assigned label This window allows a user to enter a label designation so that when reading the Aggregator the meter will display the source gt To add or subtract data use pull down menu in each window of Accumulator column s EPM 9800 supports Negative Averaging for Total Values kA NOTE 4 40 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS gt When all data has been entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 41 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 5 P
381. s the Start Number for the first register to use in polling Format From the pull down menu select a type of Format for a value such as Floating Integer etc Data Size From the pull down menu select the Number of Bytes you want to represent the Data Point Unit If the polled value is viewed as an integer the Unit field tells you where to place the decimal point Examples If you select 01 a polling value 1234 would be interpreted as 12 34 If you select 100 a polling value 1234 would be interpreted as 123400 Pri Sec The meter normally computes values in secondary units Where applicable you may select primary or secondary If Primary is selected the value is multiplied by the appropriate CT and or PT values Sign Abs Where appropriate you may have the option of having the data point computed as a signed or absolute value Byte Order For most of the Data Points the user can select the polling order of the number of bytes selected by the Data Size field Example For a four byte Data Point the bytes can be arranged in any order for polling Display Modulo Offset Depending on the Data Point select one or more additional options with appropriate subselections Display For certain Data Points interpretation and display options are offered GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS GE COMMUNICATOR EXT Example For An Angle val
382. sage and no conversion will take place J The software will not overwrite an existing file it will only convert to a new filename NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 39 COMTRADE CONVERTER CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS Using the COMTRADE Converter Feature with Log Viewer System Requirements Installation of AiReports with NEXAIPWR DII file version 2 1 2 8 or higher COMTRADE Viewer Program is optional Meters Supported EPM 9450 9650 and 9800 Log Viewer Operation gt Use the Meter 1 button select a DB file with meter waveform data gt Select a Time Range gt Press the COMTRADE format button gt Enter a unique file name file extension is not needed to which you will export data gt Click OK COMTRADE Converter exports the waveform data and converts it to COMTRADE format files 8 40 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS STATUS CHANGE LOG INPUTS 8 17 Status Change Log Inputs The Status Change Log Input Log displays the input change status for a selected meter file and time range Sort Dota Tere Es DaT Durston tee Doae Marre MAA Mere hov More iste Dais lone To view the Status Change Log gt From the Log Viewer select a Meter Database File and set a Time Range gt Click the Status Change Log button or View Data gt Status Change Inputs The above screen will appear Usually if a record being displayed in the grid box has a start
383. sarsaran titan eee AON EWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS INTERHARMONIC ANALYSIS ccsssescssssssssssssssesssosssesssssssessessssessessssesesesasesesesasesesetasetenseanees VIEWING THE POWER QUALITY LOG suine a 8 33 VIEWING THE POWER QUALITY GRAPH ciccncsosinnaicauinnnnniimmaananaiann DATABASE STATUS REPORTS senanunppan PA ORE ee i a COMTRADE CONVERTE R ranonni nin RSR STATUS CHANGE LOG INPUTS CONTROL OUTPUT LOG RELAYS LLAS D CENERE FROE COURE soais ieuan ass aE Aae EARST EAE A 9 1 CREATING A TOU CALENDAR PROFILE sessar an NRE 9 3 UPDATE A TOUCALENDAR PROFILE iss As sececnsncadtasiicbsndanaaildesdiianinanedecesbsbsamnshvas antboaaaual 9 12 VIEWING TOU ACCUMULATED DATA scnsnicnaniinodameiniieanduniin 9 14 E E a NR OUTLINE OF THE PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING I O MODULES USING MULTIPLE Fe STEPS TO DETERMINE POWER NEEDED c ssenacnsemrennceannencumiweweciannnen I O MODULES FACTORY SETTINGS AND VA RATINGS ADDITIONAL POWER SOURCE FOR I O MODULES nssssssss11011 1011100110012 ASSIGNING ADDRESSES AND BAUD RATES TO AN I O MODULE eeecccssssseseseees ENTERING I O MODULES IN THE EPM METER S DEVICE PROFILE ues 10 10 CONFIGURING THE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE occcssscicsnssccsassssansiniccosstsssessncontccsssbsoasaien 10 12 CONFIGURING THE ANALOG INPUT MODULE CONFIGURING THE KYZ OUTPUT MODULE roeng nta eaaa tiaan R CONFIGURING THE DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE wccscccsssissrnssecascsssssneniecsennsvistanne
384. screen will increase by 1 gt To retrieve the Waveform from the Menu Toolbar click Logs gt Retrieve Log from Device gt Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen 3 58 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 4 1 Overview GE Communicator EXT Chapter 4 Configuring the EPM 9800 Meter GE Communicator EXT enables you to configure an EPM 9800 Socket Meter s programmable settings which are stored in the unit s Device Profile The Device Profile has four sections below plus I O Modules EPM 9800 E E5 General Senings T ER Revenue and Energy Settings Me ERR Power Quality and Alarm Setngs Se EXT Trending Protie Setings i Etena YO mosses Following is an overview of the procedure for configuring an EPM 9800 Meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 1 OVERVIEW 4 2 NOTE NOTE CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 1 Retrieve the meter s Device Profile section 4 2 2 Configure the programmable settings stored in the Device Profile sections 4 3 4 7 3 Send the new Device Profile back to the Meter section 4 2 If you click the Save Load or Update buttons you MUST have a unique meter Destination Label so that the file is saved loaded or updated to the intended device This chapter also covers e Resetting Meter Information sect
385. seful when using large numbers at meters Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application gt gt GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL To set the type of limit and the channel assigned to it double click in either the Type or Channel column From the pop up menu choose the desired settings and click OK To designate the limit as either Above or Below a percentage of the Full Scale click once in each Settings column and select the desired setting from the pull down menu To set the percentage of the Full Scale at which the limit will trip enter the value in the of FS column GE Communicator EXT automatically calculates the Primary value The Combination Limit 3 is the logical combination of Limit 1 s state and Limit 2 s state 3 41 POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER Device Profile Limits Limit 1 Limit 2 Assigned Item z Setpoi 7 Setpoi Combination Satins Sof FS Pamay oo ers Pmaye Fifty Milisecond Updated Voltage A N 101 10 280 05 Below 8 90 273 95 OR _2 Fifty Milisecond Updated Voltage B N 101 10 280 05 Below 8 90 273 95 OR _ 3 _ Fifty Milisecond Updated Voltage C N 101 10 280 05 Below 98 90 273 95 OR 4 Fifty Millisecond Updated Current A 102 00 5 10 Below 38 00 4 90 OR 5 _ Fifty Milisecond Updated Current B 102 00 5 10 Below 38 00 4 90 OR _ 6 _ Fifty Milisecond Updated Current C 102 00 5 10 Below 8 00 4 9
386. selected in Device Properties Other Devices gt Check all the above except the Address gt Check that the Address is unique and not set to 1 gt Check that the Baud Rate settings for the Ethernet Gateway Port 2 and the Devices are the same GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 9 SOFTWARE CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS Try Pinging to a known good network device such as another computer to verify that your computer is connected properly to the network gt Go to the DOS Prompt or Console if you are using Windows NT gt Ping IP Address Example Ping 10 0 0 1 6 10 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION 6 5 Setting Up the 10 100BaseT Connection Setting up the 10 100BaseT Option consists of configuring the web connection and the Advanced Network Card Screens so that you can access the data you need from the Web Once the initial configuration is set you will not need software unless you want to make changes to the configuration With the Basic Setup you will be able to access the Default Screens page 6 1 that display a variety of Real Time readings You may wish to customize your screens See details in section 6 6 In order for the Web to access the data from a meter the meter must have an IP Address An IP Address is a number typically written as four numbers separated by periods e g 107 3 2 54
387. sents selected magnitude in a bar graph Waveform combines magnitudes and angles in a graph Phasors Displays a three phase phasor diagram and data from the currently connected meter Same as selecting Real Time Poll gt Phasors See Chapter 7 EN 50160 Flicker Displays Instantaneous Short Term and Long Term Readings Same as selecting Real Time Poll gt Power Quality amp Alarms gt Flicker See Chapter 16 Log Status Displays logging statistics for the currently connected EPM meter Same as selecting Logs gt Statistics See Chapter 8 Device Status Displays list of the currently connected meter s Same as selecting Tools gt Device Status See Chapter 2 Alarms Displays the Limit Status Screen for EPM 9450Q 9650Q 9800Q 7450D and 5300P Same as selecting Real Time Poll gt Power Quality amp Alarms gt Alarm Status See Chapter 9 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT BASIC SCREEN ELEMENTS 1 3 2 Computer Status Bar Modem When using Serial Port or Modem Connection to the meter Connection Status Communication Port ee Port Baud Rate Connected COM 1 115200 Addr 1 HANNOVER MESSE Modbus RTU Pw Disabled SS Disabled Device Address __ Device Name Communication Protocol Protection Status Memo e Connection Status displays either Connected Disconnected or Not Found e Communication Port dis
388. sesssssssesssesssesssecsseeeseeesees 13 7 OPERATION OVERVIEW CREATING A DEMAND DATABASE ccssscssssssscsssscssssssssssssssnsssssssnsssssssnstssssasscsseesssceseessesese 13 9 USING THE EXCEL SPREADSHEET ccsssssscssssssssscssscsssssssesssesssssssssssssesssssssessceseessscesesssesese 13 9 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND SETUP ooo ececsesseccsseesssesssenneesesens 13 10 USING THE ENERGY BILUNG MODULE cncnduccaancanciiimmanianeanmanewacnc 13 11 DEMAND GRAPHS ECE OOZ cae cccreescee EEE OEA cst sce ue AEE east en ecient enetietens 13 17 TROUBLE SHOOTING 205 siswvsscavicccocsiGstesecsaucles ssdbcssvevacces asivibecesencoodcevvassestbeveesAsdesseesuncoasees 13 17 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER ARR Gaye aa E ote hve neae sets ae S 14 1 PROGRAM FEATURES vena A A EA OA AEEA 14 2 USING THE GE SCHEDULER oun cesccssssssssessscsssessscsssssssssssesssssssesssssssscssscssecssscssecssecsnecssecsseesse 14 2 OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW AE a e EAEE E PAA N nate VAEA PPE SAMO ET SINUS AAEE Te SCRIPT REFORT serrera RANN RRAN FEATURES meronimia te o a a E a SETUR A SCRIPT airera DEV ADDING A SCRIPT DEVICE EDITING A SCRIPT DEVICE SCRIPT COMMANDS uniiiisess ADD A SCRIPT COMMAND 2 ADD A SCRIPT COMMAND ADD AN EPM 7000 SERIES DEVICE SCRIPT COMMAND c ssessssssssesssessseseseesseeeseeeseeesees COM SCRIPT COMMAND nipona E RR RE EDIT AN ADVANCED SCRIPT COMMAND uuessesssseesssseesssecssseeesseses EDITING A DATA SWITCH OR
389. siqnod EPM Modulio EPM Address Settings Settings Port Log Lint 1D 169 et fw 3 DO Mode 1 a 4 a 4 4 4 4 A 4 a 4 a 4 a gt Click in the Type column and use the pull down menu to select the specific I O you wish to add and enter a unique address for each gt Use the Edit buttons to configure each module further V Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter For more details on I O Modules refer to Chapter 10 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide 3 54 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER SET AND RETRIEVE METER TIME 3 7 Set and Retrieve Meter Time The meter uses its on board clock for time stamping any logs it is recording To set the meter s clock gt Select Tools gt Set Meter Time The meter s On board Clock screen appears Sat EPM 9650 On Board Clock Month Day Year PENS or 2004 Hour Minute Second Time a 51 Use PC Time sens oreo gt To synchronize the meter with your computer leave the Use PC Time box checked gt To set the date and time to be independent from the PC deselect the Use PC Time box and enter the time and date settings gt Click the Send button to update the meter s time settings To retrieve the meter s current time and date settings gt Se
390. specific to each log in the meter s Device Profile section 8 2 Logs run automatically 2 Retrieve the logs manually from the meter section 8 3 or retrieve logs automatically using the Script amp Scheduler Program See Chapter 15 for further details 3 View and analyze log data with GE Communicator EXT s Log Viewer sections 8 5 8 18 4 Diagnose PQ Events from meter logs create comprehensive report transmit modify print or export file with optional AiReports software section 8 15 Free Space Calculation Feature The Log Converter automatically checks your computer and calculates the amount of free space on your hard drive This calculation is performed to insure enough hard drive space for the Log Converter to operate Below are the parameters for the calculations and the actual calculation performed by the meter Table 8 1 Free Space Calculation Parameters ITEM DESCRIPTION MINIMUM VALUE THDS Total Hard Disk Space THDFS Total Hard Disk Free Space GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS OVERVIEW Table 8 1 Free Space Calculation Parameters MIN THDS Minimum of Free Space of 1 Total Space Min ofFreeSpace After 3 19 2002 MinSetFS Minimum Free Space 50 MB MinFreeSpace CalMinFS Calculated Minimum Free Space y Min ofFreeSpace and MinFreeSpace Values are set in the LogConverter ini file NOTE CALCULATION Min THDS x THDS CalM
391. ssign parameters other than the IP Address enter those values manually gt Enter a unique computer name Optional This allows the user to access the meter by name if there is a DNS Server working in conjunction with the DHCP Server Please see your network administrator and the server s user manuals GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 11 SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS for further details The Default Computer Name is GE MultilinNET_XXXXXX where the X s are the last 3 octets of the MAC Address Manual Set Up gt Manually enter an IP Address if DHCP Mode is OFF a Advanced netwerk Option Settings For reference IP Addresses reserved for Internal Networks Class A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 Class B 172 16 0 0 to 172 31 255 255 Class C 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 255 y See RFC1918 for Internal IP Reference NOTE Basic Items IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Nonconfigurable Gateway Port Items Data Bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Advanced Items Gateway Port RS 485 Baud Rate Gateway Port Delay DNS IP will be needed for WebAlarm email and FTP Client if the Server Address is entered as a name string not an IP Address 6 12 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS SETTING UP THE 10 100BASET CONNECTION 6 5 2 Services amp Security gt Click the Services tab gt Check the boxes in front of the listed
392. sssssssssssssessssssesssescsesssescsssssesssescsesssesssesssesssssesessseseesssese 4 39 ENERGY PULSES AND ACCUMULATIONS IN THE INTERVAL scssseesssesseesseesseesssesseesssees 4 39 PULSE ACCUMULATIONS NADA NT Sa EE E A NANE EAA NITE NT E E ELECTROLOGIC RELAY CONTROL esseessseesssseeees PQ THRESHOLDS WAVEFORM RECORDING EN 50160 FUCKER accscscccetaccstieseeatbssssietetsisceecteviss SQUARED T AND V SQUARED T THRESHOLDS PIGH SPEED INPUTS sec ccczevssivscetvsssastsiretiedtovsadastialeuisticmecnauind antadlnydslaanenccuen TRENDING PROFILE SETTINGS AND LOAD PROFILE RECORDING eeccessssesssseesseee 4 53 TRENDING LOG TIME INTERVALS oe sssesssssscsssscsseessssessssscsssscsssesesssesssscsssseessusesseeessecsssseesseses 4 53 TRENDING SETUP sissy czstscreces AurseselensStctcsnunresdctertees bon ees Uiecece wasted kichsd ete I cestdassstsestet 4 54 PAD MISSING RECORDS FOR HISTORICAL LOGS ou essesssssssssssssessssesssssessssecssnsesseesensesesses 4 56 Ee a arana a a a SET AND RETRIEVE METER TIME RESET NETER INFORMATION eee ee ne ce ee nee ee a ee MANUAL WAVEFORM CAPTURE scsi ccassccctsssticacaraneaatteanwnlaneiatsnnnanndiel AGERE TEST MODE PRESET ACCUMULATORS uuu ccccsssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssssssssessessussserssssssseneansaesses 4 62 CT AND PF COMPENSATION riris E AES 4 64 INTRODUCTION vonin EPM 6000 CONFIGURATION QUICK CONNECT ponsarieinoninriienron n CAT E GaN CONNECTION MANAGER fssezisits cteseca
393. ssword Settings Enable or Disable Password for Reset Reset Max Min Energy Settings or Configuration Device Profile by clicking the boxes next to the settings Enabling the Password protection will prevent unauthorized tampering with devices 5 12 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE When the user attempts to make an unauthorized change GE Communicator EXT will ask for a Password using the screen shown here If the correct Password is not entered the change will not take place Enter Password ox conc gt Change Password by clicking on the Change button The Enter New Password screen appears Enter the new password New Password Retype New Password gt Type in the new password 0 9999 gt Retype it gt Click Change The Enter Password screen appears as shown above gt Input the OLD Password gt Click OK The Device will save the New Password and Restart V Switch Change The EPM 6000 is equipped with V Switch Technology V Switch is a virtual firmware based switch that allows you to enable meter features through communication This allows the unit to be upgraded after installation to a higher model without removing the unit from service Available V Switches V Switch 1 V1 Volts and Amps Meter Default V Switch 2 V2 Volts Amps kW KVAR PF kVA Freq V Switch 3 V3 Volts
394. sts only of the digits 0 9 and the letters A F The checksum will A never contain the letters O or which are often confused for zeros and ones NOTE Connect to the GE Meter gt From the Tools Menu select Flash Me The following screen appears If you have not upgraded your software you will not have a GE Unit button Select Device To Flash EPM Unit S internal Network EPM Comm Only EPM DSP Only LED Display gt Choose the type of upgrade you want to perform GE Comm or GE DSP See section 13 2 for how to Flash upgrade the GE Unit See section GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 7 FLASH UPGRADING THE GE COMM AND GE DSP FIRMWARE CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING 13 4 to Flash Upgrade the GE External Display section 13 5 to Flash Upgrade the Internal Modem Card and section 8 6 to Flash Upgrade the Internal Network Option gt Click Next The following screen appears Enter Flash File File 1 CAWINDOWS Desktop 320run_v96 E 107 9 7 File 2 es gt Click the Browse button beside File 1 ax wn SE gt a E 107 9 7 96 2 1a 96 hex I E 107 9 7 96 2 1b 96 hex E History E Desktop Files of type GE Flash Info File ini 7 I Open as read only Filename a ema WA gt Locate the firmware files on your computer File names and formats may vary from the example screen above be sure to read the text file accompanying the firmware files gt Select the file
395. sum automatically see section 13 2 Again the optional Internal Modem Card or Internal Network Card must be upgraded separately There are 3 ways to learn what firmware versions are currently installed in your GE Meter gt Click on the Device Status icon or select Retrieve Device Status from the Tools Menu The Run time field shows the current EPM Comm firmware version number the DSP Run time field shows the current EPM DSP firmware version number GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING gt Click on the Edit Profile icon to retrieve the current Device Profile from the connected GE Meter e Click on Report The GE Comm and GE DSP firmware are listed in the Runtime column gt Ifyou have an External Display connected to the meter see the Meter Installation and Operation Manual for details on using it to access firmware version numbers fi e To flash upgrade you must have the most recent upgrade file from the factory y e Flash upgrading erases the existing firmware and replaces it with the new version e Flash Upgrading should only be done with the proper firmware Otherwise data may be lost Back up your stored data prior to installing new flash programming into your unit 12 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE EPM UNIT 12 2 Flash Upgrading the EPM Unit gt Contact GE to receive the most recent firmwa
396. t e Rolling Average Subinterval Window Sets the length of the Demand Subinterval when Rolling Demand is used Subinterval Length X Number of Subintervals Length of Demand Interval Window Device Profile Demand Integration ee Rolling Averaging Sub interval Window o Hours 5 Minutes o Seconds Rolling Sub Intervals Rolling Average tes Boo Interval Window 15 00 Minute r Predictive Rolling Window Average e Rolling Subintervals Sets the number of Rolling Demand Subintervals in the Rolling Demand Window Subinterval Length X Number of Subintervals Length of Demand Interval Window e Predictive Rolling Window Average Increasing the length of the Predictive Demand Window increases the accuracy of the prediction by including more of the Current Demand Window up to 100 Decreasing the length of the Prediction Window gives earlier warnings of high demands 4 30 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button to send the new profile to the meter 4 4 3 Internal KYZ Outputs and Test LED Settings The Internal KYZ Outputs Settings allow you to assign channels to the KYZ Outputs and to the Test LED Test The Channel Selection sets the type of pulse that will be generated For ex
397. t Click Yes This screen appears Enter Flash Checksum Flash Checksum m Enter the checksum code from the text file accompanying the firmware files If you do not enter the correct checksum code the flash upgrade will fail gt Click OK Flash upgrading begins The following screen displays the progress of the upgrade Flashing Status Requesting Current Operations Mode D The D Unitis Running in Normal Mode Flash Programming Complete Sequence Number When the Flash upgrade is complete the Cancel button changes to OK gt Click OK To upgrade additional GE Meters click Previous and return to Communications Parameters screen Repeat the steps as needed entering a unique address for each unit GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING FLASH UPGRADING THE GE EXTERNAL DISPLAY 12 4 Flash Upgrading the GE External Display Flash upgrading the GE Display takes approximately 15 minutes gt Contact GE to receive the most recent GE External Display firmware upgrade Be sure your version of GE Communicator EXT software is compatible with the firmware upgrade you want to perform gt Copy the new firmware upgrade file to a directory on your computer Be sure to read the accompanying text file for important information such as the checksum code Write down the Checksum Code you will need it later in the Flash upgrade process Flash upgrading will fail if an incorrect checksum code i
398. t Disable Hardware Flow Control remote and originating If you are using RS 485 Communication with a Modem Manager recommended by G E Set the baud rate for the meter higher up to 38400 Generally it will provide reliable communication gt Enable Flow Control remote and originating fi Because a GE meter s four ports operate independently you need only configure the A address and baud rate of the port that will be connected to the bus NOTE 2 6 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 MODEM CONNECTIONS 2 3 3 On the Originating Computer gt Click on the Connection Manager icon or select Connection gt Connection Manager The following screen appears To copy the Connection Manager Settings to other PCs see Note on page 2 1 Connection Manager List of Locations Connected to Location gt Adding a Location gt Click on the Add button The Location Editor screen appears displaying the computer s communications settings and the location name New Location GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 7 SERIAL RS 232 RS 485 MODEM CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER Connection Manager Location Editor j Location Name Serial Port Network gi Use Data Switch String s ComPot ay z Baud Rate 9600 z Devices At Location gt Enter your Location Name in the Location Name field at the top of the scre
399. t from your Meter In addition you can customize selected values for Format Type Scaling Byte Order Data Size etc gt From the Device Profile screen section 3 2 click on the button beside Custom Modbus Map or double click on the Custom Modbus Map line This screen appears EPM 9650 Custom Modbus Map Line Point Registers Register 18 412289 Tenth Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts AN Unsigned Integer 412291 Tenth Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts BN Unsigned Integer 412293 Tenth Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts CN Unsigned Integer 412295 Tenth Second Current A B C Unsigned Integer 412296 Tenth Second Current A B C Unsigned Integer 412298 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Unsigned Integer 412300 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Unsigned Integer 412302 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Unsigned Integer 412304 One Second Auxiliary Volts Unsigned Integer 412306 One Second Current A B C Unsigned Integer 412308 One Second Current A B C Unsigned Integer 412310 One Second Current A B C Unsigned Integer 412312 One Second Measured N Current Unsigned Integer 412314 One Second Calculated N Current Unsigned Integer 412316 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts AB Unsigned Integer 412318 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts BC Unsigned Integer 412320 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts CA Unsigned Integer rit cc ee EE 2 3 EE s5 is 7 KE EE a10 E 12 13 14 as 16 is
400. t need to change the Roll Over from the default gt Click Update to send the new Roll Over settings to the module Be sure to send the updated Device Profile to the EPM Meter after you have finished configuring all I Os gt Click on the Update Device button GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 21 I O DEVICE STATUS CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 14 I O Device Status This utility allows you to view a list of all the modules that have been entered registered in the EPM Meter s Device Profile see section 11 7 gt From the I O Devices menu select I O Device Status GE Communicator EXT searches for all entered I O modules The following screen appears the listings shown are for example only Device 1 0 Module Status Device KYZ Module Address 247 gt To view the current programmable settings of a particular module select it and click Query For example a query of the KYZ module at address 247 yields the following KYZ External Module Module Type Mies Pukan Wiel me 250 250 zs0 250 gt To change the I O s Transmit Delay you must use the Stand Alone Programmer section 11 17 gt Query screens are read only To change any parameters you must edit the EPM Meter s Device Profile see section 11 7 gt Click Refresh to initiate a new search and listing of connected I Os 10 22 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES Q
401. ta to your clipboard right click with the cursor positioned anywhere in table gt To sort the data by record type in either ascending or descending order click on the Sort button and use the pull down menu to make your selection See the following section 8 8 for details about viewing Snapshot Graphs GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 11 SORT CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 6 Sort At the bottom of all the display pages for the selected log file s including the Historical Trends display page you ll find a Sort button The Sort button allows you to customize the Log Viewer data to your needs by using the pull down menus to set the criteria for the sort Sort Data Options Record Type Record Types Selected Items All Snapshots Group By Type _ O Log1 Log2 Limits Input Rely Flicker Sho O Sort Item Sort Order gt Select from the variety of Record Types determined by the type of log being viewed For example the Historical Trends Log includes the following choices in the Record Type menu All Snapshots Group by Type Log 1 Log 2 Limits Input Relay Flicker gt Click on the Sort Item pull down menu to select Date Time or Readings for the currently selected meter gt Click on the Sort Order pull down menu to select Ascending or Descending Order gt Click OK In a few moments the customized data will load on to your screen 6 12 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING L
402. ter 6 of the GE Communicator EXT Guide GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL xk lt Internal Modem Option If your meter has this option set the number of Rings to Answer from the pull down menu Set the Baud Rate to 57600 or to match your system baud rate Dial Out Profile Click the Dial Out Profile button and the following screen appears Details on programming this screen and on the Modem Dial In Dial Out Function are in Chapter 9 of this manual This feature is ordered as INP 2 lt 50 Edit gateway port devices OK Cancel Help GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER fi Any changes you make here may adversely affect communications For example if you A change the baud rate of the port connected to a computer be sure to make the same sa change to the computer port s baud rate If you change a port s address be sure to update the address settings of any device that communicates with the port The baud rate of the port used by the Meter s External Display should always be set to 9600 and the address set to 1 e Edit Gateway Port Devices The Edit Gateway Port Devices button at the bottom of the screen is used to Enable up to 8 devices that are connected the gateway and are to be monitored When the user clicks the Edit Gateway Port Devices button this screen is displayed Gateway Devices to be Moniboraa Device Enable Device Number Device Addres
403. terpretable form for use in exchanging data As such it does not make use of the economies available from data encoding and compression that proprietary formats depend upon for competitive advantage The standard is for files stored on physical media such as digital hard drives and diskettes It is not a standard for transferring data files over communication networks This standard defines a common format for the data files and an exchange medium needed for the interchange of various types of fault test and simulation data The COMTRADE Converter carefully adheres to COMTRADE specification IEC 60255 24 2001 File types and operations COMTRADE converter will generate the following types of file filename cfg ilename dat ename inf ilename d ename_ cfg ename_ dat ename_ inf gt am h h h h ilename_ d The term filename represents the user specified file name The symbol represents a value from 00 through 99 The symbol is the number of 1 or above for each additional waveform record File type cfg is for Configuration File type dat is for Data File type inf is for Information The software requires user to enter a unique filename each time the COMTRADE converter runs Upon COMTRADE Converter startup it will scan all files with the filename provided by the user at a location associated with COMTRADE file types listed above If it finds any file that already exists the software will issue a mes
404. terval and subtracting the oldest subinterval data from the demand interval BASIC ENERGY MANAGEMENT Thermal Demand Power Factor Time of Day or Time of Use Off Peak On Peak Shoulder Real Time Pricing Aggregation Energy Management Example CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE Emulation of a Thermal Demand Meter that provides an exponentially time lagged demand where given a constant load the indication reads 90 of the actual demand in 15 minutes An indicator of the quality of the power 1 to 1 at a certain point in the electrical system Rates vary at different times of the day on peak and off peak for Energy and Demand Designated periods of low system demand usually non business hours when electricity is generally less expensive Designated periods of high system demand when electricity is generally more expensive Designated periods between off peak and on peak The instantaneous pricing of electricity based on the cost of the electricity available for use at the time the electricity is demanded by the customer Rates are downloaded over the phone or Internet This is a customized plan The combined total energy use of customers units cost centers for billing purposes A light manufacturer operates on two shifts The typical electricity cost is about 150 000 per year Before the installation of any energy management equipment and software the facility was paying in a typical summer mon
405. tes of memory for each file Total memory is determined at time of purchase GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER POWER QUALITY AND ALARM SETTINGS 3 5 10 Pad Missing Records for Historical Logs When the meter is not in normal operation it will not record any data for Log 1 and Log 2 For example during firmware updates or loss of power data will not be saved Some applications may require data logs to contain those missing records To remedy this problem you can gt Enable the feature in Options gt Log Retrieval gt Pad Log File gt Click the box in front of the feature gt Click OK This feature pads missing records for the Meter s Log 1 and Log 2 The software causes the Log Converter program to automatically pad the missing records with a value of 0 for each log retrieval process and stores them in the Log DB file By default if the meter s Trending Interval is set for Greater than 1 Hour the meter will always save a record on the hour in the Trending Logs GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 53 EXTERNAL DEVICES CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 3 6 External Devices The setting of the Device Profile configures the meter s External Devices a variety of I O Modules configurable using the screen below gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 double click on the External I O Modules line The following screen appears As
406. th 12 000 for electricity 56 000 kWh Off Peak 2 400 120 000 kWh On Peak 5 500 480 kW Peak Demand 4 100 Total Bill 12 000 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE BASIC ENERGY MANAGEMENT On af the same time Load Factor 51 FIGURE 13 2 Energy Management Example Before With the Energy Billing Module plant management is able to optimize the loads Essential loads are monitored and turned on or off in sequence Simple steps are taken without jeopardizing the integrity of the manufacturing process Savings in energy costs 4 see calculations above and below 56 000 kWh Off Peak 2 400 120 000 kWh On Peak 5 500 480 kW Peak Demand 3 600 Total Bill 11 500 Peak Demand Before When all AC and tools are switched on at the same time Load Factor 51 Peak Demand After When all AC and tools are switched on in sequence Load Factor 57 FIGURE 13 3 Energy Management Example After Further savings can be realized by doing the following e Shift non essential loads to off peak hours e Flatten the demand curve wherever possible e Identify equipment and process problems e Negotiate with your utility based on peak demand e Source the best utility for your needs GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL COST ALLOCATION CHAPTER 13 ENERGY BILLING MODULE 13 3 Cost Allocation In addition to the cost savings steps listed above furth
407. the Device Profile screen 3 3 1 CT and PT Ratios and System Hookup gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 click on the button for General Settings then double click on the CT PT Ratios and System Hookup line The following submenu appears Device Profile 5 General Settings 5 CT PT Ratios and System Hookup IAB C 1 00 1 00 INm 1 00 1 00 VAB C 1 00 1 00 VAUX 1 00 1 00 Hookup Wye Operational Frequency Range 20 65 Hz GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS This screen displays the current Device Profile s settings for CT PT ratios and connection type The values shown are for example only gt Double click on any of the settings the CT and PT Ratios screen appears Device Profile CT and PT Ratios CT Ratio __ PT Ratio Line to Neutral 120 00 Hookup _ Vo Itage 300 Volt Option Only Operational Frequency Range 20Hz to 65Hz hd KE cencet E Make changes to this screen according to the requirements of your application gt When you change a PT or CT Ratio GE Communicator EXT updates the corresponding Full Scale value entered in the Limit and Waveform Full Scales setting gt When you click OK on this screen GE Communicator EXT opens the Limit amp Waveform Full Scales window so that you can verify the setting
408. the Internet via Modbus TCP HTTP SMTP FTP and or DHCP Monitors with the 10BaseT Option INP10 connect via Modbus TCP ONLY INP100 can auto detect the cable type and works with either straight or crossover cable INP10 does not have the straight connection capability Example A direct connection between a PC and INP100 can use a straight or a crossover cable But for an INP10 connection you must use a crossover cable EPM 9450 9650 RJ 45 Connection Meter with 10 100BaseT Option to Multiple PCs The 10 100BaseT Option conforms to the IEEE 802 3 specification using unshielded twisted pair UTP wiring allowing inexpensive RJ 45 connectors and CATS or better cabling to be used This LAN connection allows multiple PCs to be connected concurrently The RJ 45 line is inserted into the RJ 45 Port on the face of the EPM 9450 9650 with 10 100BaseT option The connection using RJ 45 into the EPM 9450 9650 can connect the meter to a network using Modbus TCP protocol over the Ethernet To connect with other meters using Modbus RTU in either remote or local locations you MUST use Port 2 which is labeled Ethernet Gateway as a Master and an RS 485 connection The link using RS 485 is viable for up to 4000 feet 1219 meters RS 232 Insert RS 232 cable from a PC into Port 1 and set the Selector Switch to RS 232 This connection is necessary in order to set the initial software configuration For details on EPM 9450 9650 connections and wiring
409. the Modem Dial In Dial Out Function are in Chapter 9 of the GE Communicator EXT User Guide Ca delay tace Kat PE Catach pe ET Cal bobs roret kowt ek ina oj E CDEMA Powe Any changes you make here may adversely affect communications For example if you change the baud rate of the port connected to a computer be sure to make the same change to the computer port s baud rate If you change a port s address be sure to update the address settings of any device that communicates with the port The baud rate of the port used by the meter s external display should always be set to 9600 and the address set to 1 The Edit Gateway Port Devices button at the bottom of the screen is used to enable up to 8 devices connected to the gateway to be monitored When the user clicks the Edit Gateway Port Devices button this screen is displayed GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER GENERAL SETTINGS Gateway Devices to be Monitored s Device Enable Device Number Device Address gt Click on the box next to the Device to be monitored A Device Address will appear next to the Enabled Device gt Change the Device Address if needed to any address except 1 The Number 1 is always reserved for the Primary Device Y Click OK to return to the Modem Programming screen gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these cha
410. the Zoom Out button VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS To view the Waveform Properties gt Click the Waveform Properties button The following screen appears Wavelorm Properties 7 18 2006 2 10 40 344 PM 7 18 2006 2 10 40 477 PM 133 Y 2 5 Element No 13200 00 120 00 13200 00 120 00 To view the Advanced Waveform screen gt Click Advanced Waveform This screen appears The user can select a complete or partial waveform from multiple devices different channels and different times for a single graph Up to six sets of waveforms can be graphed together To select items for the Advance Waveform Setup 6 22 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS gt Use radio buttons to select the Entire Capture or a Selected Window Selected Window is enabled if if a user sets mark 1 and mark 2 for a given channel The waveform for that channel between those marks will be graphed in the overlaid advanced graph To add to the Selected Waveform Items list from the Current Waveform Items indexed on the left of the screen gt Click on an item gt Click on Add To remove an item from Selected Waveform Items gt Click on the item gt Click Remove To view the Original Waveform Property of a Selected Waveform Item gt Click on one of the list items The Waveform Property for that item will appear To return to the main Waveform Graph gt
411. the protocol used for communication to other devices Protection Status displays whether the password protection feature is enabled or disabled Low Battery Modem Battery Status displays Low Bat EPM on the EPM 9800 when the meter requires a battery and if the Internal or Modem battery is low dead or missing GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 1 INSTALLING GE COMMUNICATOR EXT 1 1 HELP 1 4 Help 36 Communicator Ext File Connection Real Time Poll Tools I ODevices TOUCalendar Logs View mo 1 e Ea a a ee 2 ge GO openlog connect connect codice polling enera Software License status status alarms profile Pe 1 4 1 Help Menu Displayed above it provides the following sources of information Contents gt Click on the Contents button to display the Index Page of the Help Files gt To access Links to Topics click on the Bookmarks tab and scroll through Chapters gt Double click on Chapter to view all topics in that chapter gt Click on Topic to view Help on that topic Check for Software Updates gt Click on Software Updates GE Communicator EXT will automatically search the GE website for updates for you If the software does find updates GE Communicator EXT will ask you if you would like to Update Now gt You can click Yes or No Average File Size is 20MB High Speed Internet access is recommended WARNING About GE Communicator EXT Screen displays so
412. the relay state at Stage 3 or the Acknowledgement Stage Reasons for Incomplete Records e Atthe time of the log conversion process if the Log Converter cannot find the Stage 1 record which can be caused by log roll over the Trigger date time and the Start State will not be displayed e At the time of log conversion if the Log Converter cannot find the Stage 1 record the Inputs Gates and the Relay Start State will not be displayed 8 42 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS CONTROL OUTPUT LOG RELAYS e Ifthe Log Converter program cannot find the Stage 2 record the Command date time will not be displayed e If the Log Converter cannot find the Stage 3 record the Acknowledgement date time and End State will not be displayed and the appropriate duration will not be calculated e If any one stage is missing the appropriate duration will not be calculated To view the GE Graph gt Click on an event gt Click on the Graph button The following screen will appear Waveform 13 4 2 2007 3 32 27 607 PM Wavelorm Inm Surge fits itt this eti Key Functions for the GE Graph Page Up Previous Relay Record Page Down Next Relay Record Home Current Relay Start State End Current Relay End State GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 43 CONTROL OUTPUT LOG RELAYS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 44 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial
413. the threshold for a PQ event and waveform capture enter the desired percentage of Full Scale in the Value column of the Above Setpoint and Below Setpoint sections Full Scales are shown in the lower right corner of the screen y Note on CBEMA fered The CBEMA plotting is a power quality standard known world wide for recording the amount of damage voltage transient conditions have done to the equipment being monitored The meter automatically records this information For CBEMA purposes the user programs internal set points for voltage below 90 and above 110 of full scale 10 from the nominal voltage These setpoints are defined by the ITI CBEMA specification The ITI CBEMA Curve is published by Information Technology Industry Council ITI and is available at http www itic org iss_pol techdocs curve pdf A user can set a recording with tighter voltage limits to trigger a waveform recording However CBEMA plotting will be based only on the limits internally set iy Note on Setting the Meter to Record Current Faults nave As discussed the voltage setpoints are used to record voltage type events such as voltage surges sags and transients The current settings are used to record faults on the line or in rush currents from devices such as motors Typically to catch these events set the limit to above 200 of full scale 2 Waveform Clipping Threshold EPM 9800 Standard Hardware 91 0924A Peak before clipping 4 48 GE C
414. tion over a network The Gateway operates as a Modbus RTU Master with programmable Baud Rate up to WV 115200 NOTE Direct Connection gt Click the Connect button on the Tool Bar or select Connect gt Quick Connect gt Click the Network radio button The Connect screen will change from the Serial Port version to this example Serial Port o Network Device Address 7 Host Network Port i Protocol Enter settings for Network Connection see your Network Administrator for correct settings gt Inthe Device Address field enter 1 gt Inthe Host field enter an IP Address or a Registered Name see your Network Administrator In the Network Port and Protocol fields the example settings are fixed gt Click Connect GE Communicator EXT locates the meter and the Device Status screen appears confirming the connection gt Click OK The computer is now connected to the meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6 5 SOFTWARE CONNECTION CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS The Computer Status Bar at the bottom of the screen confirms the computer s connection parameters Status Bars vary depending on the connection parameters fi You may use a connected external display to view the baud rate address and wv communication protocol of each port See Chapter 3 for details of how to configure the E meter s communication ports Connection Manager Connect a meter to a computer using Port 1 9450 96
415. tion 3 5 EPM 9450 9650 or 4 5 EPM 9800 fi A computer talks to the Internal Network Option meter via Modbus TCP This meter LA receives data in Modbus TCP incoming message format and communicates with other devices via Modbus RTU The other meters do not have to be Internal Network Option units gt If additional devices are required in the Device Address field enter the Address assigned to the additional unit Each unit MUST have a unique address other than 1 see section 2 5 1 is reserved as the address of the primary unit connected to the network V In the Name field enter a name for the device that will differentiate it from any others at that location In the Protocol field select Modbus TCP Leave the Device Type field set to Type of meter VV V Set the IP Address and the Network Port gt Click on the Close button when all information is entered If you are connecting to multiple units at this location repeat the above process for all units Each device MUST have a unique address GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 19 INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION gt CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER Click on the Close button when you have finished adding or removing devices The first Connection Manager screen returns Connection Manager List of Locations Connected to Location 2i 2 5 5 Troubleshooting tthe Connection If the connection fails check the connec
416. tion at the Internal Network Option meter first Once that connection is confirmed check the connections with other devices Suggested checkpoints Internal Network Option Meter gt gt Other Devices gt gt Check cables Check IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway settings configured in section 3 5 Check that the Address is 1 this section Check that Modbus TCP was selected in Device Properties this section Check all the above except for the address which must be unique and not set to 1 Check that the Baud Rate settings for the Ethernet Gateway Port 2 EPM 9450 9650 Port 3 EPM 9800 and the Devices are the same configured in section 3 5 or 4 5 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CONNECTION Pinging Try Pinging to a known good network device such as another computer to verify that your computer is connected properly to the network gt Go to the DOS Prompt or Console if you are using Windows NT gt Ping IP Address Example Ping 135 15 173 19 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 21 CHANGING THE PRIMARY DEVICE CHAPTER 2 CONNECTING TO A GE METER 2 6 Changing the Primary Device One copy of the GE Communicator EXT connected to multiple GE devices section 2 5 may only view data or edit Device Profiles from one device at a time the Primary Device An exception is the Poll Multiple D
417. tiple waveforms into one graph gt Click the items on the left side of the Advanced Waveform screen for each waveform you wish to include gt Click the Add button to add the selected items to the Selected Waveform Items list on the right side of the screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 27 VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS gt Click the Graph button at the bottom of the screen The following example screen shows the Vpn and channels HAN hall vga 12 33 24 611 PM asian Kirio rromi Catach if Abe rameter lt lt ESS PE QE wa ee fit Waveforens 012163 ESE 20m To move Hash Marks on the screen gt Move the mouse Duration is calculated from mark 2 to mark 1 in milliseconds To zoom in on a portion of the graph gt Draw a box around the desired area by dragging the mouse and holding down the left button gt Release the mouse button to activate the zoom gt Click the Zoom Out button to decrease the resolution To include the laux in the graph gt Press the laux On button gt Click laux Off to remove it To include the High Speed Inputs in the graph gt Click Inputs On gt Double click on the Inputs graph for a closer view Each input is listed on the Y axis followed by a 1 or 0 A 1 denotes that the input is open a 0 denotes that the input is closed gt Click Inputs Off to remove the graph To print the graph gt Click the Print
418. to effect changes gt Resetting Logs is recommended see section 4 9 Total Bytes Used and Bytes Remaining screens display the memory status for that particular file The Meter assumes 256 bytes of memory for each file Total memory is determined at time of purchase GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 55 TRENDING PROFILE SETTINGS AND LOAD PROFILE RECORDING CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER 4 6 3 Pad Missing Records for Historical Logs When the meter is not in normal operation it will not record any data for Log 1 and Log 2 For example during firmware updates or loss of power data will not be saved Some applications may require data logs to contain those missing records To remedy this problem you can Enable the feature in View gt Options gt Log Retrieval gt Click the Pad Meter Log File box in front of the feature gt Click OK Paths Data Scan Mode Tech Mode Settings Log Retievel Energy Bing Module MisceBaneous IF While retrieving a log from the GE meter stop the log from being updated This setting is not recommended F Disable backup of retrieved log file EPM log file with records for missing intervals in the historical logs This feature pads missing records for Log 1 and Log 2 The software causes the Log Converter program to automatically pad the missing records with a value of 0 for each log retrieval process and stores them in the Log DB file By default if the Mete
419. tton GE Communicator EXT will ask you to select a previously stored log file DB GE Communicator EXT defaults to the Retrieved Logs directory OR gt Run Log Viewer from the Windows Start menu Log Viewer s main screen appears 2 Log Viewer Select ime gt Choose the log data file s you would like to view If you have retrieved a log from GE Communicator EXT that file is selected for Meter 1 as in the example above Meter 1 OR gt Click on either meter button 1 or 2 that displays a meter name Log Viewer will ask you to select a log database file GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 8 7 VIEWING LOGS WITH GE COMMUNICATOR EXT S LOG VIEWER CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS a Ss Fese EG Date Log Fiw D8 z Cancel F Opon as readorty gt You may choose a different log file for Meter 1 and for Meter 2 You may only load one log file per meter gt The log file assigned to each meter is listed in the pull down menu above the button gt Select No Meter from the pull down menu to close a log file gt Select what log data points you would like to view by clicking on the Data Points button in the Select Data section The following screen appears The Data Points available will vary with the type of log and the parameters set for it gt From the Available Data Points column click on the data points you want to include when viewing the log file gt To select multiple po
420. twork card firmware can be easily updated via the Web Follow these steps gt Start your browser gt Ifyou know the meter s IP Address type it in the browser s URL Address Bar The Main WebExplorer screen appears Volts amps Meter Name 00121469 Poweer Energy Date Time 2007 04 17 16 15 09 560 Powor Quality puise Vohage Frequency Accumulation Instentaneous Inputs i Motor Information Emails Diagnostic Tools gt Click Tools gt Click on Firmware Upgrade or add update1 htm to the end of the URL The Enter Network Password screen will appear and ask for a User Name and Password gt Type User Name and Password into Windows Enter Network Password 2 x V Pleare type your uter namne and parraad Sie 394 246 209 Ream Adina mstiator useme O I Save this parswoed in yout password ist Initial User Name eignet Initial Password inp100 6 44 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS UPDATE NETWORK CARD FIRMWARE FROM A BROWSER IN RUNTIME MODE ONLY y See section 6 9 to change User Name and Password NOTE gt Click OK The Update Run Time Firmware screen appears Uplate Hun lene enmare Marinet Internet Explorer provides ly GE Conmanver ad lndheatsiad J nll rr Cra ec PLS ER wen Jee a G aena Be 00 Update Parve Frmen dh ass Tab Update INP 100 Run time firmware 1 Chick on the Browse button to select the firmware file F
421. ues you can represent and display as 0 to 360 degrees or 180 to 180 degrees etc Selections will appear in a pull down menu for the associated point Modulo Certain values are cumulative and can roll over and start recounting from zero For those values where required you can enter a point at which the rollover will occur Offset Where allowed you can enter a value offset which will be added to the data point when it is computed EPM 9450 Custom Modbus Map This screen appears if the connected device is an EPM 9450 m Modbus Se a Device Name 412297 1 Cycle Block Time Siamp 412301 1 Cycle Current 8 412303 1 Cycle Curent A B C 412305 1 Cycle Currents B 412307 1 Cycte Measured N Currant 412309 1 Cycte Celculoted N Current 412311 Tenth Second Current A R C 412313 Tenth Second Current A 8 C 412316 Tenth Second Current A B C 412317 Tenth Second Phase to Phase Voks 412319 Tenth Second Phase to Phase Volis 412321 Tenth Second Phase to Phase Voks 412323 Tenth Second VAR A B C 412325 Tenth Second VAR A B 412327 Tenth Second VAR A 8 O 412329 Tenth Second Worms A B C 412331 Tenth Second Wos A B C ONM OnN ONnN GeooONnNn coG F 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 z 2 2 2 2 gt Type in the Line and Point a Most Frequently Used List is below for the reading you would like to view gt Click Enter The Description automatically appears Table 3 2 Most Fre
422. ull Scales are based on the CT and PT ratios see section 4 3 1 gt Be sure to set the CT and PT ratios first GE Communicator EXT automatically recalculates the Full Scales every time the CT and PT ratios change and should be verified every time CT and PT Ratios are changed GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 9 GENERAL SETTINGS Ww NOTE y NOTE E CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER Changing the CT and PT Ratios will reset the meter clearing logs and stored data This action prepares the meter for placement in a new installation or changing of the Instrument Transformers gt From the Device Profile screen see section 4 2 click on the button beside General Settings gt Click on the Limit and Waveform Full Scales line The following submenu appears IA B C Nc 5 00 INm 5 00 VAN BN CN 13 20k V AB BC CA 22 86k VAUX 13 20k Power Phase 66 00k Power Total 198 00k Frequency 60 00 The EPM 9800 screen displays the Device Profile s settings for the Limit and Waveform Full Scales Frequency and Voltage values are nominal values The Phase Powers are computed using nominal voltage and rated maximum current gt Double click on any of the settings The Limit and Waveform Full Scales screen appears Device Profile Limit and Waveform Full Scales I A B C Ne I Nm Y AN BN CN V AB BC CA V Aux Power Phase 66 00k Power Total 198 00k Frequency 60 00 gt
423. unng mozas a This screen displays the scaled Pulse Accumulations from the meter s eight internal digital inputs It also displays the Fixed Window Average and Max Demand for the eight Pulse Accumulations At the bottom of the screen you will also find four Totalizers which are combinations of the eight internal inputs and the meter s watt hour counter This screen is the result of configuring the Pulse Accumulations settings in the Device Profile See Chapters 3 and 4 for details on settings and to edit settings The meter can be programmed to accumulate and aggregate poles from any pulse generating device gt Click OK to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen gt Click Print to print this screen gt Click Export to save a text file of the Input Readings Your computer will ask you to name the file and choose a save in location gt Click Save or Cancel to return to the main GE Communicator EXT screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 23 POWER QUALITY AND ALARMS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 4 Power Quality and Alarms 7 4 1 Phasors The Phasors screen displays the phase relationships of the currently connected device The EPM 9800 screen displays the Form and Configuration at the top of the screen gt Select Phasors from the Real Time Poll gt Power Quality and Alarms menu or click the Phasors button on the tool bar The Phasors screen If you have an auxiliary voltage reading i
424. ur own code here function do_get_data_ Meter 2 insert your own code here insert your own code here lt script gt F 2 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER F APPLICATION NOTES CHANGE BROWSER SETTINGS F 3 Change Browser Settings Changes to the Internet Explorer IE Version 6 Browser Settings gt Go to Internet Explorer s Internet Options window axi General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings Z2 O Intemet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you ER haven t placed in other zones m Security level for this zone Custom Custom settings To change the settings click Custom Level To use the recommended settings click Default Level Custom Level Default Level omes n gt Click Security tab gt Internet Icon gt Custom Level Asecurity Settings window appears gt Inthe Security Settings window scroll down to the Miscellaneaous section Set Enable for Access data source across domains and Set Enable for Navigate sub frames from across different domains gt Click OK to close the Security Settings screen GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Fas CHANGE BROWSER SETTINGS F 4 CHAPTER F APPLICATION NOTES gt Click OK again to close the Internet Options screen Sec
425. uration or double click on the Display Configuration line The following set of screens Meter Display Programmable Settings appears gt Click tabs at the top of the screens to access the Programmable Settings EPM 9000 F able Settings ij Lahel nad D si e Display Modes gt Enter a three letter Label for each of the three View Modes Enter a Description for each View Mode using the Line 1 and 2 Description windows Femer form Dititey 4 32 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS e Screen Assignments gt Enter up to 16 screens for each View Mode Your label for each View Mode appears at the top of each column EPM 9800 Programmable Settings r Primary Energy ________ Primary Power Scale Number of Digits to Display Number of Digits to Display Decimal Point Location Decimal Point Location Display Leading Zeroes Preview Preview 999 9 e Power and Energy Display gt Set Scale Digits and Decimal Point Previews appear at the bottom of the screen Settings on this screen control the display of energy related numbers Care should be given to match the values on the display with those in historical logs These settings apply to VA hours Watt hours VARhours and VAR hours quadrants in the meter Scale factor is the user programmable setting that determines how measurements made by the meter
426. ure is enabled or disabled do either of the following gt From the Tools menu select Passwords gt Status One of two screens will appear either the screen stating Password Protection Enabled or the screen stating Password Protection Disabled gt Click OK gt Check the computer status bar at the bottom of the screen If passwords are enabled it will read PW Enabled If passwords are disabled it will read PW Disabled Access the computer status bar from the View menu Connected Network TCP IP Addr 1 3 94 246 209 00121689 Modbus TCP PW Enabled SS Disabled GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 11 5 DISABLING PASSWORDS CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS 11 4 Disabling Passwords To disable the password function you must use the Level 2 password gt From the Tools menu select Passwords gt Enable Disable Passwords The following screen appears Disable Password Feature To Disable The Password Feature Please Enter the Level 2 Password in the field below gt Enter the Level 2 password and click OK Protection Status The password function is now disabled The status bar at the bottom of your screen will now read PW Disabled 11 6 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 11 PASSWORDS LOGGING ON AND OFF 11 5 Logging On and Off When passwords are enabled you may Log On using either password level to gain access to protected areas The two minute timer desc
427. ure one Email Address which will be stored in the meter for single user or administrative use Eight additional addresses can be programmed in the poll_profile xml file see WebXML The alarm format for the Administrative Address is always Long Format to insure that the alarm detail will be transmitted gt Enter the following values on this screen to configure the Administrative Address GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL Email Server IP Address Name IP Address Name 10 0 0 250 or mail abccorp com Email Server Port Port 25 is the Default Email Monitor Email Address To Address the Primary Email Address to be notified of an event Return Reply Address From Address Administrative Email Address 6 39 CUSTOMIZING SCREENS 6 40 CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS e Email Subject Text Typical Message might be Limits Exceeded If your email server SMTP server requires authentication before sending out the email you must enable the checkbox and supply the correct user name and password in the configuration screen or the device will not be able to send out emails This feature is implemented according to ESMTP Specification and supports 64 bit encryption for the user name and password gt Click OK or Cancel Configure more Email Recipients Edit the poll_profile xml file saved in FTP Server see FTP Server gt From EMAIL_1 to EMAIL_8 enter the email address within the double quotes gt From FOR
428. urity Settings a ME Settings Enable O Prompt Miscellaneous Access data sources across domains O Disable O Prompt 4 Allow META REFRESH O Disable Enable Display mixed content O Disable O Enable BX Mrama Security Settings 2 x Settings Navigate sub frames across different domains Software channel permissions O High safety O Low safety Medium safety Submit nonencrypted form data il O Disable Enable O Prompt 4 Userdata persistence DN Dizaha GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 GE Communicator EXT 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 Appendix G Ethernet Network 010101110010 011 1 G 1 Network Error Codes Error Codes G 1 1 Network Error Codes Reported by Software that uses Ethernet including GE Communicator EXT These codes are provided for your information Case 10004 GetWSAErrorString Interrupted system call Case 10009 GetWSAErrorString Bad file number Case 10013 GetWSAErrorString Case 10014 GetWSAErrorString Case 10022 GetWSAErrorString Case 10024 GetWSAErrorString Case 10035 GetWSAErrorString Case 10036 GetWSAErrorString Case 10037 GetWSAErrorString Case 10038 GetWSAErrorString Case 10039 GetWSAErrorString Case 10040 GetWSAErrorString Case 10041 GetWSAErrorString Case 10042 GetWSAErrorString
429. urn to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter For EPM 9650 Only To make the EPM 9650 follow the settings on this screen go to the Test 4 Pulse screen after the Device Profile has been updated On the Test Pulse screen click the m On button Ignore the settings on this screen see section 3 26 3 4 3 External Display Options This setting of the Device Profile configures the Meter s External Display to read either Primary or Secondary volts All other readings will be in the Primary regardless of this setting Many utility companies want to read secondary volts and primary power readings This feature allows them to do this 3 30 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS gt From the Device Profile screen see section 3 2 double click on External Display Options line Device Profile External Display Settings j gt Use the pull down menu to select either Primary or Secondary units for voltage gt Click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you MUST click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter 3 4 4 Programming Transformer Loss Compensation gt From the Device Profile screen see sction 3 2 click on the button beside Transformer Loss
430. us of the Password Protection function see Chapter 12 Scroll to the right to find this section of the Device Status Bar 2 24 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Consumer amp Industrial Multilin 1 011 101110011100 01100111110001 000111010110110 11110001001101 010101110010 011 1 3 1 Overview GE Communicator EXT Chapter 3 Configuring the EPM 9450 9650 Meter GE Communicator EXT lets you configure an EPM 9450 9650 meter s Programmable Settings which are stored in the unit s Device Profile Click on the in front of each group of settings to view the menu gt EXT Generel Setings gt EXT Revenue and Energy Settings I EXT Power Quality end Alarm Settings EXT Trending Profile Settings e External VO Modules The following is an overview of the procedure for configuring a meter GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL s OVERVIEW NOTE v NOTE NOTE g 2 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER 1 Retrieve the meter s Device Profile see section 3 2 2 Configure the Programmable Settings stored in the Device Profile sections 3 3 to 3 7 3 Send the new Device Profile back to the meter section 3 2 If you click the Save Load or Update buttons you MUST have a unique Meter Destination Label so that the file is saved loaded or updated to the intended device This chapter also details e Resetting Meter Information section 10 and Manual Waveform Ca
431. val Window Oh 15m 0s Block Averaging Time Interval Window Oh 15m 0s Rolling Averaging Sub interval Window Oh 5m Os Rolling Sub Intervals 3 Predictive Rolling Window Average 100 00 gt Double click on any of the settings and the Demand Integration Programming screens appear Thermal Averaging Time Interval Window b ome hs Minutes o Seconds gt Click on the tabs at the top of the screens to navigate from one screen to the others gt Make changes to the screens according to the requirements of your application Following is a brief description of each setting and its function e Thermal Averaging Time Interval Window above Allows you to set hours minutes and seconds for a precise thermal window of demand data GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 29 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER e Block Averaging Time Interval Window Sets the length of the Block Interval used for Demand Calculation and other Interval based functions evice Profile Demand Integration Block Averaging Time Interval Window o Hours Minutes ag seconds r Block Window Sync High Speed Input Sync Disabled e Block Window Sync Synchronizes the meter with pulses from a High Speed Input connected to another meter gt Click Generate End of Interval Pulse on the lower section of the above screen not shown to produce a synchronizing output and select a Relay and Pulse Width for the outpu
432. ve a predefined name it will use the device name assigned here as the file name for the retrieved log file If you already named your device you do not have to assign it a name in this section We recommend that you keep both names the same e Toadda device gt Click Add The Edit Script Device screen will appear e To edit a device gt Select a device from the list by clicking on it gt Click Edit The Edit Script Device screen will appear e To delete a device gt Select a device from the list by clicking on it gt Click Delete A window will appear that asks Are you sure you want to delete this device gt Click Yes or No e If you Click Edit or Delete before you select a device a window will appear that says Please select a device gt Click OK GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 14 11 DEVICES CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM gt Select a device and follow the above steps gt Click Close to return to the Set Up Script screen 14 12 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 14 SCRIPT amp SCHEDULER PROGRAM ADDING A SCRIPT DEVICE 14 7 Adding a Script Device This screen facilitates the adding of new devices to a particular script You can enter up to 256 devices for each script For editing of devices see section 14 8 Add Edit Script Device Script Connection type Remote Dial up Comnechon type for this dewiew COM Port r Device information me
433. ve the most recent Internal Network Ethernet Option firmware upgrade This Flash Upgrade effects ONLY the Internal Network Option within the meter This Flash Upgrade DOES NOT UPGRADE THE GE UNIT To upgrade the GE device refer to sections 13 2 13 3 and 13 4 of this manual You can download the latest software version through our internet site at www GEmultilin com Click on the Free Downloads button gt Copy the new firmware upgrade file to a directory on your computer The Internal Network firmware upgrade consists of two files an ini and a hex file Connect to the GE Meter gt From the Tools Menu select Flash Me This screen appears Select Device To Flash EPM Unit 9 irisal Networr EPM Comm Only EPM DSP Only LED Display gt Click Internal Network and the Next button If the Password Feature is Enabled the following Password screen appears Enter Password gt Enter your Level 2 Password GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 12 19 FLASH UPGRADING THE INTERNAL NETWORK OPTION CHAPTER 12 FLASH UPGRADING gt Click OK The Internal Network Flash Programmer screen appears Enter Command Mode is highlighted internal Network Option Flash Programmer Ent d Mode Program Flash gt Click on Enter Command Mode After a moment In Command Mode appears on the screen gt Click on Program Flash The following screen appears E E126 9 2 2 2ini Matoy Ei Desbrop as My Do
434. view the Waveform Settings click on a waveform record then click the Show Waveform Settings box on the left side of the screen To adjust the column widths position the cursor between columns at the top of the screen When the cursor changes to a left right arrow hold down the left mouse button and drag the column border left or right Release the button when the column is at the desired width To sort the data by record type in either ascending or descending order click on the Sort button Use the pull down menus to make your selection To view the waveform graphs see the following section VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS 8 10 Viewing Waveform Graphs gt To view any waveform in the main Waveform Log screen section 8 9 click on the desired record and then click the Graph button or double click on the desired record lilitiiiii tettacczzes santaccuses E E Sr Fe e E ES ESEA ETI EE A E T T __ feavtegwewer To change the Waveform Display Settings click the Options button in the upper left corner of the screen The Waveform Options screen will appear SERRE RRAKREKCKER 8 20 GE COMMUNICATOR ExT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 8 VIEWING LOGS VIEWING WAVEFORM GRAPHS Configurable options include 1 2 3 Start Up Mode Classic Overlay or Overlay group Overlay Mode Overlay or Group Plotting Method Line Point or Line and Point Line
435. wer Scale Unit kilo k Mega M Auto Energy Digits 5 6 7 8 Decimal Places 0 6 Energy Scale Unit kilo k Mega M The Energy Digits Scale and Decimal Places settings determine how the Energy Values are LE v displayed NOTE Power Direction View as Load View as Generator Demand Averaging Average Method Block or Rolling Interval 5 15 30 or 60 Minutes Subinterval 1 2 3 or 4 5 16 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 5 CONFIGURING THE EPM 6000 PANEL METER CONFIGURE THE EPM 6000 DEVICE PROFILE Auto Scroll Display gt Check On box for Parameters checked in the Display Configuration section of this screen to be automatically scrolled on the faceplate of the meter Display Configuration gt Check the Readings that you want displayed on the faceplate of the meter If invalid CT PT and Interval Settings are entered a warning will appear on the screen 5 3 4 Configure Scaling This screen displays the CT and PT Ratios and System Wiring EPM 6000 Profile CT Numerator Primary CT Denominator Secondary CT Multiplier CT Fullscale PT Numerator Primary PT Denominator Secondary PT Multiplier PT Fullscale 0 000 volts System Wiring CT Ratios CT Numerator 5 1 9999 CT Denominator 5 Preset to 5 or 1 Amp and cannot be changed CT Multiplier Scaling 1 1 10 or 100 PT Ratios PT Numerator 600 1 9999 PT Denominator 600 1 9999 PT Multiplier Sc
436. what is physically attached to the unit Revise the EPM Meter s Device Pro file each time an I O is added removed or configured GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GE Communicator EXT Chapter 10 External I O Modules I Os must use the EPM Meter s Port 4 EPM9450 9650 can also use Port 3 Set the port to 57600 Baud Master RS 485 Cable Group of 3 I Os Log Limit 1D 4 AO Module 1 Change Address Baud Rate Through Nexus 4 AO Module 2 evice Port Por 4 4 Al Module 1 nt 4 Current Setti Use these Edit buttons to configure the connected I Os Type mAON4 Analog Out 4 20mA 4ch MAON Analog Out 4 20mA 4 ch New Settings Device Assigned 4 Module Address E ea Module Baud Rate 57600 bi Device As d 4 eiea badge 4 Cancel Device Assigned 4 Device Assigned 4 Device Assigned 4 The EPM Meter recognizes O mod Device Assigned 4 Device Assigned 4 ules by the unique address Device Assigned 4 As 4 assigned to each one Use the Change I O Module Address Baud Rate function to assign a unique address to each I O before con necting the group to the EPM Meter 10 1 OUTLINE OF THE PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING I O MODULES CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES 10 2 Outline of the Procedure for Installing I O Modules The steps below are detailed in subsequent sections of this chapter gt Review I O hardware details in the meter s Installation and
437. will be displayed In most applications the measurements made in the metering circuit on the secondary side on the Instrument Transformers are displayed as Primary Values using the Scale Factor The Scale Factor Primary Value Secondary Value X Scale Factor and the Transformer Factor TF Voltage Transformer Ratio X Current Transformer Ratio are the same for energy measurements For display of voltage and current measurements VTR and CTR are used y Scale Factor takes precedence over all other settings i e all other settings are based on this setting NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4 33 REVENUE AND ENERGY SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER e Miscellaneous gt Set Screen Settings Optical Port and User Inactivity Time outs The Screen Settings replace Adjustments Mode in the default profile e Screen Settings gt Set Back Light Level brightness Back Light Time when Back Light shuts off Contrast Scroll Stop Phasor Rotation and Cumulative Demand Cumulative Demand Settings gt Set to Regular Running Total Continuous Running Total Current Max Min Optical Port gt Set Baud Rate and Optical Receive Normal or Inverted Inverted Operation is used with the Smart Coupler e User Inactivity Time Outs number of minutes since last user action when Mode reverts to View Mode 1 e Settings are 5 60 minutes Leave Test Mode After_ Minutes Reve
438. xT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES LOCATOR UTILITY STAND ALONE METHOD gt From the I O Devices menu select Locator Utility gt Stand Alone The following screen appears Device Locator Start Address 7 End Address SACUL EUD Es CLC 9600 X End Baud Rate 115200 z gt Set the Address and baud rate ranges for the search GE Communicator EXT will begin at the start address and baud rate searching every address up to and including the End Address then it will begin the same address search at the next baud rate in the range fi If you include ALL BAUD RATES the Device Locator will take about 12 hours to complete the v search If you know the baud rate of the device EPM Meters are normally 115200 I O s are 57600 just look in that baud rate The search will take minutes instead of hours GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 10 29 LOCATOR UTILITY STAND ALONE METHOD CHAPTER 10 EXTERNAL I O MODULES gt Click Start The Device Locator begins searching for devices within the specified baud rate and address range Device Locator Start Address zz End Address GUAU D E s CLC 9600 X End Baud Rate 115200 z Searching for a device at Address 3 9600 EPM 9560 1 9600 The Device Locator will continue to search for devices until it reaches the end of the specified criteria or until you click Stop gt Write down the address and baud rate gt Click Exit to return to the main GE Commun
439. xcel Spreadsheet with Example Numbers If you have MS Excel installed in your computer use the TLC Calculator button on the Transformer Loss screen of the Device Profile A copy of the MS Excel Spreadsheet with Example Numbers on the following pages will assist you GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL B 9 TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS Transformer Loss Compensation Calculation Three Element Meter with 3 VWye connected PT s and 3 CT s Company Substation aa Name PO Stn Tf Bank No S S O Date do ooo Tf Mant fo THSIN do o o O Loss Factors for GE Communicator Software Calc Used MVA Ratings HV High o o d O Value Phase 1 Phase Calculated Calc kVA _ No Load Loss Watts J 00 Full Load Loss Watts J O00 Exciting Curent Impedance d po fS Phase Phase Calculated Self Cooled kVA Rating C D E Phase to Phase Phase to Grd Test Voltage RSS O Full Load Current DIV 0 Meter Installation Data lier instrument Transformers Numerator Denominator Multip Potential Trt aaa ae Current Trf a a Power Multiplier Meter Secondary Voltage 120 volts for EPM 9650 Meter Secondary Current 5 5amps for EPM 9650 8 10 GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER B TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION CALCN WORKSHEETS TRANSFORMER LINE LOSS COMPENSATION Transformer Loss Compensatio
440. y is not changed even if the Range Selection is changed Frequency must be changed on the Limits screen e Power Phase is the amount of power per each phase e Power Total is the power of all phases combined gt When all changes are entered click OK to return to the main Device Profile screen gt For these changes to take effect you must click on the Update Device button This sends the new profile to the meter Reset Logs after changing any settings that will effect the Logs gt From the Menu Bar select Tools gt Reset Meter Information gt Click Reset All Logs gt Click OK See section 3 25 3 3 4 Time Settings To Edit a Device Profile s Time Settings 45 Time Settings Time Zone ZD 5 0 DST Enabled True Using Auto DST DST Start Auto DST End Auto Line Synchronization Disabled gt From the Device Profile screen see see section 3 2 click on the button in front of General Settings gt Double click on the Time Settings line The above submenu appears y DST Daylight Savings Time NOTE GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3 13 GENERAL SETTINGS 3 14 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9450 9650 METER gt Double click on any of the programmable settings The Time Settings screen appears Device Profile Time Settings Zone Descriptor Daylight Savings Information Auto DST X Line Synchronization Enable No gt Frequency eomz gt Make changes to
441. y select one or more additional options with the appropriate subselections Display For certain Data Points interpretation and display options are offered Example For An Angle values you can represent and display as 0 to 360 degrees or 180 to 180 degrees etc Selections will appear in a pull down menu for the associated point Modulo Certain values are cumulative and can roll over and start recounting from zero For those values where required you can enter a point at which the rollover will occur Offset Where allowed you can enter a value offset which will be added to the data point when it is computed Table 4 2 Custom Modbus Readings Line Point Description 34 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts AN 34 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts BN 34 One Second Phase to Neutral Volts Volts CN 35 One Second Auxiliary Volts V Aux 36 One Second A B C 1A 36 One Second A B C 1B 36 One Second A B C 1C GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL GENERAL SETTINGS CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURING THE EPM 9800 METER Table 4 2 Custom Modbus Readings 37 0 One Second Measured N Current 1Nm 38 0 One Second Calculated N Current 1Nc 39 0 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts AB 39 1 One Second Phase to Phase Volts Volts BC 39 2 One Seco
442. y the data from up to 32 inputs and paste it into a document gt Click OK to return to the main screen The Copy button at the right of the screen will allow you to copy the information from up to 32 Inputs and paste that data into a document GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7 31 POLL REAL TIME TRENDS CHAPTER 7 REAL TIME POLLING 7 5 Poll Real Time Trends The EPM 6000 meter has a unique screen Real Time Trends To view the Real Time Trends polling screen gt Select Real Time Trends from the Real Time Poll menu shown here 36 GE Communicator File Connection Real Time Poll Tools View Help Real Time Readings waa A Revenue Energy and Demand Readings gt Profile Sge Power Quality and Alarms p Polling The following screen appears Real Time Trends E Gi e TAS E e a a mvs Pot tererval tec ActoStone Interval roe Min Y Value Max Vakow arg gt To view parameters on this screen in the Parameters section of the screen select a set of values by clicking on the boxes next to the values gt Click Start This will start the graph gt Enter a value greater than 0 in the AutoStore box to create a csv Comma Separated Value Excel file that contains a log of the current values of the Store Interval The number entered is the Store Interval in seconds Stores all values not just those selected gt Click on the Store button at the bottom of
443. y the document The Rules of XML 1 The first line of the document the XML declaration defines the XML version and the characters used in the document an FW YN XML tags are case sensitive All XML elements MUST have a closing tag It is illegal to omit the closing tag All XML elements must be properly nested All XML documents must have a root tag first tag in an XML document GE COMMUNICATOR EXT INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 6 TOTAL WEB SOLUTIONS CUSTOMIZING SCREENS 6 Attribute values must always be quoted It is illegal to omit quotation marks around attribute values 7 Comment syntax is similar to HTML lt This is a comment gt Example of Root Tag and Elements The first tag in an XML document is the root tag All XML documents must contain a single tag pair to define the root element All other elements must be nested within the root element All elements can have subelements children Subelements must be correctly nested within their parent elements as shown below lt root gt lt child gt lt subchild gt lt subchild gt lt child gt lt root gt Example of Attributes lt data id 1 value 123 gt lt data gt Poll_profile xml File configured to poll parameters of each device Root tags lt GE_Multilin_POLL_DATA gt and lt GE_Multilin_POLL_DATA gt System elements lt GE_Multilin_SYSTEM gt and lt GE_Multilin_SYSTEM gt Contains system parameters and email

Multilin - ElectricalManuals.net

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents